rename the following methods:

tqparent parent
tqmask mask


git-svn-id: svn://anonsvn.kde.org/home/kde/branches/trinity/applications/amarok@1246260 283d02a7-25f6-0310-bc7c-ecb5cbfe19da

184 files changed, 1446 insertions, 1446 deletions

diff --git a/amarok/src/actionclasses.cpp b/amarok/src/actionclasses.cpp
index ec85dd26..3fd5c490 100644
--- a/amarok/src/actionclasses.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/actionclasses.cpp
@@ -169,12 +169,12 @@ Menu::instance()
 }
 
 KPopupMenu*
-Menu::helpMenu( TQWidget *tqparent ) //STATIC
+Menu::helpMenu( TQWidget *parent ) //STATIC
 {
     extern KAboutData aboutData;
 
     if ( s_helpMenu == 0 )
-        s_helpMenu = new KHelpMenu( tqparent, &aboutData, Amarok::actionCollection() );
+        s_helpMenu = new KHelpMenu( parent, &aboutData, Amarok::actionCollection() );
 
     return s_helpMenu->menu();
 }
@@ -288,8 +288,8 @@ AnalyzerAction::plug( TQWidget *w, int index )
 }
 
 
-AnalyzerContainer::AnalyzerContainer( TQWidget *tqparent )
-        : TQWidget( tqparent, "AnalyzerContainer" )
+AnalyzerContainer::AnalyzerContainer( TQWidget *parent )
+        : TQWidget( parent, "AnalyzerContainer" )
         , m_child( 0 )
 {
     TQToolTip::add( this, i18n( "Click for more analyzers" ) );
diff --git a/amarok/src/actionclasses.h b/amarok/src/actionclasses.h
index 2725bd7a..233fb626 100644
--- a/amarok/src/actionclasses.h
+++ b/amarok/src/actionclasses.h
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ namespace Amarok
   TQ_OBJECT
         public:
             static Menu *instance();
-            static KPopupMenu *helpMenu( TQWidget *tqparent = 0 );
+            static KPopupMenu *helpMenu( TQWidget *parent = 0 );
 
             enum MenuIds {
                 ID_CONF_DECODER,
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ namespace Amarok
     class AnalyzerContainer : public TQWidget
     {
         public:
-            AnalyzerContainer( TQWidget *tqparent );
+            AnalyzerContainer( TQWidget *parent );
         protected:
             virtual void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent* );
             virtual void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent* );
diff --git a/amarok/src/amarok.h b/amarok/src/amarok.h
index 45ed1aba..aa48d1ac 100644
--- a/amarok/src/amarok.h
+++ b/amarok/src/amarok.h
@@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ namespace Amarok
      */
     class LIBAMAROK_EXPORT Process : public KProcess {
         public:
-        Process( TQObject *tqparent = 0 ) : KProcess( tqparent ) {}
+        Process( TQObject *parent = 0 ) : KProcess( parent ) {}
         virtual int commSetupDoneC() {
             const int i = KProcess::commSetupDoneC();
             Amarok::closeOpenFiles(KProcess::out[0],KProcess::in[0], KProcess::err[0]);
diff --git a/amarok/src/analyzers/analyzerbase.cpp b/amarok/src/analyzers/analyzerbase.cpp
index 83fb1595..b4ff9ac0 100644
--- a/amarok/src/analyzers/analyzerbase.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/analyzers/analyzerbase.cpp
@@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ template class Analyzer::Base<TQWidget>;
 
 
 template<class W>
-Analyzer::Base<W>::Base( TQWidget *tqparent, uint timeout, uint scopeSize )
-        : W( tqparent )
+Analyzer::Base<W>::Base( TQWidget *parent, uint timeout, uint scopeSize )
+        : W( parent )
         , m_timeout( timeout )
         , m_fht( new FHT(scopeSize) )
 {}
@@ -188,8 +188,8 @@ Analyzer::Base<W>::demo() //virtual
 
 
 
-Analyzer::Base2D::Base2D( TQWidget *tqparent, uint timeout, uint scopeSize )
-   : Base<TQWidget>( tqparent, timeout, scopeSize )
+Analyzer::Base2D::Base2D( TQWidget *parent, uint timeout, uint scopeSize )
+   : Base<TQWidget>( parent, timeout, scopeSize )
 {
     setWFlags( TQt::WNoAutoErase ); //no flicker
 
@@ -229,8 +229,8 @@ Analyzer::Base2D::paletteChange( const TQPalette& )
 
 
 #ifdef HAVE_TQGLWIDGET
-Analyzer::Base3D::Base3D( TQWidget *tqparent, uint timeout, uint scopeSize )
-        : Base<TQGLWidget>( tqparent, timeout, scopeSize )
+Analyzer::Base3D::Base3D( TQWidget *parent, uint timeout, uint scopeSize )
+        : Base<TQGLWidget>( parent, timeout, scopeSize )
 {
     connect( &m_timer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ), TQT_SLOT( draw() ) );
 }
diff --git a/amarok/src/analyzers/analyzerfactory.cpp b/amarok/src/analyzers/analyzerfactory.cpp
index e712b4cf..2016656b 100644
--- a/amarok/src/analyzers/analyzerfactory.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/analyzers/analyzerfactory.cpp
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
 //separate from analyzerbase.cpp to save compile time
 
 
-TQWidget *Analyzer::Factory::createAnalyzer( TQWidget *tqparent )
+TQWidget *Analyzer::Factory::createAnalyzer( TQWidget *parent )
 {
     //new XmmsWrapper(); //toplevel
 
@@ -47,80 +47,80 @@ TQWidget *Analyzer::Factory::createAnalyzer( TQWidget *tqparent )
     switch( AmarokConfig::currentAnalyzer() )
     {
     case 2:
-        analyzer = new Sonogram( tqparent );
+        analyzer = new Sonogram( parent );
         break;
     case 1:
-        analyzer = new TurbineAnalyzer( tqparent );
+        analyzer = new TurbineAnalyzer( parent );
         break;
     case 3:
-        analyzer = new BarAnalyzer( tqparent );
+        analyzer = new BarAnalyzer( parent );
         break;
     case 4:
-        analyzer = new BlockAnalyzer( tqparent );
+        analyzer = new BlockAnalyzer( parent );
         break;
 #ifdef HAVE_TQGLWIDGET
     case 5:
-        analyzer = new GLAnalyzer( tqparent );
+        analyzer = new GLAnalyzer( parent );
         break;
     case 6:
-        analyzer = new GLAnalyzer2( tqparent );
+        analyzer = new GLAnalyzer2( parent );
         break;
     case 7:
-        analyzer = new GLAnalyzer3( tqparent );
+        analyzer = new GLAnalyzer3( parent );
         break;
     case 8:
 #else
     case 5:
 #endif
-        analyzer = new TQLabel( i18n( "Click for Analyzers" ), tqparent ); //blank analyzer to satisfy Grue
+        analyzer = new TQLabel( i18n( "Click for Analyzers" ), parent ); //blank analyzer to satisfy Grue
         static_cast<TQLabel *>(analyzer)->tqsetAlignment( TQt::AlignCenter );
     break;
 
     default:
         AmarokConfig::setCurrentAnalyzer( 0 );
     case 0:
-        analyzer = new BoomAnalyzer( tqparent );
+        analyzer = new BoomAnalyzer( parent );
     }
 
     return analyzer;
 }
 
-TQWidget *Analyzer::Factory::createPlaylistAnalyzer( TQWidget *tqparent)
+TQWidget *Analyzer::Factory::createPlaylistAnalyzer( TQWidget *parent)
 {
     TQWidget *analyzer = 0;
     switch( AmarokConfig::currentPlaylistAnalyzer() )
     {
         case 1:
-            analyzer = new TurbineAnalyzer( tqparent );
+            analyzer = new TurbineAnalyzer( parent );
             break;
         case 2:
-            analyzer = new Sonogram( tqparent );
+            analyzer = new Sonogram( parent );
             break;
         case 3:
-            analyzer = new BoomAnalyzer( tqparent );
+            analyzer = new BoomAnalyzer( parent );
             break;
     #ifdef HAVE_TQGLWIDGET
         case 4:
-            analyzer = new GLAnalyzer( tqparent );
+            analyzer = new GLAnalyzer( parent );
             break;
         case 5:
-            analyzer = new GLAnalyzer2( tqparent );
+            analyzer = new GLAnalyzer2( parent );
             break;
         case 6:
-            analyzer = new GLAnalyzer3( tqparent );
+            analyzer = new GLAnalyzer3( parent );
             break;
         case 7:
     #else
         case 4:
     #endif
-            analyzer = new TQLabel( i18n( "Click for Analyzers" ), tqparent ); //blank analyzer to satisfy Grue
+            analyzer = new TQLabel( i18n( "Click for Analyzers" ), parent ); //blank analyzer to satisfy Grue
             static_cast<TQLabel *>(analyzer)->tqsetAlignment( TQt::AlignCenter );
             break;
 
         default:
             AmarokConfig::setCurrentPlaylistAnalyzer( 0 );
         case 0:
-            analyzer = new BlockAnalyzer( tqparent );
+            analyzer = new BlockAnalyzer( parent );
             break;
     }
     return analyzer;
diff --git a/amarok/src/analyzers/baranalyzer.cpp b/amarok/src/analyzers/baranalyzer.cpp
index 40f5694f..c54353aa 100644
--- a/amarok/src/analyzers/baranalyzer.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/analyzers/baranalyzer.cpp
@@ -17,15 +17,15 @@
 #include <tqpainter.h>
 
 
-BarAnalyzer::BarAnalyzer( TQWidget *tqparent )
-    : Analyzer::Base2D( tqparent, 12, 8 )
+BarAnalyzer::BarAnalyzer( TQWidget *parent )
+    : Analyzer::Base2D( parent, 12, 8 )
     //, m_bands( BAND_COUNT )
     //, barVector( BAND_COUNT, 0 )
     //, roofVector( BAND_COUNT, 50 )
     //, roofVelocityVector( BAND_COUNT, ROOF_VELOCITY_REDUCTION_FACTOR )
 {
     //roof pixmaps don't depend on size() so we do in the ctor
-    m_bg = tqparent->paletteBackgroundColor();
+    m_bg = parent->paletteBackgroundColor();
 
     TQColor fg( 0xff, 0x50, 0x70 );
     #define m_bg backgroundColor()
diff --git a/amarok/src/analyzers/blockanalyzer.cpp b/amarok/src/analyzers/blockanalyzer.cpp
index 68538ae7..1ebfdf0f 100644
--- a/amarok/src/analyzers/blockanalyzer.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/analyzers/blockanalyzer.cpp
@@ -29,8 +29,8 @@ static inline uint myMax( uint v1, uint v2 ) { return v1 > v2 ? v1 : v2; }
 namespace Amarok { extern KConfig *config( const TQString& ); }
 
 
-BlockAnalyzer::BlockAnalyzer( TQWidget *tqparent )
-        : Analyzer::Base2D( tqparent, 20, 9 )
+BlockAnalyzer::BlockAnalyzer( TQWidget *parent )
+        : Analyzer::Base2D( parent, 20, 9 )
         , m_columns( 0 )         //uint
         , m_rows( 0 )            //uint
         , m_y( 0 )               //uint
diff --git a/amarok/src/analyzers/boomanalyzer.cpp b/amarok/src/analyzers/boomanalyzer.cpp
index d50ca3af..3505c82c 100644
--- a/amarok/src/analyzers/boomanalyzer.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/analyzers/boomanalyzer.cpp
@@ -10,8 +10,8 @@
 #include <tqslider.h>
 #include <tqspinbox.h>
 
-BoomAnalyzer::BoomAnalyzer( TQWidget *tqparent )
-    : Analyzer::Base2D( tqparent, 10, 9 )
+BoomAnalyzer::BoomAnalyzer( TQWidget *parent )
+    : Analyzer::Base2D( parent, 10, 9 )
     , K_barHeight( 1.271 )//1.471
     , F_peakSpeed( 1.103 )//1.122
     , F( 1.0 )
diff --git a/amarok/src/analyzers/glanalyzer.cpp b/amarok/src/analyzers/glanalyzer.cpp
index a3387734..74884b22 100644
--- a/amarok/src/analyzers/glanalyzer.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/analyzers/glanalyzer.cpp
@@ -24,8 +24,8 @@
 #include <kdebug.h>
 
 
-GLAnalyzer::GLAnalyzer( TQWidget *tqparent )
-        : Analyzer::Base3D(tqparent, 15)
+GLAnalyzer::GLAnalyzer( TQWidget *parent )
+        : Analyzer::Base3D(parent, 15)
         , m_oldy(32, -10.0f)
         , m_peaks(32)
 {}
diff --git a/amarok/src/analyzers/glanalyzer2.cpp b/amarok/src/analyzers/glanalyzer2.cpp
index 19fae32d..ae6c5b2c 100644
--- a/amarok/src/analyzers/glanalyzer2.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/analyzers/glanalyzer2.cpp
@@ -28,8 +28,8 @@
 #include <sys/time.h>
 
 
-GLAnalyzer2::GLAnalyzer2( TQWidget *tqparent ):
-Analyzer::Base3D(tqparent, 15)
+GLAnalyzer2::GLAnalyzer2( TQWidget *parent ):
+Analyzer::Base3D(parent, 15)
 {
     //initialize openGL context before managing GL calls
     makeCurrent();
diff --git a/amarok/src/analyzers/glanalyzer3.cpp b/amarok/src/analyzers/glanalyzer3.cpp
index 74f8ad29..bd16f689 100644
--- a/amarok/src/analyzers/glanalyzer3.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/analyzers/glanalyzer3.cpp
@@ -121,8 +121,8 @@ class Paddle
 };
 
 
-GLAnalyzer3::GLAnalyzer3( TQWidget *tqparent ):
-Analyzer::Base3D(tqparent, 15)
+GLAnalyzer3::GLAnalyzer3( TQWidget *parent ):
+Analyzer::Base3D(parent, 15)
 {
     //initialize openGL context before managing GL calls
     makeCurrent();
diff --git a/amarok/src/analyzers/sonogram.cpp b/amarok/src/analyzers/sonogram.cpp
index cff361fb..253d3915 100644
--- a/amarok/src/analyzers/sonogram.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/analyzers/sonogram.cpp
@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@
 #include <tqpainter.h>
 #include "sonogram.h"
 
-Sonogram::Sonogram(TQWidget *tqparent) :
-    Analyzer::Base2D(tqparent, 16, 9)
+Sonogram::Sonogram(TQWidget *parent) :
+    Analyzer::Base2D(parent, 16, 9)
 {
 }
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/analyzers/turbine.h b/amarok/src/analyzers/turbine.h
index c216a9a0..6ad34fbc 100644
--- a/amarok/src/analyzers/turbine.h
+++ b/amarok/src/analyzers/turbine.h
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
 class TurbineAnalyzer : public BoomAnalyzer
 {
     public:
-        TurbineAnalyzer( TQWidget *tqparent ) : BoomAnalyzer( tqparent ) {}
+        TurbineAnalyzer( TQWidget *parent ) : BoomAnalyzer( parent ) {}
 
         void analyze( const Scope& );
 };
diff --git a/amarok/src/app.cpp b/amarok/src/app.cpp
index a0b2a34a..a517ac34 100644
--- a/amarok/src/app.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/app.cpp
@@ -530,13 +530,13 @@ void App::fixHyperThreading()
 
         // If the library is new enough try and call sched_setaffinity.
         #ifdef SCHEDAFFINITY_SUPPORT
-        cpu_set_t tqmask;
-        CPU_ZERO( &tqmask ); // Initializes all the bits in the tqmask to zero
-        CPU_SET( 0, &tqmask ); // Sets only the bit corresponding to cpu
+        cpu_set_t mask;
+        CPU_ZERO( &mask ); // Initializes all the bits in the mask to zero
+        CPU_SET( 0, &mask ); // Sets only the bit corresponding to cpu
         #ifdef SCHEDAFFINITY_3PARAMS
-        if ( sched_setaffinity( 0, sizeof(tqmask), &tqmask ) == -1 )
+        if ( sched_setaffinity( 0, sizeof(mask), &mask ) == -1 )
         #else  //SCHEDAFFINITY_3PARAMS
-        if ( sched_setaffinity( 0, &tqmask ) == -1 )
+        if ( sched_setaffinity( 0, &mask ) == -1 )
         #endif //SCHEDAFFINITY_3PARAMS
         {
             warning() << "sched_setaffinity() call failed with error code: " << errno << endl;
@@ -646,7 +646,7 @@ void App::applySettings( bool firstTime )
 
 #ifdef TQ_WS_X11
             //TODO get this to work!
-            //may work if you set no tqparent for the systray?
+            //may work if you set no parent for the systray?
             //KWin::setSystemTrayWindowFor( m_pTray->winId(), m_pPlayerWindow->winId() );
 
             delete m_pTray; m_pTray = new Amarok::TrayIcon( m_pPlayerWindow );
diff --git a/amarok/src/browserToolBar.h b/amarok/src/browserToolBar.h
index 1425cd37..6d421ab0 100644
--- a/amarok/src/browserToolBar.h
+++ b/amarok/src/browserToolBar.h
@@ -18,8 +18,8 @@ namespace Browser
     class ToolBar : public KToolBar
     {
         public:
-            ToolBar( TQWidget *tqparent )
-                    : KToolBar( tqparent, "NotMainToolBar" )
+            ToolBar( TQWidget *parent )
+                    : KToolBar( parent, "NotMainToolBar" )
             {
                 setMovingEnabled(false);
                 setFlat(true);
diff --git a/amarok/src/browserbar.cpp b/amarok/src/browserbar.cpp
index d945c8b0..e2c6365b 100644
--- a/amarok/src/browserbar.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/browserbar.cpp
@@ -54,15 +54,15 @@ namespace Amarok
 
         virtual void mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
         {
-            static_cast<BrowserBar*>(TQT_TQWIDGET(tqparent()))->mouseMovedOverSplitter( e );
+            static_cast<BrowserBar*>(TQT_TQWIDGET(parent()))->mouseMovedOverSplitter( e );
         }
     };
 }
 
 BrowserBar* BrowserBar::s_instance = 0;
 
-BrowserBar::BrowserBar( TQWidget *tqparent )
-        : TQWidget( tqparent, "BrowserBar" )
+BrowserBar::BrowserBar( TQWidget *parent )
+        : TQWidget( parent, "BrowserBar" )
         , EngineObserver( EngineController::instance() )
         , m_playlistBox( new TQVBox( this ) )
         , m_divider( new Amarok::Splitter( this ) )
diff --git a/amarok/src/browserbar.h b/amarok/src/browserbar.h
index c0cb226d..25ff2a33 100644
--- a/amarok/src/browserbar.h
+++ b/amarok/src/browserbar.h
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ class BrowserBar : public TQWidget, public EngineObserver
   TQ_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    BrowserBar( TQWidget *tqparent );
+    BrowserBar( TQWidget *parent );
    ~BrowserBar();
 
     LIBAMAROK_EXPORT static BrowserBar* instance() { return s_instance; }
@@ -85,12 +85,12 @@ private:
 
     LIBAMAROK_EXPORT static BrowserBar    *s_instance;
     uint           m_pos;         ///the x-axis position of m_divider
-    TQVBox         *m_playlistBox; ///tqparent to playlist, playlist filter and toolbar
+    TQVBox         *m_playlistBox; ///parent to playlist, playlist filter and toolbar
     TQWidget       *m_divider;     ///a qsplitter like widget
     MultiTabBar   *m_tabBar;
     BrowserList    m_browsers;
     BrowserIdMap   m_browserIds;
-    TQVBox         *m_browserBox;  ///tqparent widget to the browsers
+    TQVBox         *m_browserBox;  ///parent widget to the browsers
     int            m_currentIndex;
     int            m_lastIndex;
     TQSignalMapper *m_mapper;      ///maps tab clicks to browsers
diff --git a/amarok/src/clicklineedit.cpp b/amarok/src/clicklineedit.cpp
index 8e1b2b77..00d27832 100644
--- a/amarok/src/clicklineedit.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/clicklineedit.cpp
@@ -25,8 +25,8 @@
 #include "tqpainter.h"
 
 
-ClickLineEdit::ClickLineEdit( const TQString &msg, TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name ) :
-        KLineEdit( tqparent, name )
+ClickLineEdit::ClickLineEdit( const TQString &msg, TQWidget *parent, const char* name ) :
+        KLineEdit( parent, name )
 {
     mDrawClickMsg = true;
     setClickMessage( msg );
diff --git a/amarok/src/clicklineedit.h b/amarok/src/clicklineedit.h
index 9881ab3f..2046609c 100644
--- a/amarok/src/clicklineedit.h
+++ b/amarok/src/clicklineedit.h
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ class ClickLineEdit : public KLineEdit
   TQ_OBJECT
     TQ_PROPERTY( TQString clickMessage READ clickMessage WRITE setClickMessage )
     public:
-        ClickLineEdit( const TQString &msg, TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name = 0 );
+        ClickLineEdit( const TQString &msg, TQWidget *parent, const char* name = 0 );
 
         void setClickMessage( const TQString &msg );
         TQString clickMessage() const { return mClickMessage; }
diff --git a/amarok/src/collectionbrowser.cpp b/amarok/src/collectionbrowser.cpp
index 7d3df15f..b2fb94f8 100644
--- a/amarok/src/collectionbrowser.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/collectionbrowser.cpp
@@ -440,9 +440,9 @@ CollectionBrowser::ipodToolbar( bool activate )
 CollectionView* CollectionView::m_instance = 0;
 
 
-CollectionView::CollectionView( CollectionBrowser* tqparent )
-        : KListView( tqparent )
-        , m_tqparent( tqparent )
+CollectionView::CollectionView( CollectionBrowser* parent )
+        : KListView( parent )
+        , m_parent( parent )
         , m_timeFilter( 0 )
         , m_currentDepth( 0 )
         , m_ipodIncremented ( 1 )
@@ -570,7 +570,7 @@ CollectionView::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
     // This rewritten code is more faithful to the ordinary moving
     // behavior, even when looping around.  (For instance, it behaves
     // correctly if control-up is pressed at the top of the screen.)
-    // It sends fake keypress events to the tqparent instead of programatically
+    // It sends fake keypress events to the parent instead of programatically
     // selecting items.
     if( (e->key() == Key_Up  ||  e->key() == Key_Down )  && currentItem() )
     {
@@ -637,10 +637,10 @@ CollectionView::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
            && m_viewMode == modeIpodView )
     {
         if( e->key() == Key_Right )
-            m_tqparent->m_ipodIncrement->activate();
+            m_parent->m_ipodIncrement->activate();
 
         else if( e->key() == Key_Left )
-            m_tqparent->m_ipodDecrement->activate();
+            m_parent->m_ipodDecrement->activate();
 
     }
 
@@ -660,7 +660,7 @@ CollectionView::renderView(bool force /* = false */)  //SLOT
     if(!force && !m_dirty )
         return;
 
-    if( BrowserBar::instance()->currentBrowser() != m_tqparent )
+    if( BrowserBar::instance()->currentBrowser() != m_parent )
     {
         // the collectionbrowser is intensive for sql, so we only renderView() if the tab
         // is currently active.  else, wait until user focuses it.
@@ -791,7 +791,7 @@ CollectionView::slotEnsureSelectedItemVisible() //SLOT
         while ( r )
         {
             parents.push( r );
-            r = r->tqparent();
+            r = r->parent();
         }
         while ( !parents.isEmpty() )
         {
@@ -939,18 +939,18 @@ CollectionView::slotExpand( TQListViewItem* item )  //SLOT
             break;
 
         case 1:
-            tmptext = dynamic_cast<CollectionItem*>( item->tqparent() ) ?
-                static_cast<CollectionItem*>( item->tqparent() )->getSTQLText( 0 ) :
-                item->tqparent()->text( 0 );
+            tmptext = dynamic_cast<CollectionItem*>( item->parent() ) ?
+                static_cast<CollectionItem*>( item->parent() )->getSTQLText( 0 ) :
+                item->parent()->text( 0 );
             isUnknown = tmptext.isEmpty();
 
-            if( !static_cast<CollectionItem*>( item->tqparent() )->isSampler() )
+            if( !static_cast<CollectionItem*>( item->parent() )->isSampler() )
             {
                 if ( m_cat1 == IdArtist )
                     qb.setOptions( QueryBuilder::optNoCompilations );
                 if( VisYearAlbum == 1 )
                 {
-                    tmptext = item->tqparent()->text( 0 );
+                    tmptext = item->parent()->text( 0 );
                     TQString year = tmptext.left( tmptext.find( i18n(" - ") ) );
                     yearAlbumCalc( year, tmptext );
                     qb.addMatch( QueryBuilder::tabYear, year, false, true );
@@ -1014,18 +1014,18 @@ CollectionView::slotExpand( TQListViewItem* item )  //SLOT
             break;
 
         case 2:
-            tmptext = dynamic_cast<CollectionItem*> ( item->tqparent()->tqparent() ) ?
-                static_cast<CollectionItem*>( item->tqparent()->tqparent() )->getSTQLText( 0 ) :
-                item->tqparent()->tqparent()->text( 0 );
+            tmptext = dynamic_cast<CollectionItem*> ( item->parent()->parent() ) ?
+                static_cast<CollectionItem*>( item->parent()->parent() )->getSTQLText( 0 ) :
+                item->parent()->parent()->text( 0 );
             isUnknown = tmptext.isEmpty();
 
-            if ( !static_cast<CollectionItem*>( item->tqparent()->tqparent() )->isSampler() )
+            if ( !static_cast<CollectionItem*>( item->parent()->parent() )->isSampler() )
             {
                 if ( m_cat1 == IdArtist )
                     qb.setOptions( QueryBuilder::optNoCompilations );
                 if( VisYearAlbum == 1 )
                 {
-                    tmptext = item->tqparent()->tqparent()->text( 0 );
+                    tmptext = item->parent()->parent()->text( 0 );
                     TQString year = tmptext.left( tmptext.find( i18n(" - ") ) );
                     yearAlbumCalc( year, tmptext );
                     qb.addMatch( QueryBuilder::tabYear, year, false, true );
@@ -1041,14 +1041,14 @@ CollectionView::slotExpand( TQListViewItem* item )  //SLOT
                 c = true;
             }
 
-            tmptext = dynamic_cast<CollectionItem*>( item->tqparent() ) ?
-                static_cast<CollectionItem*>( item->tqparent() )->getSTQLText( 0 ) :
-                item->tqparent()->text( 0 );
+            tmptext = dynamic_cast<CollectionItem*>( item->parent() ) ?
+                static_cast<CollectionItem*>( item->parent() )->getSTQLText( 0 ) :
+                item->parent()->text( 0 );
             isUnknown = tmptext.isEmpty();
 
             if( VisYearAlbum == 2 )
             {
-                tmptext = item->tqparent()->text( 0 );
+                tmptext = item->parent()->text( 0 );
                 TQString year = tmptext.left( tmptext.find( i18n(" - ") ) );
                 yearAlbumCalc( year, tmptext );
                 qb.addMatch( QueryBuilder::tabYear, year, false, true );
@@ -1151,7 +1151,7 @@ CollectionView::slotExpand( TQListViewItem* item )  //SLOT
         child->setExpandable( expandable );
     }
 
-    //Display the album cover for the tqparent item now it is expanded
+    //Display the album cover for the parent item now it is expanded
     if ( dynamic_cast<CollectionItem*>( item ) )
     {
         CollectionItem *i = static_cast<CollectionItem*>( item );
@@ -1235,29 +1235,29 @@ CollectionView::presetMenu( int id )  //SLOT
 void
 CollectionView::cat1Menu( int id, bool rerender )  //SLOT
 {
-    m_tqparent->m_cat1Menu->setItemChecked( m_cat1, false ); //uncheck old item
-    m_tqparent->m_cat2Menu->setItemEnabled( m_cat1, true );  //enable old items
-    m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( m_cat1, true );
+    m_parent->m_cat1Menu->setItemChecked( m_cat1, false ); //uncheck old item
+    m_parent->m_cat2Menu->setItemEnabled( m_cat1, true );  //enable old items
+    m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( m_cat1, true );
     m_cat1 = id;
     updateColumnHeader();
     resetIpodDepth();
-    m_tqparent->m_cat1Menu->setItemChecked( m_cat1, true );
+    m_parent->m_cat1Menu->setItemChecked( m_cat1, true );
 
     //prevent choosing the same category in both menus
-    m_tqparent->m_cat2Menu->setItemEnabled( id , false );
-    m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( id , false );
+    m_parent->m_cat2Menu->setItemEnabled( id , false );
+    m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( id , false );
 
     //if this item is checked in second menu, uncheck it
-    if ( m_tqparent->m_cat2Menu->isItemChecked( id ) ) {
-        m_tqparent->m_cat2Menu->setItemChecked( id, false );
-        m_tqparent->m_cat2Menu->setItemChecked( IdNone, true );
+    if ( m_parent->m_cat2Menu->isItemChecked( id ) ) {
+        m_parent->m_cat2Menu->setItemChecked( id, false );
+        m_parent->m_cat2Menu->setItemChecked( IdNone, true );
         m_cat2 = IdNone;
         enableCat3Menu( false );
     }
     //if this item is checked in third menu, uncheck it
-    if ( m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->isItemChecked( id ) ) {
-        m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemChecked( id, false );
-        m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemChecked( IdNone, true );
+    if ( m_parent->m_cat3Menu->isItemChecked( id ) ) {
+        m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemChecked( id, false );
+        m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemChecked( IdNone, true );
         m_cat3 = IdNone;
     }
     updateTrackDepth();
@@ -1271,23 +1271,23 @@ CollectionView::cat1Menu( int id, bool rerender )  //SLOT
 void
 CollectionView::cat2Menu( int id, bool rerender )  //SLOT
 {
-    m_tqparent->m_cat2Menu->setItemChecked( m_cat2, false ); //uncheck old item
-    m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( m_cat3, true );  //enable old item
+    m_parent->m_cat2Menu->setItemChecked( m_cat2, false ); //uncheck old item
+    m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( m_cat3, true );  //enable old item
     m_cat2 = id;
-    m_tqparent->m_cat2Menu->setItemChecked( m_cat2, true );
+    m_parent->m_cat2Menu->setItemChecked( m_cat2, true );
     updateColumnHeader();
     resetIpodDepth();
 
     enableCat3Menu( id != IdNone );
 
     //prevent choosing the same category in both menus
-    m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( m_cat1 , false );
+    m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( m_cat1 , false );
     if( id != IdNone )
-        m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( id , false );
+        m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( id , false );
 
     //if this item is checked in third menu, uncheck it
-    if ( m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->isItemChecked( id ) ) {
-        m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemChecked( id, false );
+    if ( m_parent->m_cat3Menu->isItemChecked( id ) ) {
+        m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemChecked( id, false );
         enableCat3Menu( false );
     }
     updateTrackDepth();
@@ -1301,9 +1301,9 @@ CollectionView::cat2Menu( int id, bool rerender )  //SLOT
 void
 CollectionView::cat3Menu( int id, bool rerender )  //SLOT
 {
-    m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemChecked( m_cat3, false ); //uncheck old item
+    m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemChecked( m_cat3, false ); //uncheck old item
     m_cat3 = id;
-    m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemChecked( m_cat3, true );
+    m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemChecked( m_cat3, true );
     updateColumnHeader();
     resetIpodDepth();
     updateTrackDepth();
@@ -1317,17 +1317,17 @@ CollectionView::cat3Menu( int id, bool rerender )  //SLOT
 void
 CollectionView::enableCat3Menu( bool enable )
 {
-    m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( IdAlbum, enable );
-    m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( IdVisYearAlbum, enable );
-    m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( IdArtist, enable );
-    m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( IdComposer, enable );
-    m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( IdGenre, enable );
-    m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( IdYear, enable );
-    m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( IdLabel, enable );
+    m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( IdAlbum, enable );
+    m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( IdVisYearAlbum, enable );
+    m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( IdArtist, enable );
+    m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( IdComposer, enable );
+    m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( IdGenre, enable );
+    m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( IdYear, enable );
+    m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemEnabled( IdLabel, enable );
 
     if( !enable ) {
-        m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemChecked( m_cat3, false );
-        m_tqparent->m_cat3Menu->setItemChecked( IdNone, true );
+        m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemChecked( m_cat3, false );
+        m_parent->m_cat3Menu->setItemChecked( IdNone, true );
         m_cat3 = IdNone;
     }
     updateTrackDepth();
@@ -1374,7 +1374,7 @@ CollectionView::ipodItemClicked( TQListViewItem *item, const TQPoint&, int c )
         return;
 
     // The TQt manual says NOT to delete items from within this slot
-    TQTimer::singleShot( 0, m_tqparent->m_ipodIncrement, TQT_SLOT( activate() ) );
+    TQTimer::singleShot( 0, m_parent->m_ipodIncrement, TQT_SLOT( activate() ) );
 }
 
 
@@ -1525,11 +1525,11 @@ CollectionView::rmbPressed( TQListViewItem* item, const TQPoint& point, int ) //
                 {
                     TQString artist;
                     if( item->depth() - artistLevel == 1 )
-                        artist = item->tqparent()->text( 0 );
+                        artist = item->parent()->text( 0 );
                     else if( item->depth() - artistLevel == 2 )
-                        artist = item->tqparent()->tqparent()->text( 0 );
+                        artist = item->parent()->parent()->text( 0 );
                     else if( item->depth() - artistLevel == 3 )
-                        artist = item->tqparent()->tqparent()->tqparent()->text( 0 );
+                        artist = item->parent()->parent()->parent()->text( 0 );
                     K3bExporter::instance()->exportAlbum( artist, trueItemText );
                 }
                 break;
@@ -1579,15 +1579,15 @@ CollectionView::setViewMode( int mode, bool rerender /*=true*/ )
         #if KDE_VERSION >= KDE_MAKE_VERSION(3,4,0)
         setShadeSortColumn( false );
         #endif
-        m_tqparent->m_ipodDecrement->setEnabled( m_currentDepth > 0 );
-        m_tqparent->ipodToolbar( true );
+        m_parent->m_ipodDecrement->setEnabled( m_currentDepth > 0 );
+        m_parent->ipodToolbar( true );
     }
     else
     {
         #if KDE_VERSION >= KDE_MAKE_VERSION(3,4,0)
         setShadeSortColumn( true );
         #endif
-        m_tqparent->ipodToolbar( false );
+        m_parent->ipodToolbar( false );
     }
 
     if ( rerender )
@@ -1628,9 +1628,9 @@ CollectionItem::setPixmap(int column, const TQPixmap & pix)
 
     //Now work out the artist 
     CollectionItem *p = this;
-    while ( p->tqparent() && dynamic_cast<CollectionItem*>( p->tqparent() ) )
+    while ( p->parent() && dynamic_cast<CollectionItem*>( p->parent() ) )
     {
-        p = static_cast<CollectionItem*>( p->tqparent() );
+        p = static_cast<CollectionItem*>( p->parent() );
         if ( IdArtist == p->m_cat )
         {
             artist = p->text( 0 );
@@ -1774,7 +1774,7 @@ CollectionView::organizeFiles( const KURL::List &urls, const TQString &caption,
         return;
     }
 
-    OrganizeCollectionDialogBase base( m_tqparent, "OrganizeFiles", true, caption,
+    OrganizeCollectionDialogBase base( m_parent, "OrganizeFiles", true, caption,
             KDialogBase::Ok|KDialogBase::Cancel|KDialogBase::Details );
     TQVBox* page = base.makeVBoxMainWidget();
 
@@ -2142,12 +2142,12 @@ CollectionView::updateColumnHeader()
     TQResizeEvent rev( size(), TQSize() );
     viewportResizeEvent( &rev );
 
-    m_tqparent->m_categoryMenu->setItemChecked( IdArtist, m_cat1 == IdArtist && m_cat2 == IdNone );
-    m_tqparent->m_categoryMenu->setItemChecked( IdAlbum, m_cat1 == IdAlbum && m_cat2 == IdNone );
-    m_tqparent->m_categoryMenu->setItemChecked( IdArtistAlbum, m_cat1 == IdArtist && m_cat2 == IdAlbum && m_cat3 == IdNone );
-    m_tqparent->m_categoryMenu->setItemChecked( IdArtistVisYearAlbum, m_cat1 == IdArtist && m_cat2 == IdVisYearAlbum && m_cat3 == IdNone );
-    m_tqparent->m_categoryMenu->setItemChecked( IdGenreArtist, m_cat1 == IdGenre && m_cat2 == IdArtist && m_cat3 == IdNone );
-    m_tqparent->m_categoryMenu->setItemChecked( IdGenreArtistAlbum, m_cat1 == IdGenre && m_cat2 == IdArtist && m_cat3 == IdAlbum );
+    m_parent->m_categoryMenu->setItemChecked( IdArtist, m_cat1 == IdArtist && m_cat2 == IdNone );
+    m_parent->m_categoryMenu->setItemChecked( IdAlbum, m_cat1 == IdAlbum && m_cat2 == IdNone );
+    m_parent->m_categoryMenu->setItemChecked( IdArtistAlbum, m_cat1 == IdArtist && m_cat2 == IdAlbum && m_cat3 == IdNone );
+    m_parent->m_categoryMenu->setItemChecked( IdArtistVisYearAlbum, m_cat1 == IdArtist && m_cat2 == IdVisYearAlbum && m_cat3 == IdNone );
+    m_parent->m_categoryMenu->setItemChecked( IdGenreArtist, m_cat1 == IdGenre && m_cat2 == IdArtist && m_cat3 == IdNone );
+    m_parent->m_categoryMenu->setItemChecked( IdGenreArtistAlbum, m_cat1 == IdGenre && m_cat2 == IdArtist && m_cat3 == IdAlbum );
 }
 
 
@@ -2219,7 +2219,7 @@ CollectionView::listSelectedSiblingsOf( int cat, TQListViewItem* item )
 KURL::List
 CollectionView::listSelected()
 {
-    //Here we determine the URLs of all selected items. We use two passes, one for the tqparent items,
+    //Here we determine the URLs of all selected items. We use two passes, one for the parent items,
     //and another one for the tqchildren.
 
     KURL::List list;
@@ -2450,13 +2450,13 @@ CollectionView::listSelected()
     {
         for ( item = firstChild(); item; item = item->nextSibling() )
             for ( TQListViewItem* child = item->firstChild(); child; child = child->nextSibling() )
-                if ( child->isSelected() && !child->tqparent()->isSelected() )
+                if ( child->isSelected() && !child->parent()->isSelected() )
                     list << static_cast<CollectionItem*>( child ) ->url();
     }
     else {
         for ( item = firstChild(); item; item = item->nextSibling() )
             for ( TQListViewItem* child = item->firstChild(); child; child = child->nextSibling() )
-                if ( child->isSelected() && !child->tqparent()->isSelected() )
+                if ( child->isSelected() && !child->parent()->isSelected() )
                 {
                     const bool sampler = static_cast<CollectionItem*>( item )->isSampler();
                     qb.clear();
@@ -2543,7 +2543,7 @@ CollectionView::listSelected()
     for ( item = firstChild(); item; item = item->nextSibling() )
         for ( TQListViewItem* child = item->firstChild(); child; child = child->nextSibling() )
             for ( TQListViewItem* grandChild = child->firstChild(); grandChild; grandChild = grandChild->nextSibling() )
-                if ( grandChild->isSelected() && !grandChild->isExpandable() && !child->tqparent()->isSelected() && !child->isSelected() )
+                if ( grandChild->isSelected() && !grandChild->isExpandable() && !child->parent()->isSelected() && !child->isSelected() )
                     list << static_cast<CollectionItem*>( grandChild ) ->url();
 
     //category 3
@@ -2553,14 +2553,14 @@ CollectionView::listSelected()
             for ( TQListViewItem* child = item->firstChild(); child; child = child->nextSibling() )
                 for ( TQListViewItem* grandChild = child->firstChild(); grandChild; grandChild = grandChild->nextSibling() )
                     for ( TQListViewItem* grandChild2 = grandChild->firstChild(); grandChild2; grandChild2 = grandChild2->nextSibling() )
-                        if ( grandChild2->isSelected() && !child->tqparent()->isSelected() && !child->isSelected() && !grandChild->isSelected() )
+                        if ( grandChild2->isSelected() && !child->parent()->isSelected() && !child->isSelected() && !grandChild->isSelected() )
                             list << static_cast<CollectionItem*>( grandChild2 ) ->url();
     }
     else {
         for ( item = firstChild(); item; item = item->nextSibling() )
             for ( TQListViewItem* child = item->firstChild(); child; child = child->nextSibling() )
                 for ( TQListViewItem* grandChild = child->firstChild(); grandChild; grandChild = grandChild->nextSibling() )
-                    if ( grandChild->isSelected() && !grandChild->tqparent()->isSelected() )
+                    if ( grandChild->isSelected() && !grandChild->parent()->isSelected() )
                     {
                         const bool sampler = static_cast<CollectionItem*>( item )->isSampler();
                         qb.clear();
@@ -2661,7 +2661,7 @@ CollectionView::listSelected()
             for ( TQListViewItem* child = item->firstChild(); child; child = child->nextSibling() )
                 for ( TQListViewItem* grandChild = child->firstChild(); grandChild; grandChild = grandChild->nextSibling() )
                     for ( TQListViewItem* grandChild2 = grandChild->firstChild(); grandChild2; grandChild2 = grandChild2->nextSibling() )
-                        if ( grandChild2->isSelected() && !child->tqparent()->isSelected() && !child->isSelected() && !grandChild->isSelected() )
+                        if ( grandChild2->isSelected() && !child->parent()->isSelected() && !child->isSelected() && !grandChild->isSelected() )
                             list << static_cast<CollectionItem*>( grandChild2 ) ->url();
 
     return list;
@@ -2957,7 +2957,7 @@ CollectionView::incrementDepth( bool rerender /*= true*/ )
         return;
     }
 
-    m_tqparent->m_ipodDecrement->setEnabled( true );
+    m_parent->m_ipodDecrement->setEnabled( true );
 
     // We're not in track mode
     int catArr[3] = {m_cat1, m_cat2, m_cat3};
@@ -3051,7 +3051,7 @@ CollectionView::decrementDepth ( bool rerender /*= true*/ )
         return;
 
     m_currentDepth--;
-    m_tqparent->m_ipodDecrement->setEnabled( m_currentDepth > 0 );
+    m_parent->m_ipodDecrement->setEnabled( m_currentDepth > 0 );
     m_ipodFilters[m_currentDepth].clear();
     int catArr[3] = {m_cat1, m_cat2, m_cat3};
     int cat = catArr[m_currentDepth];
@@ -3086,7 +3086,7 @@ CollectionView::resetIpodDepth ( void )
     m_ipodFilters[1].clear();
     m_ipodFilters[2].clear();
     m_ipodIncremented = 1;
-    m_tqparent->m_ipodDecrement->setEnabled( false );
+    m_parent->m_ipodDecrement->setEnabled( false );
 }
 
 
@@ -3384,7 +3384,7 @@ CollectionView::cacheView()
             if ( item->isOpen() ) {
                 //construct path to item
                 TQStringList itemPath;
-                for( const TQListViewItem *i = item; i; i = i->tqparent() )
+                for( const TQListViewItem *i = item; i; i = i->parent() )
                     itemPath.prepend( i->text( 0 ) );
 
                 m_cacheOpenItemPaths.append ( itemPath );
@@ -3445,7 +3445,7 @@ TQStringList
 CollectionView::makeStructuredNameList( TQListViewItem *item ) const
 {
     TQStringList nameList;
-    for ( TQListViewItem *current = item; current; current = current->tqparent() )
+    for ( TQListViewItem *current = item; current; current = current->parent() )
         nameList.push_front( current->text( 0 ) );
     return nameList;
 }
@@ -4538,8 +4538,8 @@ CollectionItem::sortChildItems ( int column, bool ascending ) {
 //
 // DividerItem
 
-DividerItem::DividerItem( TQListView* tqparent, TQString txt, int cat/*, bool sortYearsInverted*/)
-: KListViewItem( tqparent), m_blockText(false), m_text(txt), m_cat(cat)/*, m_sortYearsInverted(sortYearsInverted)*/
+DividerItem::DividerItem( TQListView* parent, TQString txt, int cat/*, bool sortYearsInverted*/)
+: KListViewItem( parent), m_blockText(false), m_text(txt), m_cat(cat)/*, m_sortYearsInverted(sortYearsInverted)*/
 {
     setExpandable(false);
     setDropEnabled(false);
diff --git a/amarok/src/collectionbrowser.h b/amarok/src/collectionbrowser.h
index d0a7b4b8..c8cc0a86 100644
--- a/amarok/src/collectionbrowser.h
+++ b/amarok/src/collectionbrowser.h
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ public:
     static bool shareTheSameGroup(const TQString& a, const TQString& b, int cat);
 
 public:
-    DividerItem( TQListView* tqparent, TQString txt, int cat);
+    DividerItem( TQListView* parent, TQString txt, int cat);
 
     virtual void paintCell ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, int column, int width, int align );
     virtual void paintFocus ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQRect & r );
@@ -146,13 +146,13 @@ private:
 
 class CollectionItem : public KListViewItem {
     public:
-        CollectionItem( TQListView* tqparent, int cat = 0, bool unknown = false, bool sampler=false )
-            : KListViewItem( tqparent )
+        CollectionItem( TQListView* parent, int cat = 0, bool unknown = false, bool sampler=false )
+            : KListViewItem( parent )
             , m_cat( cat )
             , m_isUnknown( unknown )
             , m_isSampler( sampler ) {};
-        CollectionItem( TQListViewItem* tqparent, int cat = 0, bool unknown = false, bool sampler=false )
-            : KListViewItem( tqparent )
+        CollectionItem( TQListViewItem* parent, int cat = 0, bool unknown = false, bool sampler=false )
+            : KListViewItem( parent )
             , m_cat( cat )
             , m_isUnknown( unknown )
             , m_isSampler( sampler ) {};
@@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ class CollectionView : public KListView, public DropProxyTarget
         friend class CollectionItem; // for access to m_cat2
         friend class ContextBrowser; // for setupDirs()
 
-        CollectionView( CollectionBrowser* tqparent );
+        CollectionView( CollectionBrowser* parent );
         ~CollectionView();
 
         LIBAMAROK_EXPORT static CollectionView* instance() { return m_instance; }
@@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ class CollectionView : public KListView, public DropProxyTarget
     //attributes:
         LIBAMAROK_EXPORT static CollectionView* m_instance;
 
-        CollectionBrowser* m_tqparent;
+        CollectionBrowser* m_parent;
 
         TQString m_filter;
         uint m_timeFilter;
@@ -383,10 +383,10 @@ class OrganizeCollectionDialogBase : public KDialogBase
     Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
     public:
-    OrganizeCollectionDialogBase( TQWidget *tqparent=0, const char *name=0, bool modal=true,
+    OrganizeCollectionDialogBase( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0, bool modal=true,
             const TQString &caption=TQString(),
             int buttonMask=Ok|Apply|Cancel )
-        : KDialogBase( tqparent, name, modal, caption, buttonMask )
+        : KDialogBase( parent, name, modal, caption, buttonMask )
     {
     }
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/collectiondb.cpp b/amarok/src/collectiondb.cpp
index 63a1bdff..753ec474 100644
--- a/amarok/src/collectiondb.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/collectiondb.cpp
@@ -100,9 +100,9 @@ using Amarok::QStringx;
 
 INotify* INotify::s_instance = 0;
 
-INotify::INotify( CollectionDB *tqparent, int fd )
-    : DependentJob( tqparent, "INotify" )
-    , m_tqparent( tqparent )
+INotify::INotify( CollectionDB *parent, int fd )
+    : DependentJob( parent, "INotify" )
+    , m_parent( parent )
     , m_fd( fd )
 {
     s_instance = this;
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ INotify::doJob()
         if ( !deviceIds.isEmpty() ) deviceIds += ',';
         deviceIds += TQString::number(*it);
     }
-    const TQStringList values = m_tqparent->query( TQString( "SELECT dir, deviceid FROM directories WHERE deviceid IN (%1);" )
+    const TQStringList values = m_parent->query( TQString( "SELECT dir, deviceid FROM directories WHERE deviceid IN (%1);" )
                                                     .tqarg( deviceIds ) );
     foreach( values )
     {
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ INotify::doJob()
                     i += EVENT_SIZE + event->len;
                 }
 
-                TQTimer::singleShot( 0, m_tqparent, TQT_SLOT( scanMonitor() ) );
+                TQTimer::singleShot( 0, m_parent, TQT_SLOT( scanMonitor() ) );
             }
         }
     }
@@ -1169,7 +1169,7 @@ CollectionDB::createPodcastTables()
                     "image " + exactTextColumnType() + ","
                     "comment " + longTextColumnType() + ","
                     "copyright "  + textColumnType() + ","
-                    "tqparent INTEGER,"
+                    "parent INTEGER,"
                     "directory "  + textColumnType() + ","
                     "autoscan BOOL, fetchtype INTEGER, "
                     "autotransfer BOOL, haspurge BOOL, purgecount INTEGER );" ) );
@@ -1179,7 +1179,7 @@ CollectionDB::createPodcastTables()
                     "id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY %1, "
                     "url " + exactTextColumnType() + " UNITQUE,"
                     "localurl " + exactTextColumnType() + ","
-                    "tqparent " + exactTextColumnType() + ","
+                    "parent " + exactTextColumnType() + ","
                     "guid " + exactTextColumnType() + ","
                     "title " + textColumnType() + ","
                     "subtitle " + textColumnType() + ","
@@ -1196,7 +1196,7 @@ CollectionDB::createPodcastTables()
     query( TQString( "CREATE TABLE podcastfolders ("
                     "id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY %1, "
                     "name " + textColumnType() + ","
-                    "tqparent INTEGER, isOpen BOOL );" )
+                    "parent INTEGER, isOpen BOOL );" )
                     .tqarg( podcastFolderAutoInc ) );
 
     query( "CREATE INDEX url_podchannel ON podcastchannels( url );" );
@@ -1236,7 +1236,7 @@ CollectionDB::createPodcastTablesV2( bool temp )
                     "image " + exactTextColumnType() + ","
                     "comment " + longTextColumnType() + ","
                     "copyright "  + textColumnType() + ","
-                    "tqparent INTEGER,"
+                    "parent INTEGER,"
                     "directory "  + textColumnType() + ","
                     "autoscan BOOL, fetchtype INTEGER, "
                     "autotransfer BOOL, haspurge BOOL, purgecount INTEGER );" ).tqarg( a,b ) );
@@ -1246,7 +1246,7 @@ CollectionDB::createPodcastTablesV2( bool temp )
                     "id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY %1, "
                     "url " + exactTextColumnType() + " UNITQUE,"
                     "localurl " + exactTextColumnType() + ","
-                    "tqparent " + exactTextColumnType() + ","
+                    "parent " + exactTextColumnType() + ","
                     "guid " + exactTextColumnType() + ","
                     "title " + textColumnType() + ","
                     "subtitle " + textColumnType() + ","
@@ -1263,7 +1263,7 @@ CollectionDB::createPodcastTablesV2( bool temp )
     query( TQString( "CREATE %2 TABLE podcastfolders%3 ("
                     "id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY %1, "
                     "name " + textColumnType() + ","
-                    "tqparent INTEGER, isOpen BOOL );" )
+                    "parent INTEGER, isOpen BOOL );" )
                     .tqarg( podcastFolderAutoInc, a, b ) );
 
     if ( !temp )
@@ -1911,7 +1911,7 @@ CollectionDB::podcastImage( const MetaBundle &bundle, const bool withShadow, uin
 
     if( getPodcastEpisodeBundle( url, &peb ) )
     {
-        url = peb.tqparent().url();
+        url = peb.parent().url();
     }
 
     if( getPodcastChannelBundle( url, &pcb ) )
@@ -2547,12 +2547,12 @@ CollectionDB::addPodcastChannel( const PodcastChannelBundle &pcb, const bool &re
     TQString command;
     if( replace ) {
         command = "REPLACE INTO podcastchannels "
-                  "( url, title, weblink, image, comment, copyright, tqparent, directory"
+                  "( url, title, weblink, image, comment, copyright, parent, directory"
                   ", autoscan, fetchtype, autotransfer, haspurge, purgecount ) "
                   "VALUES (";
     } else {
         command = "INSERT INTO podcastchannels "
-                  "( url, title, weblink, image, comment, copyright, tqparent, directory"
+                  "( url, title, weblink, image, comment, copyright, parent, directory"
                   ", autoscan, fetchtype, autotransfer, haspurge, purgecount ) "
                   "VALUES (";
     }
@@ -2593,11 +2593,11 @@ CollectionDB::addPodcastEpisode( const PodcastEpisodeBundle &episode, const int
 
     if( idToUpdate ) {
         command = "REPLACE INTO podcastepisodes "
-                  "( id, url, localurl, tqparent, title, subtitle, composer, comment, filetype, createdate, guid, length, size, isNew ) "
+                  "( id, url, localurl, parent, title, subtitle, composer, comment, filetype, createdate, guid, length, size, isNew ) "
                   "VALUES (";
     } else {
         command = "INSERT INTO podcastepisodes "
-                  "( url, localurl, tqparent, title, subtitle, composer, comment, filetype, createdate, guid, length, size, isNew ) "
+                  "( url, localurl, parent, title, subtitle, composer, comment, filetype, createdate, guid, length, size, isNew ) "
                   "VALUES (";
     }
 
@@ -2620,7 +2620,7 @@ CollectionDB::addPodcastEpisode( const PodcastEpisodeBundle &episode, const int
 
     command += '\'' + escapeString( episode.url().url() )   + "',";
     command += ( localurl.isEmpty()       ? "NULL" : '\'' + escapeString( localurl )       + '\'' ) + ',';
-    command += '\'' + escapeString( episode.tqparent().url()) + "',";
+    command += '\'' + escapeString( episode.parent().url()) + "',";
     command += ( title.isEmpty()       ? "NULL" : '\'' + escapeString( title )       + '\'' ) + ',';
     command += ( subtitle.isEmpty()    ? "NULL" : '\'' + escapeString( subtitle )    + '\'' ) + ',';
     command += ( author.isEmpty()      ? "NULL" : '\'' + escapeString( author )      + '\'' ) + ',';
@@ -2647,7 +2647,7 @@ CollectionDB::addPodcastEpisode( const PodcastEpisodeBundle &episode, const int
 TQValueList<PodcastChannelBundle>
 CollectionDB::getPodcastChannels()
 {
-    TQString command = "SELECT url, title, weblink, image, comment, copyright, tqparent, directory "
+    TQString command = "SELECT url, title, weblink, image, comment, copyright, parent, directory "
         ", autoscan, fetchtype, autotransfer, haspurge, purgecount FROM podcastchannels;";
 
     TQStringList values = query( command );
@@ -2677,9 +2677,9 @@ CollectionDB::getPodcastChannels()
 }
 
 TQValueList<PodcastEpisodeBundle>
-CollectionDB::getPodcastEpisodes( const KURL &tqparent, bool onlyNew, int limit )
+CollectionDB::getPodcastEpisodes( const KURL &parent, bool onlyNew, int limit )
 {
-    TQString command = TQString( "SELECT id, url, localurl, tqparent, guid, title, subtitle, composer, comment, filetype, createdate, length, size, isNew FROM podcastepisodes WHERE ( tqparent='%1'" ).tqarg( tqparent.url() );
+    TQString command = TQString( "SELECT id, url, localurl, parent, guid, title, subtitle, composer, comment, filetype, createdate, length, size, isNew FROM podcastepisodes WHERE ( parent='%1'" ).tqarg( parent.url() );
     if( onlyNew )
         command += TQString( " AND isNew='%1'" ).tqarg( boolT() );
     command += " ) ORDER BY id";
@@ -2722,7 +2722,7 @@ CollectionDB::getPodcastEpisodes( const KURL &tqparent, bool onlyNew, int limit
 PodcastEpisodeBundle
 CollectionDB::getPodcastEpisodeById( int id )
 {
-    TQString command = TQString( "SELECT url, localurl, tqparent, guid, title, subtitle, composer, comment, filetype, createdate, length, size, isNew FROM podcastepisodes WHERE id=%1;").tqarg( id );
+    TQString command = TQString( "SELECT url, localurl, parent, guid, title, subtitle, composer, comment, filetype, createdate, length, size, isNew FROM podcastepisodes WHERE id=%1;").tqarg( id );
 
     TQStringList values = query( command );
     PodcastEpisodeBundle peb;
@@ -2785,7 +2785,7 @@ bool
 CollectionDB::getPodcastChannelBundle( const KURL &url, PodcastChannelBundle *pcb )
 {
     TQStringList values = query( TQString(
-                "SELECT url, title, weblink, image, comment, copyright, tqparent, directory "
+                "SELECT url, title, weblink, image, comment, copyright, parent, directory "
                 ", autoscan, fetchtype, autotransfer, haspurge, purgecount FROM podcastchannels WHERE url = '%1';"
                 ).tqarg( escapeString( url.url() ) ) );
 
@@ -2814,14 +2814,14 @@ CollectionDB::getPodcastChannelBundle( const KURL &url, PodcastChannelBundle *pc
 int
 CollectionDB::addPodcastFolder( const TQString &name, const int parent_id, const bool isOpen )
 {
-    TQString command = TQString( "INSERT INTO podcastfolders ( name, tqparent, isOpen ) VALUES ('" );
+    TQString command = TQString( "INSERT INTO podcastfolders ( name, parent, isOpen ) VALUES ('" );
     command += escapeString( name )   + "',";
     command += TQString::number( parent_id ) + ",";
     command += isOpen ? boolT() + ");" : boolF() + ");";
 
     insert( command, NULL );
 
-    command = TQString( "SELECT id FROM podcastfolders WHERE name = '%1' AND tqparent = '%2';" )
+    command = TQString( "SELECT id FROM podcastfolders WHERE name = '%1' AND parent = '%2';" )
                        .tqarg( name, TQString::number(parent_id) );
     TQStringList values = query( command );
 
@@ -2834,7 +2834,7 @@ CollectionDB::updatePodcastChannel( const PodcastChannelBundle &b )
     if( getDbConnectionType() == DbConnection::postgresql )
     {
         query( QStringx( "UPDATE podcastchannels SET title='%1', weblink='%2', comment='%3', "
-                         "copyright='%4', tqparent=%5, directory='%6', autoscan=%7, fetchtype=%8, "
+                         "copyright='%4', parent=%5, directory='%6', autoscan=%7, fetchtype=%8, "
 			 "autotransfer=%9, haspurge=%10, purgecount=%11 WHERE url='%12';" )
 	       .args ( TQStringList()
 		       << escapeString( b.title() )
@@ -2862,12 +2862,12 @@ CollectionDB::updatePodcastEpisode( const int id, const PodcastEpisodeBundle &b
 {
     if( getDbConnectionType() == DbConnection::postgresql )
     {
-        query( QStringx( "UPDATE podcastepisodes SET url='%1', localurl='%2', tqparent='%3', title='%4', subtitle='%5', composer='%6', comment='%7', "
+        query( QStringx( "UPDATE podcastepisodes SET url='%1', localurl='%2', parent='%3', title='%4', subtitle='%5', composer='%6', comment='%7', "
                  "filetype='%8', createdate='%9', guid='%10', length=%11, size=%12, isNew=%13 WHERE id=%14;" )
               .args( TQStringList()
                   << escapeString( b.url().url() )
                   << ( b.localUrl().isValid() ? escapeString( b.localUrl().url() ) : "NULL" )
-                  << escapeString( b.tqparent().url() )
+                  << escapeString( b.parent().url() )
                   << escapeString( b.title() )
                   << escapeString( b.subtitle() )
                   << escapeString( b.author() )
@@ -2891,7 +2891,7 @@ void
 CollectionDB::updatePodcastFolder( const int folder_id, const TQString &name, const int parent_id, const bool isOpen )
 {
     if( getDbConnectionType() == DbConnection::postgresql ) {
-        query( QStringx( "UPDATE podcastfolders SET name='%1', tqparent=%2, isOpen=%3 WHERE id=%4;" )
+        query( QStringx( "UPDATE podcastfolders SET name='%1', parent=%2, isOpen=%3 WHERE id=%4;" )
                 .args( TQStringList()
                     << escapeString(name)
                     << TQString::number(parent_id)
@@ -2901,7 +2901,7 @@ CollectionDB::updatePodcastFolder( const int folder_id, const TQString &name, co
              );
     }
     else {
-        query( QStringx( "REPLACE INTO podcastfolders ( id, name, tqparent, isOpen ) "
+        query( QStringx( "REPLACE INTO podcastfolders ( id, name, parent, isOpen ) "
                         "VALUES ( %1, '%2', %3, %4 );" )
                 .args( TQStringList()
                     << TQString::number(folder_id)
@@ -2920,7 +2920,7 @@ CollectionDB::removePodcastChannel( const KURL &url )
     query( TQString( "DELETE FROM podcastchannels WHERE url = '%1';" )
               .tqarg( escapeString( url.url() ) ) );
     //remove all tqchildren
-    query( TQString( "DELETE FROM podcastepisodes WHERE tqparent = '%1';" )
+    query( TQString( "DELETE FROM podcastepisodes WHERE parent = '%1';" )
               .tqarg( escapeString( url.url() ) ) );
 }
 
@@ -4880,7 +4880,7 @@ void CollectionDB::engineTrackEnded( int finalPosition, int trackLength, const T
     PodcastEpisodeBundle peb;
     if( getPodcastEpisodeBundle( url.url(), &peb ) )
     {
-        PodcastEpisode *p = PlaylistBrowser::instance()->findPodcastEpisode( peb.url(), peb.tqparent() );
+        PodcastEpisode *p = PlaylistBrowser::instance()->findPodcastEpisode( peb.url(), peb.parent() );
         if ( p )
             p->setListened();
 
@@ -4913,7 +4913,7 @@ CollectionDB::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent* )
 //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
 void
-CollectionDB::fetchCover( TQWidget* tqparent, const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, bool noedit, TQListViewItem* item ) //SLOT
+CollectionDB::fetchCover( TQWidget* parent, const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, bool noedit, TQListViewItem* item ) //SLOT
 {
     #ifdef AMAZON_SUPPORT
     debug() << "Fetching cover for " << artist << " - " << album << endl;
@@ -4922,9 +4922,9 @@ CollectionDB::fetchCover( TQWidget* tqparent, const TQString& artist, const TQSt
     CoverFetcher* fetcher;
     if( isCompilation )
         // avoid putting various artists in front of album title. this causes problems for locales other than US.
-        fetcher = new CoverFetcher( tqparent, "", album );
+        fetcher = new CoverFetcher( parent, "", album );
     else
-        fetcher = new CoverFetcher( tqparent, artist, album );
+        fetcher = new CoverFetcher( parent, artist, album );
     if( item )
     {
         itemCoverMapMutex->lock();
@@ -5040,10 +5040,10 @@ class SimilarArtistsInsertionJob : public ThreadManager::DependentJob
     const TQStringList suggestions;
 
 public:
-    SimilarArtistsInsertionJob( CollectionDB *tqparent, const TQString &s, const TQStringList &list )
-            : ThreadManager::DependentJob( tqparent, "SimilarArtistsInsertionJob" )
+    SimilarArtistsInsertionJob( CollectionDB *parent, const TQString &s, const TQStringList &list )
+            : ThreadManager::DependentJob( parent, "SimilarArtistsInsertionJob" )
             , artist( TQDeepCopy<TQString>(s) )
-            , escapedArtist( tqparent->escapeString( TQDeepCopy<TQString>(s) ) )
+            , escapedArtist( parent->escapeString( TQDeepCopy<TQString>(s) ) )
             , suggestions( TQDeepCopy<TQStringList>(list) )
     {}
 };
@@ -5729,12 +5729,12 @@ CollectionDB::updatePodcastTables()
     {
         createPodcastTablesV2( true );
         query( "INSERT INTO podcastchannels_fix SELECT url,title,weblink,image,comment,"
-               "copyright,tqparent,directory,autoscan,fetchtype,autotransfer,haspurge,"
+               "copyright,parent,directory,autoscan,fetchtype,autotransfer,haspurge,"
                "purgecount FROM podcastchannels;" );
-        query( "INSERT INTO podcastepisodes_fix SELECT id,url,localurl,tqparent,guid,title,"
+        query( "INSERT INTO podcastepisodes_fix SELECT id,url,localurl,parent,guid,title,"
                "subtitle,composer,comment,filetype,createdate,length,size,isNew FROM "
                "podcastepisodes;" );
-        query( "INSERT INTO podcastfolders_fix SELECT id,name,tqparent,isOpen FROM podcastfolders;" );
+        query( "INSERT INTO podcastfolders_fix SELECT id,name,parent,isOpen FROM podcastfolders;" );
         dropPodcastTablesV2();
         createPodcastTablesV2( false );
         query( "INSERT INTO podcastchannels SELECT * FROM podcastchannels_fix;" );
@@ -7939,7 +7939,7 @@ QueryBuilder::valueName( TQ_INT64 value )
        "sampler",
        "bpm",
        "copyright",
-       "tqparent",
+       "parent",
        "weblink",
        "autoscan",
        "fetchtype",
diff --git a/amarok/src/collectiondb.h b/amarok/src/collectiondb.h
index 383ba088..17c925a6 100644
--- a/amarok/src/collectiondb.h
+++ b/amarok/src/collectiondb.h
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ class LIBAMAROK_EXPORT CollectionDB : public TQObject, public EngineObserver
         int  addPodcastFolder( const TQString &name, const int parent_id=0, const bool isOpen=false );
         TQValueList<PodcastChannelBundle> getPodcastChannels();
         PodcastEpisodeBundle getPodcastEpisodeById( int id );
-        TQValueList<PodcastEpisodeBundle> getPodcastEpisodes( const KURL &tqparent, bool newOnly=false, int limit=-1 );
+        TQValueList<PodcastEpisodeBundle> getPodcastEpisodes( const KURL &parent, bool newOnly=false, int limit=-1 );
         void removePodcastChannel( const KURL &url ); // will remove all episodes too
         void removePodcastEpisode( const int id );
         void removePodcastFolder( const int id );
@@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ class LIBAMAROK_EXPORT CollectionDB : public TQObject, public EngineObserver
         void timerEvent( TQTimerEvent* e );
 
     public slots:
-        void fetchCover( TQWidget* tqparent, const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, bool noedit, TQListViewItem* item = 0 );
+        void fetchCover( TQWidget* parent, const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, bool noedit, TQListViewItem* item = 0 );
         void scanMonitor();
         void startScan();
         void stopScan();
@@ -658,7 +658,7 @@ class INotify : public ThreadManager::DependentJob
     TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        INotify( CollectionDB *tqparent, int fd );
+        INotify( CollectionDB *parent, int fd );
         ~INotify();
 
         static INotify *instance() { return s_instance; }
@@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ class INotify : public ThreadManager::DependentJob
     private:
         virtual bool doJob();
 
-        CollectionDB* m_tqparent;
+        CollectionDB* m_parent;
         int m_fd;
 
         static INotify* s_instance;
diff --git a/amarok/src/columnlist.cpp b/amarok/src/columnlist.cpp
index 9d1eb698..6cced338 100644
--- a/amarok/src/columnlist.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/columnlist.cpp
@@ -56,8 +56,8 @@ public:
     MyCheckListItem *itemBelow() { return static_cast<MyCheckListItem*>( TQCheckListItem::itemBelow() ); }
 };
 
-ColumnList::ColumnList( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
-    : TQHBox( tqparent, name ), m_changed( true )
+ColumnList::ColumnList( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : TQHBox( parent, name ), m_changed( true )
 {
     setSpacing( 5 );
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/columnlist.h b/amarok/src/columnlist.h
index efc59b06..4ed2a9ee 100644
--- a/amarok/src/columnlist.h
+++ b/amarok/src/columnlist.h
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ class ColumnList: public TQHBox
     Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
 public:
-    ColumnList( TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+    ColumnList( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
     TQValueList<int> visibleColumns() const;
     TQValueList<int> columnOrder() const;
     bool isChanged() const;
diff --git a/amarok/src/configdialog.cpp b/amarok/src/configdialog.cpp
index e364a2a2..68c8db60 100644
--- a/amarok/src/configdialog.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/configdialog.cpp
@@ -79,8 +79,8 @@ int AmarokConfigDialog::s_currentPage = 0;
 // PUBLIC
 //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-AmarokConfigDialog::AmarokConfigDialog( TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name, KConfigSkeleton *config )
-        : KConfigDialog( tqparent, name, config )
+AmarokConfigDialog::AmarokConfigDialog( TQWidget *parent, const char* name, KConfigSkeleton *config )
+        : KConfigDialog( parent, name, config )
         , m_engineConfig( 0 )
         , m_opt4( 0 )
 {
diff --git a/amarok/src/configdialog.h b/amarok/src/configdialog.h
index ba0f284a..d565601b 100644
--- a/amarok/src/configdialog.h
+++ b/amarok/src/configdialog.h
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ class AmarokConfigDialog : public KConfigDialog
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        AmarokConfigDialog( TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name, KConfigSkeleton *config );
+        AmarokConfigDialog( TQWidget *parent, const char* name, KConfigSkeleton *config );
         ~AmarokConfigDialog();
 
         void addPage( TQWidget *page, const TQString &itemName, const TQString &pixmapName,
diff --git a/amarok/src/contextbrowser.cpp b/amarok/src/contextbrowser.cpp
index 045e4fc3..8c230bb2 100644
--- a/amarok/src/contextbrowser.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/contextbrowser.cpp
@@ -1102,9 +1102,9 @@ void ContextBrowser::slotContextMenu( const TQString& urlString, const TQPoint&
 class CurrentTrackJob : public ThreadManager::DependentJob
 {
 public:
-    CurrentTrackJob( ContextBrowser *tqparent )
-        : ThreadManager::DependentJob( TQT_TQOBJECT(tqparent), "CurrentTrackJob" )
-        , b( tqparent )
+    CurrentTrackJob( ContextBrowser *parent )
+        : ThreadManager::DependentJob( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), "CurrentTrackJob" )
+        , b( parent )
         , m_currentTrack( TQDeepCopy<MetaBundle>( EngineController::instance()->bundle() ) )
         , m_isStream( EngineController::engine()->isStream() )
     {
@@ -1946,7 +1946,7 @@ void CurrentTrackJob::showPodcast( const MetaBundle &currentTrack )
     PodcastEpisodeBundle peb = *currentTrack.podcastBundle();
     PodcastChannelBundle pcb;
     bool channelInDB = true;
-    if( !CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastChannelBundle( peb.tqparent(), &pcb ) )
+    if( !CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastChannelBundle( peb.parent(), &pcb ) )
     {
         pcb.setTitle( i18n( "Unknown Channel (not in Database)" ) );
         channelInDB = false;
@@ -2032,7 +2032,7 @@ void CurrentTrackJob::showPodcast( const MetaBundle &currentTrack )
             "<table id='albums_box-body' class='box-body' width='100%' border='0' cellspacing='0' cellpadding='0'>\n" );
 
     uint i = 0;
-    TQValueList<PodcastEpisodeBundle> episodes = CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastEpisodes( peb.tqparent() );
+    TQValueList<PodcastEpisodeBundle> episodes = CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastEpisodes( peb.parent() );
     while( !episodes.isEmpty() )
     {
         PodcastEpisodeBundle &ep = episodes.back();
@@ -4333,7 +4333,7 @@ ContextBrowser::imageFetched( const TQString &url ) //SLOT
     if( CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastEpisodeBundle( currentTrack.url(), &peb ) )
     {
         PodcastChannelBundle pcb;
-        if( CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastChannelBundle( peb.tqparent(), &pcb ) )
+        if( CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastChannelBundle( peb.parent(), &pcb ) )
         {
             if( pcb.imageURL().url() == url )
             {
diff --git a/amarok/src/coverfetcher.cpp b/amarok/src/coverfetcher.cpp
index 6751b850..4947fd8a 100644
--- a/amarok/src/coverfetcher.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/coverfetcher.cpp
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
 
 
 void
-Amarok::coverContextMenu( TQWidget *tqparent, TQPoint point, const TQString &artist, const TQString &album, bool showCoverManager )
+Amarok::coverContextMenu( TQWidget *parent, TQPoint point, const TQString &artist, const TQString &album, bool showCoverManager )
 {
         KPopupMenu menu;
         enum { SHOW, FETCH, CUSTOM, DELETE, MANAGER };
@@ -65,12 +65,12 @@ Amarok::coverContextMenu( TQWidget *tqparent, TQPoint point, const TQString &art
         switch( menu.exec( point ) )
         {
         case SHOW:
-            CoverManager::viewCover( artist, album, tqparent );
+            CoverManager::viewCover( artist, album, parent );
             break;
 
         case DELETE:
         {
-            const int button = KMessageBox::warningContinueCancel( tqparent,
+            const int button = KMessageBox::warningContinueCancel( parent,
                 i18n( "Are you sure you want to remove this cover from the Collection?" ),
                 TQString(),
                 KStdGuiItem::del() );
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Amarok::coverContextMenu( TQWidget *tqparent, TQPoint point, const TQString &art
 
         case FETCH:
         #ifdef AMAZON_SUPPORT
-            CollectionDB::instance()->fetchCover( tqparent, artist, album, false );
+            CollectionDB::instance()->fetchCover( parent, artist, album, false );
             break;
         #endif
 
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Amarok::coverContextMenu( TQWidget *tqparent, TQPoint point, const TQString &art
                 startPath = url.directory();
             }
 
-            KURL file = KFileDialog::getImageOpenURL( startPath, tqparent, i18n("Select Cover Image File") );
+            KURL file = KFileDialog::getImageOpenURL( startPath, parent, i18n("Select Cover Image File") );
             if ( !file.isEmpty() )
                 CollectionDB::instance()->setAlbumImage( artist, album, file );
             break;
@@ -113,8 +113,8 @@ Amarok::coverContextMenu( TQWidget *tqparent, TQPoint point, const TQString &art
 
 
 
-CoverLabel::CoverLabel ( TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name, WFlags f )
-        : TQLabel( tqparent, name, f)
+CoverLabel::CoverLabel ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name, WFlags f )
+        : TQLabel( parent, name, f)
 {}
 
 
@@ -126,8 +126,8 @@ void CoverLabel::mouseReleaseEvent(TQMouseEvent *pEvent) {
 }
 
 
-CoverFetcher::CoverFetcher( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &artist, TQString album )
-        : TQObject( tqparent, "CoverFetcher" )
+CoverFetcher::CoverFetcher( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &artist, TQString album )
+        : TQObject( parent, "CoverFetcher" )
         , m_artist( artist )
         , m_album( album )
         , m_size( 2 )
@@ -459,8 +459,8 @@ CoverFetcher::attemptAnotherFetch()
     class EditSearchDialog : public KDialog
     {
     public:
-        EditSearchDialog( TQWidget* tqparent, const TQString &text, const TQString &keyword, CoverFetcher *fetcher )
-                : KDialog( tqparent )
+        EditSearchDialog( TQWidget* parent, const TQString &text, const TQString &keyword, CoverFetcher *fetcher )
+                : KDialog( parent )
         {
             setCaption( i18n( "Amazon Query Editor" ) );
 
@@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ CoverFetcher::getUserQuery( TQString explanation )
         explanation = i18n("Ask Amazon for covers using this query:");
 
     EditSearchDialog dialog(
-            TQT_TQWIDGET( tqparent() ),
+            TQT_TQWIDGET( parent() ),
             explanation,
             m_userQuery,
             this );
@@ -582,8 +582,8 @@ CoverFetcher::getUserQuery( TQString explanation )
     class CoverFoundDialog : public KDialog
     {
     public:
-        CoverFoundDialog( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQImage &cover, const TQString &productname )
-                : KDialog( tqparent )
+        CoverFoundDialog( TQWidget *parent, const TQImage &cover, const TQString &productname )
+                : KDialog( parent )
         {
             // Gives the window a small title bar, and skips a taskbar entry
             KWin::setType( winId(), NET::Utility );
@@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ CoverFetcher::getUserQuery( TQString explanation )
 void
 CoverFetcher::showCover()
 {
-    CoverFoundDialog dialog( TQT_TQWIDGET( tqparent() ), m_image, m_currentCoverName );
+    CoverFoundDialog dialog( TQT_TQWIDGET( parent() ), m_image, m_currentCoverName );
 
     switch( dialog.exec() )
     {
diff --git a/amarok/src/coverfetcher.h b/amarok/src/coverfetcher.h
index 00aef24a..cb119704 100644
--- a/amarok/src/coverfetcher.h
+++ b/amarok/src/coverfetcher.h
@@ -12,13 +12,13 @@
 #include <tqdom.h>     //stack allocated
 
 namespace Amarok {
-    void coverContextMenu(  TQWidget *tqparent, TQPoint point, const TQString &artist, const TQString &album, bool showCoverManager = true );
+    void coverContextMenu(  TQWidget *parent, TQPoint point, const TQString &artist, const TQString &album, bool showCoverManager = true );
 }
 
 
 class CoverLabel : public TQLabel {
     public:
-    CoverLabel ( TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 );
+    CoverLabel ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 );
 
     void setInformation( const TQString artist, const TQString album ) {
         m_artist = artist;
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ class CoverFetcher : public TQObject
     static const uint MAX_COVERS_CHOICE = 10;
 
 public:
-    CoverFetcher( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &artist, TQString album );
+    CoverFetcher( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &artist, TQString album );
    ~CoverFetcher();
 
     /// allow the user to edit the query?
diff --git a/amarok/src/covermanager.cpp b/amarok/src/covermanager.cpp
index 7ef53c29..63804794 100644
--- a/amarok/src/covermanager.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/covermanager.cpp
@@ -270,8 +270,8 @@ void CoverManager::init()
 }
 
 
-CoverViewDialog::CoverViewDialog( const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, TQWidget *tqparent )
-    : TQDialog( tqparent, 0, false, WDestructiveClose | WType_TopLevel | WNoAutoErase )
+CoverViewDialog::CoverViewDialog( const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, TQWidget *parent )
+    : TQDialog( parent, 0, false, WDestructiveClose | WType_TopLevel | WNoAutoErase )
     , m_pixmap( CollectionDB::instance()->albumImage( artist, album, false, 0 ) )
 {
     KWin::setType( winId(), NET::Utility );
@@ -286,10 +286,10 @@ CoverViewDialog::CoverViewDialog( const TQString& artist, const TQString& album,
 }
 
 
-void CoverManager::viewCover( const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, TQWidget *tqparent ) //static
+void CoverManager::viewCover( const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, TQWidget *parent ) //static
 {
     //TQDialog means "escape" works as expected
-    TQDialog *dialog = new CoverViewDialog( artist, album, tqparent );
+    TQDialog *dialog = new CoverViewDialog( artist, album, parent );
     dialog->show();
 }
 
@@ -884,8 +884,8 @@ void CoverManager::setStatusText( TQString text )
 //    CLASS CoverView
 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-CoverView::CoverView( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : KIconView( tqparent, name, f )
+CoverView::CoverView( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
+    : KIconView( parent, name, f )
 {
     Debug::Block block( __PRETTY_FUNCTION__ );
 
@@ -951,8 +951,8 @@ void CoverView::setStatusText( TQIconViewItem *item )
 //    CLASS CoverViewItem
 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-CoverViewItem::CoverViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, TQIconViewItem *after, const TQString &artist, const TQString &album )
-    : KIconViewItem( tqparent, after, album )
+CoverViewItem::CoverViewItem( TQIconView *parent, TQIconViewItem *after, const TQString &artist, const TQString &album )
+    : KIconViewItem( parent, after, album )
     , m_artist( artist )
     , m_album( album )
     , m_coverImagePath( CollectionDB::instance()->albumImage( m_artist, m_album, false, 0, &m_embedded ) )
diff --git a/amarok/src/covermanager.h b/amarok/src/covermanager.h
index 7f4b9262..fc271c65 100644
--- a/amarok/src/covermanager.h
+++ b/amarok/src/covermanager.h
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ class CoverManager : public TQSplitter
         static CoverManager *instance() { return s_instance; }
 
         static void showOnce( const TQString &artist = TQString() );
-        static void viewCover( const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, TQWidget *tqparent=0 );
+        static void viewCover( const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, TQWidget *parent=0 );
 
         void setStatusText( TQString text );
 
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ class CoverView : public KIconView
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        CoverView( TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 );
+        CoverView( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 );
 
     protected:
         TQDragObject *dragObject();
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ class CoverView : public KIconView
 class CoverViewItem : public KIconViewItem
 {
     public:
-        CoverViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, TQIconViewItem *after, const TQString &artist, const TQString &album );
+        CoverViewItem( TQIconView *parent, TQIconViewItem *after, const TQString &artist, const TQString &album );
 
         void loadCover();
         bool hasCover() const;
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ class CoverViewDialog : public TQDialog {
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        CoverViewDialog(const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, TQWidget *tqparent);
+        CoverViewDialog(const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, TQWidget *parent);
 
     private:
         TQHBoxLayout *m_tqlayout;
diff --git a/amarok/src/database_refactor/collectiondb.cpp b/amarok/src/database_refactor/collectiondb.cpp
index 82fcbb77..f6fd7979 100644
--- a/amarok/src/database_refactor/collectiondb.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/database_refactor/collectiondb.cpp
@@ -1675,12 +1675,12 @@ CollectionDB::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent* )
 //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
 void
-CollectionDB::fetchCover( TQWidget* tqparent, const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, bool noedit ) //SLOT
+CollectionDB::fetchCover( TQWidget* parent, const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, bool noedit ) //SLOT
 {
     #ifdef AMAZON_SUPPORT
     debug() << "Fetching cover for " << artist << " - " << album << endl;
 
-    CoverFetcher* fetcher = new CoverFetcher( tqparent, artist, album );
+    CoverFetcher* fetcher = new CoverFetcher( parent, artist, album );
     connect( fetcher, TQT_SIGNAL(result( CoverFetcher* )), TQT_SLOT(coverFetcherResult( CoverFetcher* )) );
     fetcher->setUserCanEditQuery( !noedit );
     fetcher->startFetch();
@@ -1773,10 +1773,10 @@ class SimilarArtistsInsertionJob : public ThreadWeaver::DependentJob
     const TQStringList suggestions;
 
 public:
-    SimilarArtistsInsertionJob( CollectionDB *tqparent, const TQString &s, const TQStringList &list )
-            : ThreadWeaver::DependentJob( tqparent, "SimilarArtistsInsertionJob" )
+    SimilarArtistsInsertionJob( CollectionDB *parent, const TQString &s, const TQStringList &list )
+            : ThreadWeaver::DependentJob( parent, "SimilarArtistsInsertionJob" )
             , artist( s )
-            , escapedArtist( tqparent->escapeString( s ) )
+            , escapedArtist( parent->escapeString( s ) )
             , suggestions( list )
     {}
 };
diff --git a/amarok/src/database_refactor/collectiondb.h b/amarok/src/database_refactor/collectiondb.h
index 8217ec06..f2c955b0 100644
--- a/amarok/src/database_refactor/collectiondb.h
+++ b/amarok/src/database_refactor/collectiondb.h
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ class CollectionDB : public TQObject, public EngineObserver
         void timerEvent( TQTimerEvent* e );
 
     public slots:
-        void fetchCover( TQWidget* tqparent, const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, bool noedit );
+        void fetchCover( TQWidget* parent, const TQString& artist, const TQString& album, bool noedit );
         void scanMonitor();
         void startScan();
         void stopScan();
diff --git a/amarok/src/deletedialog.cpp b/amarok/src/deletedialog.cpp
index 631bd319..970526c5 100644
--- a/amarok/src/deletedialog.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/deletedialog.cpp
@@ -41,8 +41,8 @@
 // DeleteWidget implementation
 //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-DeleteWidget::DeleteWidget(TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name)
-    : DeleteDialogBase(tqparent, name)
+DeleteWidget::DeleteWidget(TQWidget *parent, const char *name)
+    : DeleteDialogBase(parent, name)
 {
     KConfigGroup messageGroup(KGlobal::config(), "FileRemover");
 
@@ -84,8 +84,8 @@ void DeleteWidget::slotShouldDelete(bool shouldDelete)
 // DeleteDialog implementation
 //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-DeleteDialog::DeleteDialog(TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name) :
-    KDialogBase(Swallow, WStyle_DialogBorder, tqparent, name,
+DeleteDialog::DeleteDialog(TQWidget *parent, const char *name) :
+    KDialogBase(Swallow, WStyle_DialogBorder, parent, name,
         true /* modal */, i18n("About to delete selected files"),
         Ok | Cancel, Cancel /* Default */, true /* separator */),
     m_trashGuiItem(i18n("&Send to Trash"), "trashcan_full")
@@ -131,9 +131,9 @@ void DeleteDialog::slotShouldDelete(bool shouldDelete)
     setButtonGuiItem(Ok, shouldDelete ? KStdGuiItem::del() : m_trashGuiItem);
 }
 
-bool DeleteDialog::showTrashDialog(TQWidget* tqparent, const KURL::List& files)
+bool DeleteDialog::showTrashDialog(TQWidget* parent, const KURL::List& files)
 {
-    DeleteDialog dialog(tqparent);
+    DeleteDialog dialog(parent);
     bool doDelete = dialog.confirmDeleteList(files);
 
     if( doDelete )
diff --git a/amarok/src/deletedialog.h b/amarok/src/deletedialog.h
index 79d11705..7bf981af 100644
--- a/amarok/src/deletedialog.h
+++ b/amarok/src/deletedialog.h
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ class DeleteWidget : public DeleteDialogBase
   TQ_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    DeleteWidget(TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0);
+    DeleteWidget(TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0);
 
     void setFiles(const KURL::List &files);
 
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ class DeleteDialog : public KDialogBase
   TQ_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    DeleteDialog(TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name = "delete_dialog");
-    static bool showTrashDialog(TQWidget* tqparent, const KURL::List &files);
+    DeleteDialog(TQWidget *parent, const char *name = "delete_dialog");
+    static bool showTrashDialog(TQWidget* parent, const KURL::List &files);
 
     bool confirmDeleteList(const KURL::List &condemnedFiles);
     void setFiles(const KURL::List &files);
diff --git a/amarok/src/directorylist.cpp b/amarok/src/directorylist.cpp
index b1f1c86a..91c4641c 100644
--- a/amarok/src/directorylist.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/directorylist.cpp
@@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
 CollectionSetup* CollectionSetup::s_instance;
 
 
-CollectionSetup::CollectionSetup( TQWidget *tqparent )
-        : TQVBox( tqparent, "CollectionSetup" )
+CollectionSetup::CollectionSetup( TQWidget *parent )
+        : TQVBox( parent, "CollectionSetup" )
 {
     s_instance = this;
 
@@ -112,8 +112,8 @@ CollectionSetup::writeConfig()
 
 namespace Collection {
 
-Item::Item( TQListView *tqparent )
-    : TQCheckListItem( tqparent, "/", TQCheckListItem::CheckBox  )
+Item::Item( TQListView *parent )
+    : TQCheckListItem( parent, "/", TQCheckListItem::CheckBox  )
     , m_lister( true )
     , m_url( "file:/" )
     , m_listed( false )
@@ -129,8 +129,8 @@ Item::Item( TQListView *tqparent )
 }
 
 
-Item::Item( TQListViewItem *tqparent, const KURL &url , bool full_disable /* default=false */ )
-    : TQCheckListItem( tqparent, url.fileName(), TQCheckListItem::CheckBox )
+Item::Item( TQListViewItem *parent, const KURL &url , bool full_disable /* default=false */ )
+    : TQCheckListItem( parent, url.fileName(), TQCheckListItem::CheckBox )
     , m_lister( true )
     , m_url( url )
     , m_listed( false )
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Item::fullPath() const
 {
     TQString path;
 
-    for( const TQListViewItem *item = this; item != listView()->firstChild(); item = item->tqparent() )
+    for( const TQListViewItem *item = this; item != listView()->firstChild(); item = item->parent() )
     {
         path.prepend( item->text( 0 ) );
         path.prepend( '/' );
@@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Item::stateChange( bool b )
     else {
         //Deselect item and recurse through tqchildren but only deselect tqchildren if they
         //do not exist unless we are in recursive mode (where no tqchildren should be
-        //selected if the tqparent is being unselected)
+        //selected if the parent is being unselected)
         //Note this does not do anything to the checkboxes, but they should be doing
         //the same thing as we are (hopefully)
         //Note: all paths lack a trailing '/' except for "/", which must be handled as a
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ Item::stateChange( bool b )
         }
     }
 
-    // Redraw tqparent items
+    // Redraw parent items
     listView()->triggerUpdate();
 }
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/directorylist.h b/amarok/src/directorylist.h
index 543f2f21..0065f04f 100644
--- a/amarok/src/directorylist.h
+++ b/amarok/src/directorylist.h
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ class TQFixedListView : public TQListView
 // Reimplement tqsizeHint to have directorylist not being too big for "low" (1024x768 is not exactly low) resolutions
 {
 public:
-    TQFixedListView ( TQWidget * tqparent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-                   :TQListView(tqparent, name, f) {};
+    TQFixedListView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+                   :TQListView(parent, name, f) {};
     TQSize tqsizeHint() const
     {
         return TQSize(400, 100);
@@ -73,12 +73,12 @@ class Item : public TQObject, public TQCheckListItem
 Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
 public:
-    Item( TQListView *tqparent );
-    Item( TQListViewItem *tqparent, const KURL &url , bool full_disable=false );
+    Item( TQListView *parent );
+    Item( TQListViewItem *parent, const KURL &url , bool full_disable=false );
 
-    TQCheckListItem *tqparent() const { return static_cast<TQCheckListItem*>( TQListViewItem::tqparent() ); }
+    TQCheckListItem *parent() const { return static_cast<TQCheckListItem*>( TQListViewItem::parent() ); }
     bool isFullyDisabled() const { return m_fullyDisabled; }
-    bool isDisabled() const { return isFullyDisabled() || ( CollectionSetup::instance()->recursive() && tqparent() && tqparent()->isOn() ); }
+    bool isDisabled() const { return isFullyDisabled() || ( CollectionSetup::instance()->recursive() && parent() && parent()->isOn() ); }
     TQString fullPath() const;
 
     void setOpen( bool b ); // reimpl.
diff --git a/amarok/src/editfilterdialog.cpp b/amarok/src/editfilterdialog.cpp
index c7d97d2e..f9dd1739 100644
--- a/amarok/src/editfilterdialog.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/editfilterdialog.cpp
@@ -26,9 +26,9 @@
 #include "editfilterdialog.h"
 #include "metabundle.h"
 
-EditFilterDialog::EditFilterDialog( TQWidget* tqparent, bool metaBundleKeywords, const TQString &text )
+EditFilterDialog::EditFilterDialog( TQWidget* parent, bool metaBundleKeywords, const TQString &text )
     : KDialogBase( Plain, i18n("Edit Filter"), User1|User2|Default|Ok|Cancel,
-      Cancel, tqparent, "editfilter", /*modal*/true, /*separator*/false ),
+      Cancel, parent, "editfilter", /*modal*/true, /*separator*/false ),
       m_minMaxRadio(0),
       m_filterText(text)
 {
diff --git a/amarok/src/editfilterdialog.h b/amarok/src/editfilterdialog.h
index 49706987..bf14ca81 100644
--- a/amarok/src/editfilterdialog.h
+++ b/amarok/src/editfilterdialog.h
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ class EditFilterDialog : public KDialogBase
     Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
     public:
-        EditFilterDialog( TQWidget* tqparent, bool metaBundleKeywords, const TQString &text = "" );
+        EditFilterDialog( TQWidget* parent, bool metaBundleKeywords, const TQString &text = "" );
         ~EditFilterDialog();
 
         TQString filter() const;
diff --git a/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-configdialog.cpp b/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-configdialog.cpp
index 5cb0be23..73080389 100644
--- a/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-configdialog.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-configdialog.cpp
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ using namespace std;
 
 HelixConfigDialogBase *HelixConfigDialog::instance = NULL;
 
-HelixConfigEntry::HelixConfigEntry( TQWidget *tqparent,
+HelixConfigEntry::HelixConfigEntry( TQWidget *parent,
                                     Amarok::PluginConfig *pluginConfig,
                                     int row,
 				    const TQString & description,
@@ -53,22 +53,22 @@ HelixConfigEntry::HelixConfigEntry( TQWidget *tqparent,
          , m_valueChanged( false )
          , m_stringValue( defaultvalue )
 {
-    TQGridLayout *grid = (TQGridLayout*)tqparent->tqlayout();
+    TQGridLayout *grid = (TQGridLayout*)parent->tqlayout();
 
-    m_w = new KLineEdit( m_stringValue, tqparent );
+    m_w = new KLineEdit( m_stringValue, parent );
     connect( (TQWidget *) m_w, TQT_SIGNAL(textChanged( const TQString& )), this, TQT_SLOT(slotStringChanged( const TQString& )) );
     connect( (TQWidget *) m_w, TQT_SIGNAL(textChanged( const TQString& )), pluginConfig, TQT_SIGNAL(viewChanged()) );
 
     TQToolTip::add( (TQWidget *) m_w, "<qt>" + tooltip );
 
-    TQLabel* d = new TQLabel( description + ':', tqparent );
+    TQLabel* d = new TQLabel( description + ':', parent );
     d->tqsetAlignment( TQLabel::WordBreak | TQLabel::AlignVCenter );
 
     grid->addWidget( (TQWidget *) m_w, row, 1 );
     grid->addWidget( d, row, 0 );
 }
 
-HelixConfigEntry::HelixConfigEntry( TQWidget *tqparent,
+HelixConfigEntry::HelixConfigEntry( TQWidget *parent,
                                     TQString &str,
                                     Amarok::PluginConfig *pluginConfig,
                                     int row,
@@ -79,17 +79,17 @@ HelixConfigEntry::HelixConfigEntry( TQWidget *tqparent,
    , m_valueChanged( false )
    , m_stringValue( defaultvalue )
 {
-    TQGridLayout *grid = (TQGridLayout*)tqparent->tqlayout();
+    TQGridLayout *grid = (TQGridLayout*)parent->tqlayout();
 
     m_key = str;
 
-    m_w = new KLineEdit( str, tqparent );
+    m_w = new KLineEdit( str, parent );
     connect( m_w, TQT_SIGNAL(textChanged( const TQString& )), this, TQT_SLOT(slotStringChanged( const TQString& )) );
     connect( m_w, TQT_SIGNAL(textChanged( const TQString& )), pluginConfig, TQT_SIGNAL(viewChanged()) );
 
     TQToolTip::add( m_w, "<qt>" + tooltip );
 
-    TQLabel* d = new TQLabel( description + ':', tqparent );
+    TQLabel* d = new TQLabel( description + ':', parent );
     d->tqsetAlignment( TQLabel::WordBreak | TQLabel::AlignVCenter );
 
     grid->addWidget( m_w, row, 1 );
@@ -104,21 +104,21 @@ HelixConfigEntry::slotStringChanged( const TQString& )
    m_valueChanged = true;
 }
 
-HelixSoundDevice::HelixSoundDevice( TQWidget *tqparent,
+HelixSoundDevice::HelixSoundDevice( TQWidget *parent,
                                     Amarok::PluginConfig *pluginConfig,
                                     int &row,
                                     HelixEngine *engine )
    : deviceComboBox(0), checkBox_outputDevice(0), lineEdit_outputDevice(0), m_changed(false), m_engine(engine)
 {
-   TQGridLayout *grid = (TQGridLayout*)tqparent->tqlayout();
+   TQGridLayout *grid = (TQGridLayout*)parent->tqlayout();
 
-   deviceComboBox = new KComboBox( false, tqparent, "deviceComboBox" );
+   deviceComboBox = new KComboBox( false, parent, "deviceComboBox" );
    deviceComboBox->insertItem("oss");  // I believe these are not subject to translation (they don't seem to be in xine,
 #ifdef USE_HELIX_ALSA
    deviceComboBox->insertItem("alsa"); // and neither are the equivalents in gst (osssink and alsasink)
 #endif
    deviceComboBox->setCurrentItem(HelixConfig::outputplugin());
-   TQLabel* op = new TQLabel( i18n("Output plugin:"), tqparent );
+   TQLabel* op = new TQLabel( i18n("Output plugin:"), parent );
    op->tqsetAlignment( TQLabel::WordBreak | TQLabel::AlignVCenter );
    grid->addWidget( op, row, 0 );
    grid->addWidget( deviceComboBox, row, 1);
@@ -127,12 +127,12 @@ HelixSoundDevice::HelixSoundDevice( TQWidget *tqparent,
 
    ++row;
 
-   checkBox_outputDevice = new TQCheckBox( tqparent, "checkBox_outputDevice" );
+   checkBox_outputDevice = new TQCheckBox( parent, "checkBox_outputDevice" );
    checkBox_outputDevice->tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( (TQSizePolicy::SizeType)5, (TQSizePolicy::SizeType)5, 0, 0, checkBox_outputDevice->sizePolicy().hasHeightForWidth() ) );
    grid->addWidget( checkBox_outputDevice, row, 0 );
    checkBox_outputDevice->setText( i18n( "Device:" ) );
 
-    lineEdit_outputDevice = new KLineEdit( HelixConfig::device(), tqparent );
+    lineEdit_outputDevice = new KLineEdit( HelixConfig::device(), parent );
     connect( (TQWidget *) lineEdit_outputDevice, TQT_SIGNAL(textChanged( const TQString& )), this, TQT_SLOT(slotStringChanged( const TQString& )) );
     connect( (TQWidget *) lineEdit_outputDevice, TQT_SIGNAL( textChanged( const TQString& )), pluginConfig, TQT_SIGNAL(viewChanged()) );
     connect( checkBox_outputDevice, TQT_SIGNAL( toggled(bool) ), lineEdit_outputDevice, TQT_SLOT( setEnabled(bool) ) );
@@ -257,21 +257,21 @@ HelixConfigDialogBase::HelixConfigDialogBase( HelixEngine *engine, Amarok::Plugi
 {
     int row = 0;
     TQString currentPage;
-    TQWidget *tqparent = 0;
+    TQWidget *parent = 0;
     TQGridLayout *grid = 0;
     TQScrollView *sv = 0;
 
     TQString pageName( i18n("Main") );
 
     addTab( sv = new TQScrollView, pageName );
-    tqparent = new TQWidget( sv->viewport() );
+    parent = new TQWidget( sv->viewport() );
 
     sv->setResizePolicy( TQScrollView::AutoOneFit );
     sv->setHScrollBarMode( TQScrollView::AlwaysOff );
     sv->setFrameShape( TQFrame::NoFrame );
-    sv->addChild( tqparent );
+    sv->addChild( parent );
 
-    grid = new TQGridLayout( tqparent, /*rows*/20, /*cols*/2, /*margin*/10, /*spacing*/10 );
+    grid = new TQGridLayout( parent, /*rows*/20, /*cols*/2, /*margin*/10, /*spacing*/10 );
     grid->setColStretch( 0, 1 );
     grid->setColStretch( 1, 1 );
 
@@ -279,30 +279,30 @@ HelixConfigDialogBase::HelixConfigDialogBase( HelixEngine *engine, Amarok::Plugi
        sv->setMinimumWidth( grid->tqsizeHint().width() + 20 );
 
     engine->m_coredir = HelixConfig::coreDirectory();
-    m_core = new HelixConfigEntry( tqparent, engine->m_coredir,
+    m_core = new HelixConfigEntry( parent, engine->m_coredir,
                                    config, row,
                                    i18n("Helix/Realplay core directory"),
                                    HelixConfig::coreDirectory().utf8(),
                                    i18n("This is the directory where clntcore.so is located"));
     ++row;
     engine->m_pluginsdir = HelixConfig::pluginDirectory();
-    m_plugin = new HelixConfigEntry( tqparent, engine->m_pluginsdir,
+    m_plugin = new HelixConfigEntry( parent, engine->m_pluginsdir,
                                      config, row,
                                      i18n("Helix/Realplay plugins directory"),
                                      HelixConfig::pluginDirectory().utf8(),
                                      i18n("This is the directory where, for example, vorbisrend.so is located"));
     ++row;
     engine->m_codecsdir = HelixConfig::codecsDirectory();
-    m_codec = new HelixConfigEntry( tqparent, engine->m_codecsdir,
+    m_codec = new HelixConfigEntry( parent, engine->m_codecsdir,
                                      config, row,
                                      i18n("Helix/Realplay codecs directory"),
                                      HelixConfig::codecsDirectory().utf8(),
                                      i18n("This is the directory where, for example, cvt1.so is located"));
     ++row;
-    grid->addMultiCellWidget( new KSeparator( KSeparator::Horizontal, tqparent ), row, row, 0, 1 );
+    grid->addMultiCellWidget( new KSeparator( KSeparator::Horizontal, parent ), row, row, 0, 1 );
 
     ++row;
-    m_device = new HelixSoundDevice( tqparent, config, row, engine );
+    m_device = new HelixSoundDevice( parent, config, row, engine );
 
     // lets find the logo if we can
     TQPixmap *pm = 0;
@@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ HelixConfigDialogBase::HelixConfigDialogBase( HelixEngine *engine, Amarok::Plugi
 
     if (pm)
     {
-       TQLabel *l = new TQLabel(tqparent);
+       TQLabel *l = new TQLabel(parent);
        l->setPixmap(*pm);
        grid->addMultiCellWidget( l, 20, 20, 1, 1, TQt::AlignRight );
     }
@@ -342,16 +342,16 @@ HelixConfigDialogBase::HelixConfigDialogBase( HelixEngine *engine, Amarok::Plugi
     pageName = i18n("Plugins");
 
     addTab( sv = new TQScrollView, pageName );
-    tqparent = new TQWidget( sv->viewport() );
+    parent = new TQWidget( sv->viewport() );
 
     sv->setResizePolicy( TQScrollView::AutoOneFit );
-    sv->addChild( tqparent );
+    sv->addChild( parent );
 
-    TQTextEdit *le = new TQTextEdit( tqparent );
+    TQTextEdit *le = new TQTextEdit( parent );
     if( sv )
        sv->setMinimumWidth( le->tqsizeHint().width() );
 
-    grid = new TQGridLayout( tqparent, /*rows*/1, /*cols*/1, /*margin*/2, /*spacing*/1 );
+    grid = new TQGridLayout( parent, /*rows*/1, /*cols*/1, /*margin*/2, /*spacing*/1 );
     grid->addMultiCellWidget( le, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0 );
     le->setWordWrap(TQTextEdit::NoWrap);
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-configdialog.h b/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-configdialog.h
index 3375b64c..3da4af0b 100644
--- a/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-configdialog.h
+++ b/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-configdialog.h
@@ -30,9 +30,9 @@ class HelixConfigEntry : public TQObject
 Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
 public:
-   HelixConfigEntry( TQWidget *tqparent, Amarok::PluginConfig*,
+   HelixConfigEntry( TQWidget *parent, Amarok::PluginConfig*,
                      int row, const TQString & description, const char *defaultvalue, const TQString & tooltip );
-   HelixConfigEntry( TQWidget *tqparent, TQString &str, Amarok::PluginConfig*,
+   HelixConfigEntry( TQWidget *parent, TQString &str, Amarok::PluginConfig*,
                      int row, const TQString & description, const char *defaultvalue, const TQString & tooltip );
 
    bool isChanged() const { return m_valueChanged; }
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ class HelixSoundDevice : public TQObject
 Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
 public:
-   HelixSoundDevice( TQWidget *tqparent, Amarok::PluginConfig *config, int &row, HelixEngine *engine );
+   HelixSoundDevice( TQWidget *parent, Amarok::PluginConfig *config, int &row, HelixEngine *engine );
    bool save();
    void setSoundSystem( int api );
    bool isChanged() const { return m_changed; }
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ private:
 class HelixConfigDialogBase : public TQTabWidget
 {
 public:
-   HelixConfigDialogBase( HelixEngine *engine, Amarok::PluginConfig *config, TQWidget *tqparent = 0 );
+   HelixConfigDialogBase( HelixEngine *engine, Amarok::PluginConfig *config, TQWidget *parent = 0 );
    ~HelixConfigDialogBase();
 
    virtual TQWidget *view() { return this; }
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ private:
 class HelixConfigDialog : public Amarok::PluginConfig
 {
 public:
-   HelixConfigDialog( HelixEngine *engine, TQWidget *tqparent = 0 );
+   HelixConfigDialog( HelixEngine *engine, TQWidget *parent = 0 );
    ~HelixConfigDialog();
 
    virtual TQWidget *view() { return instance->view(); }
diff --git a/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxcomm.h b/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxcomm.h
index 6d44bf7d..ac83d81d 100644
--- a/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxcomm.h
+++ b/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxcomm.h
@@ -190,12 +190,12 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXServerFork, IUnknown)
      *	Purpose:
      *	    Fork off a child process.  The child process cannot use any RMA
      *	    APIs.  Upon successful completion, Fork returns 0 to the child
-     *	    process and the PID of the child to the tqparent.  A return value
+     *	    process and the PID of the child to the parent.  A return value
      *	    of -1 indicates an error.
      *
      *	    Note:  The child process should *NOT* Release any interfaces.
      *		The cleanup of the IHXServerFork() interface and other
-     *		RMA interfaces is done by the tqparent.
+     *		RMA interfaces is done by the parent.
      *
      */
     STDMETHOD_(INT32, Fork)	(THIS) PURE;
diff --git a/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxcore.h b/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxcore.h
index 63d18324..6789f26f 100644
--- a/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxcore.h
+++ b/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxcore.h
@@ -1562,7 +1562,7 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXPlayerNavigator, IUnknown)
      *	Method:
      *	    IHXPlayerNavigator::SetParentPlayer
      *	Purpose:
-     *	    Set the tqparent player
+     *	    Set the parent player
      */
     STDTQT_METHOD(SetParentPlayer)	    (THIS_
 				    IHXPlayer* pPlayer) PURE;
@@ -1571,7 +1571,7 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXPlayerNavigator, IUnknown)
      *	Method:
      *	    IHXPlayerNavigator::RemoveParentPlayer
      *	Purpose:
-     *	    Remove the tqparent player
+     *	    Remove the parent player
      */
     STDTQT_METHOD(RemoveParentPlayer)   (THIS_
 				    IHXPlayer* pPlayer) PURE;
@@ -1580,7 +1580,7 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXPlayerNavigator, IUnknown)
      *	Method:
      *	    IHXPlayerNavigator::GetParentPlayer
      *	Purpose:
-     *	    Get the tqparent player
+     *	    Get the parent player
      */
     STDTQT_METHOD(GetParentPlayer)	    (THIS_
 				    REF(IHXPlayer*) pPlayer) PURE;
diff --git a/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxmon.h b/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxmon.h
index 5740e344..775d287c 100644
--- a/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxmon.h
+++ b/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxmon.h
@@ -421,11 +421,11 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXRegistry, IUnknown)
      *  Method:
      *      IHXRegistry::FindParentIdByName
      *  Purpose:
-     *      Returns the id value of the tqparent node of the Property whose 
+     *      Returns the id value of the parent node of the Property whose 
      *  name "pName" has been passed in. If it fails, a ZERO value is 
      *  returned.
      *
-     *  pName - IN - name of the Property whose tqparent's unique id is to be
+     *  pName - IN - name of the Property whose parent's unique id is to be
      *               retrieved
      */
     STDMETHOD_(UINT32, FindParentIdByName)	(THIS_
@@ -435,10 +435,10 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXRegistry, IUnknown)
      *  Method:
      *      IHXRegistry::FindParentIdById
      *  Purpose:
-     *      Returns the id value of the tqparent node of the Property whose 
+     *      Returns the id value of the parent node of the Property whose 
      *  id "ulId" has been passed in. If it fails, a ZERO value is returned.
      *
-     *  ulId - IN - unique id of the Property whose tqparent's id is to be
+     *  ulId - IN - unique id of the Property whose parent's id is to be
      *              retrieved
      */
     STDMETHOD_(UINT32, FindParentIdById)	(THIS_
@@ -722,7 +722,7 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXPropWatchResponse, IUnknown)
      *  Purpose:
      *      Gets called when a new Property gets added under the Property 
      *  on which the Watch was set. It passes the id of the Property just 
-     *  added, its datatype and the id of its immediate tqparent COMPOSITE 
+     *  added, its datatype and the id of its immediate parent COMPOSITE 
      *  property.
      */
     STDTQT_METHOD(AddedProp)	(THIS_
@@ -736,7 +736,7 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXPropWatchResponse, IUnknown)
      *  Purpose:
      *      Gets called when a watched Property gets modified. It passes
      *  the id of the Property just modified, its datatype and the
-     *  id of its immediate tqparent COMPOSITE property.
+     *  id of its immediate parent COMPOSITE property.
      */
     STDTQT_METHOD(ModifiedProp)	(THIS_
 				const UINT32		ulId,
@@ -749,7 +749,7 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXPropWatchResponse, IUnknown)
      *  Purpose:
      *      Gets called when a watched Property gets deleted. As can be
      *  seen, it returns the id of the Property just deleted and
-     *  its immediate tqparent COMPOSITE property.
+     *  its immediate parent COMPOSITE property.
      */
     STDTQT_METHOD(DeletedProp)	(THIS_
 				const UINT32		ulId,
@@ -1483,11 +1483,11 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXRegistry2, IUnknown)
      *  Method:
      *      IHXRegistry2::FindParentIdByName
      *  Purpose:
-     *      Returns the id value of the tqparent node of the Property whose 
+     *      Returns the id value of the parent node of the Property whose 
      *  name "pName" has been passed in. If it fails, a ZERO value is 
      *  returned.
      *
-     *  pName - IN - name of the Property whose tqparent's unique id is to be
+     *  pName - IN - name of the Property whose parent's unique id is to be
      *               retrieved
      */
     STDMETHOD_(UINT32, FindParentIdByName)	(THIS_
@@ -1497,10 +1497,10 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXRegistry2, IUnknown)
      *  Method:
      *      IHXRegistry2::FindParentIdById
      *  Purpose:
-     *      Returns the id value of the tqparent node of the Property whose 
+     *      Returns the id value of the parent node of the Property whose 
      *  id "ulId" has been passed in. If it fails, a ZERO value is returned.
      *
-     *  ulId - IN - unique id of the Property whose tqparent's id is to be
+     *  ulId - IN - unique id of the Property whose parent's id is to be
      *              retrieved
      */
     STDMETHOD_(UINT32, FindParentIdById)	(THIS_
@@ -2211,8 +2211,8 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXDeletedPropResponse, IUnknown)
      *      from the registry.
      *
      *  ulId - IN - unique id of the Property which has been deleted
-     *  ulParentID - IN - unique id of the tqparent Property of the deleted item
-     *  bIsParentNotify - IN - TRUE if this is a tqparent notification.
+     *  ulParentID - IN - unique id of the parent Property of the deleted item
+     *  bIsParentNotify - IN - TRUE if this is a parent notification.
      *  pName - IN - name of the deleted Property (null-terminated)
      */
     STDTQT_METHOD(DeletedComposite)(THIS_
@@ -2228,8 +2228,8 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXDeletedPropResponse, IUnknown)
      *      Provide notification that a INTEGER Property has been deleted.
      *
      *  ulId - IN - unique id of the Property which has been deleted
-     *  ulParentID - IN - unique id of the tqparent Property of the deleted item
-     *  bIsParentNotify - IN - TRUE if this is a tqparent notification.
+     *  ulParentID - IN - unique id of the parent Property of the deleted item
+     *  bIsParentNotify - IN - TRUE if this is a parent notification.
      *  pName - IN - name of the Property being deleted (null-terminated)
      *  nValue - IN - integer value of the Property which has been deleted
      */
@@ -2248,8 +2248,8 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXDeletedPropResponse, IUnknown)
      *      been deleted from the registry.
      *
      *  ulId - IN - unique id of the Property which has been deleted
-     *  ulParentID - IN - unique id of the tqparent Property of the deleted item
-     *  bIsParentNotify - IN - TRUE if this is a tqparent notification.
+     *  ulParentID - IN - unique id of the parent Property of the deleted item
+     *  bIsParentNotify - IN - TRUE if this is a parent notification.
      *  pName - IN - name of the deleted Property (null-terminated)
      *  nValue - IN - integer value of the Property which has been deleted
      *  pValue - IN - the pointer of the integer reference Property
@@ -2271,8 +2271,8 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXDeletedPropResponse, IUnknown)
      *      from the registry.
      *
      *  ulId - IN - unique id of the deleted Property which has been deleted
-     *  ulParentID - IN - unique id of the tqparent Property of the deleted item
-     *  bIsParentNotify - IN - TRUE if this is a tqparent notification.
+     *  ulParentID - IN - unique id of the parent Property of the deleted item
+     *  bIsParentNotify - IN - TRUE if this is a parent notification.
      *  pName - IN - name of the deleted Property (null-terminated)
      *  pValue - IN - value of the deleted Property 
      */
@@ -2291,8 +2291,8 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXDeletedPropResponse, IUnknown)
      *      from the registry.
      *
      *  ulId - IN - unique id of the Property which has been deleted
-     *  ulParentID - IN - unique id of the tqparent Property of the deleted item
-     *  bIsParentNotify - IN - TRUE if this is a tqparent notification.
+     *  ulParentID - IN - unique id of the parent Property of the deleted item
+     *  bIsParentNotify - IN - TRUE if this is a parent notification.
      *  pName - IN - name of the deleted Property (null-terminated)
      *  pValue - IN - buffer value of the deleted Property 
      */
@@ -2313,8 +2313,8 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXDeletedPropResponse, IUnknown)
      *  Note: This is not used for IHXRegistry, but for IHXRegistry2.
      *
      *  ulId - IN - unique id of the Property which has been deleted
-     *  ulParentID - IN - unique id of the tqparent Property of the deleted item
-     *  bIsParentNotify - IN - TRUE if this is a tqparent notification.
+     *  ulParentID - IN - unique id of the parent Property of the deleted item
+     *  bIsParentNotify - IN - TRUE if this is a parent notification.
      *  pName - IN - name of the deleted Property (null-terminated)
      *  nValue - IN - 64-bit integer value of the deleted Property 
      */
@@ -2335,8 +2335,8 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXDeletedPropResponse, IUnknown)
      *  Note: This is not used for IHXRegistry, but for IHXRegistry2.
      *
      *  ulId - IN - unique id of the Property which has been deleted
-     *  ulParentID - IN - unique id of the tqparent Property of the deleted item
-     *  bIsParentNotify - IN - TRUE if this is a tqparent notification.
+     *  ulParentID - IN - unique id of the parent Property of the deleted item
+     *  bIsParentNotify - IN - TRUE if this is a parent notification.
      *  pName - IN - name of the deleted Property (null-terminated)
      *  nValue - IN - 64-bit integer value of the deleted Property 
      *  pValue - IN - the pointer of the 64-bit integer reference Property
diff --git a/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxwin.h b/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxwin.h
index ca46e4ac..42afd584 100644
--- a/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxwin.h
+++ b/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxwin.h
@@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ DECLARE_INTERFACE_(IHXSiteWindowless, IUnknown)
 				HXxEvent* /*IN*/ pEvent) PURE;
 
     /*
-     * IHXSiteWindowless method. Returns some tqparent window that
+     * IHXSiteWindowless method. Returns some parent window that
      * owns the windowless site. Useful for right-click menus and
      * dialog box calls.
      */
diff --git a/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxwintyp.h b/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxwintyp.h
index 72bdf788..4316cc2f 100644
--- a/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxwintyp.h
+++ b/amarok/src/engine/helix/helix-sp/helix-include/common/include/hxwintyp.h
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ inline void HXxRect_Intersection( const HXxRect& r1, const HXxRect& r2, HXxRect*
  *  Purpose:
  *
  *	Cross Platform definition of a window. This struct is sufficiently
- *	wide to describe tqparent or child windows in Windows, MacOS, and
+ *	wide to describe parent or child windows in Windows, MacOS, and
  *	various flavors of X-Windows.
  *
  *  Data Members:
diff --git a/amarok/src/engine/helix/hxplayercontrol.cpp b/amarok/src/engine/helix/hxplayercontrol.cpp
index fd1b2e4c..fabc8a0d 100644
--- a/amarok/src/engine/helix/hxplayercontrol.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/engine/helix/hxplayercontrol.cpp
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ void HSPPlayerControlled::onBuffering(int percentage)
 }
 
 
-PlayerControl::PlayerControl() : m_eq_enabled(false), m_preamp(0), m_err(0), iamtqparent(0), m_index(0), nNumPlayers(0),
+PlayerControl::PlayerControl() : m_eq_enabled(false), m_preamp(0), m_err(0), iamparent(0), m_index(0), nNumPlayers(0),
                                  m_inited(false), m_api( HelixSimplePlayer::OSS ), m_device(0), mimehead(0), mimelistlen(0),
                                  m_numPlugins(0), m_pluginInfo(0)
 {
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ PlayerControl::~PlayerControl()
 void PlayerControl::init(const char *corelibpath, const char *pluginslibpath, const char *codecspath, int numPlayers)
 {
    int err;
-   iamtqparent = 0;
+   iamparent = 0;
    nNumPlayers = numPlayers;
    m_err = 0;
 
@@ -136,14 +136,14 @@ void PlayerControl::init(const char *corelibpath, const char *pluginslibpath, co
       }
       err = pipe(m_tqchildren[i].m_pipeA);
       err |= pipe(m_tqchildren[i].m_pipeB);
-      if ( !err && (iamtqparent = fork()) )
+      if ( !err && (iamparent = fork()) )
       {
-         // tqparent
-         print2stderr("%%%%%% tqparent initializes player %d\n", i);
+         // parent
+         print2stderr("%%%%%% parent initializes player %d\n", i);
 
-         // tqparent's m_pid remains 0
-         m_tqchildren[i].m_pid = iamtqparent;
-         close(m_tqchildren[i].m_pipeA[1]); // tqparent uses A for reading
+         // parent's m_pid remains 0
+         m_tqchildren[i].m_pid = iamparent;
+         close(m_tqchildren[i].m_pipeA[1]); // parent uses A for reading
          close(m_tqchildren[i].m_pipeB[0]); // and B for writing
       }
       else if (!err)
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ void PlayerControl::init(const char *corelibpath, const char *pluginslibpath, co
    }
 
 
-   if (!iamtqparent) // tqchildren stay here, parents return
+   if (!iamparent) // tqchildren stay here, parents return
    {
       int rfd = m_tqchildren[m_index].m_pipeB[0];
       int wfd = m_tqchildren[m_index].m_pipeA[1];
@@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ void PlayerControl::init(const char *corelibpath, const char *pluginslibpath, co
                         cerr << "CHILD " << m_index << " sz not right in TEARDOWN, sz=" << sz << endl;
                      break;
 
-                  default: // send an error to the tqparent
+                  default: // send an error to the parent
                         cerr << "CHILD " << m_index << " received unhandled message, sz=" << sz << endl;
                      break;
                }
@@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ int PlayerControl::initDirectSS()
 void PlayerControl::tearDown()
 {
    int tmp;
-   if (iamtqparent)
+   if (iamparent)
    {
       for (int i = 0; i < nNumPlayers; i++)
       {
diff --git a/amarok/src/engine/helix/hxplayercontrol.h b/amarok/src/engine/helix/hxplayercontrol.h
index 3ffefe90..37b0a121 100644
--- a/amarok/src/engine/helix/hxplayercontrol.h
+++ b/amarok/src/engine/helix/hxplayercontrol.h
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ protected:
 
 private:
    int   m_err;
-   pid_t iamtqparent;
+   pid_t iamparent;
    int   m_index; 
    int   nNumPlayers;
    bool  m_inited;
diff --git a/amarok/src/engine/nmm/HostList.cpp b/amarok/src/engine/nmm/HostList.cpp
index 7225548e..e6213643 100644
--- a/amarok/src/engine/nmm/HostList.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/engine/nmm/HostList.cpp
@@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
 #include "debug.h"
 #include "HostListItem.h"
 
-HostList::HostList( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) 
-  : KListView( tqparent, name ),
+HostList::HostList( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) 
+  : KListView( parent, name ),
     m_read_only( false ),
     m_hoveredVolume(0)
 {
diff --git a/amarok/src/engine/nmm/HostListItem.cpp b/amarok/src/engine/nmm/HostListItem.cpp
index dbf72003..cb8e61f0 100644
--- a/amarok/src/engine/nmm/HostListItem.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/engine/nmm/HostListItem.cpp
@@ -41,8 +41,8 @@
 #include "HostList.h"
 #include "nmm_engine.h"
 
-HostListItem::HostListItem( TQListView *tqparent, TQString hostname, bool audio, bool video, int volume, int status, bool read_only )
-    : KListViewItem( tqparent ),
+HostListItem::HostListItem( TQListView *parent, TQString hostname, bool audio, bool video, int volume, int status, bool read_only )
+    : KListViewItem( parent ),
     m_audio( audio ),
     m_video( video ),
     m_volume( volume ),
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ TQPixmap HostListItem::generateGradient( int type )
     temp = TQPixmap( locate( "data", "amarok/images/nmm-gradient-right.png" ) );
   else // PixLeft
     temp = TQPixmap( locate( "data", "amarok/images/nmm-gradient-left.png" ) );
-  const TQBitmap tqmask( temp.createHeuristicMask() );
+  const TQBitmap mask( temp.createHeuristicMask() );
 
   KPixmap result = TQPixmap( 113, 24 );
   if( type == PixRight)
@@ -261,6 +261,6 @@ TQPixmap HostListItem::generateGradient( int type )
   else
     KPixmapEffect::gradient( result, listView()->tqcolorGroup().highlight(), listView()->tqcolorGroup().background(), KPixmapEffect::HorizontalGradient );
 
-  result.setMask( tqmask);
+  result.setMask( mask);
   return result;
 }
diff --git a/amarok/src/engine/yauap/yauap-engine.h b/amarok/src/engine/yauap/yauap-engine.h
index 2562cf5d..6f42cc9f 100644
--- a/amarok/src/engine/yauap/yauap-engine.h
+++ b/amarok/src/engine/yauap/yauap-engine.h
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ public:
 class yauapProcess : public Amarok::Process
 {
 public:
-    yauapProcess(TQObject* tqparent) : Amarok::Process(tqparent) {}
+    yauapProcess(TQObject* parent) : Amarok::Process(parent) {}
 
     virtual int commSetupDoneC();
 };
diff --git a/amarok/src/equalizergraph.cpp b/amarok/src/equalizergraph.cpp
index b8207eaa..7f4d2951 100644
--- a/amarok/src/equalizergraph.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/equalizergraph.cpp
@@ -25,8 +25,8 @@
 
 #include <kapplication.h>
 
-EqualizerGraph::EqualizerGraph( TQWidget* tqparent )
-    : TQWidget( tqparent, 0, TQt::WNoAutoErase )
+EqualizerGraph::EqualizerGraph( TQWidget* parent )
+    : TQWidget( parent, 0, TQt::WNoAutoErase )
     , m_backgroundPixmap( new TQPixmap() )
     , m_composePixmap( new TQPixmap() )
 {
diff --git a/amarok/src/equalizergraph.h b/amarok/src/equalizergraph.h
index 7014e3c4..de9cea6c 100644
--- a/amarok/src/equalizergraph.h
+++ b/amarok/src/equalizergraph.h
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ class TQPixmap;
 class EqualizerGraph : public TQWidget
 {
     public:
-        EqualizerGraph( TQWidget* tqparent );
+        EqualizerGraph( TQWidget* parent );
         ~EqualizerGraph();
         TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/equalizerpresetmanager.cpp b/amarok/src/equalizerpresetmanager.cpp
index 80179c66..02e9a8d4 100644
--- a/amarok/src/equalizerpresetmanager.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/equalizerpresetmanager.cpp
@@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
 #include <kmessagebox.h>
 #include <kstandarddirs.h> //locate()
 
-EqualizerPresetManager::EqualizerPresetManager( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
-        : KDialogBase( tqparent, name, true, i18n("Presets"), Ok | Cancel | Default, Ok, true )
+EqualizerPresetManager::EqualizerPresetManager( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+        : KDialogBase( parent, name, true, i18n("Presets"), Ok | Cancel | Default, Ok, true )
 {
     TQWidget *mainWidget = new TQWidget( this );
     setMainWidget( mainWidget );
diff --git a/amarok/src/equalizerpresetmanager.h b/amarok/src/equalizerpresetmanager.h
index 716be81b..1da346f7 100644
--- a/amarok/src/equalizerpresetmanager.h
+++ b/amarok/src/equalizerpresetmanager.h
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ class EqualizerPresetManager : public KDialogBase
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        EqualizerPresetManager( TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+        EqualizerPresetManager( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
         virtual ~EqualizerPresetManager();
 
         void setPresets(TQMap< TQString, TQValueList<int> > presets);
diff --git a/amarok/src/filebrowser.cpp b/amarok/src/filebrowser.cpp
index 9db38420..31ebb7d3 100644
--- a/amarok/src/filebrowser.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/filebrowser.cpp
@@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ FileBrowser::selectAll()
 class KURLView : public KListView
 {
 public:
-    KURLView( TQWidget *tqparent ) : KListView( tqparent )
+    KURLView( TQWidget *parent ) : KListView( parent )
     {
         reinterpret_cast<TQWidget*>(header())->hide();
         addColumn( TQString() );
@@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ public:
 
     class Item : public KListViewItem {
     public:
-        Item( const KURL &url, KURLView *tqparent ) : KListViewItem( tqparent, url.fileName() ), m_url( url ) {}
+        Item( const KURL &url, KURLView *parent ) : KListViewItem( parent, url.fileName() ), m_url( url ) {}
         KURL m_url;
     };
 
@@ -595,8 +595,8 @@ private:
 
 
 
-SearchPane::SearchPane( FileBrowser *tqparent )
-        : TQVBox( tqparent )
+SearchPane::SearchPane( FileBrowser *parent )
+        : TQVBox( parent )
         , m_lineEdit( 0 )
         , m_listView( 0 )
         , m_lister( 0 )
diff --git a/amarok/src/filebrowser.h b/amarok/src/filebrowser.h
index bd539e8a..94eb8083 100644
--- a/amarok/src/filebrowser.h
+++ b/amarok/src/filebrowser.h
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ class SearchPane : public TQVBox
   TQ_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    SearchPane( FileBrowser *tqparent );
+    SearchPane( FileBrowser *parent );
 
 private slots:
     void toggle( bool );
diff --git a/amarok/src/hintlineedit.cpp b/amarok/src/hintlineedit.cpp
index a5591b3b..a934218c 100644
--- a/amarok/src/hintlineedit.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/hintlineedit.cpp
@@ -3,24 +3,24 @@
 #include <tqlabel.h>
 #include <tqfont.h>
 
-HintLineEdit::HintLineEdit( const TQString &hint, const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
+HintLineEdit::HintLineEdit( const TQString &hint, const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
    : KLineEdit( text, 0, name )
-   , m_vbox( new TQVBox( tqparent ) )
+   , m_vbox( new TQVBox( parent ) )
 {
     init();
     m_hint->setText( hint );
 }
 
-HintLineEdit::HintLineEdit( const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
+HintLineEdit::HintLineEdit( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
    : KLineEdit( text, 0, name )
-   , m_vbox( new TQVBox( tqparent ) )
+   , m_vbox( new TQVBox( parent ) )
 {
     init();
 }
 
-HintLineEdit::HintLineEdit( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
+HintLineEdit::HintLineEdit( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
    : KLineEdit( 0, name )
-   , m_vbox( new TQVBox( tqparent ) )
+   , m_vbox( new TQVBox( parent ) )
 {
     init();
 }
@@ -50,9 +50,9 @@ HintLineEdit::setHint( const TQString &hint )
 }
 
 TQObject *
-HintLineEdit::tqparent()
+HintLineEdit::parent()
 {
-    return m_vbox->tqparent();
+    return m_vbox->parent();
 }
 
 #include "hintlineedit.moc"
diff --git a/amarok/src/hintlineedit.h b/amarok/src/hintlineedit.h
index fb3a0e65..ba21b6a2 100644
--- a/amarok/src/hintlineedit.h
+++ b/amarok/src/hintlineedit.h
@@ -13,11 +13,11 @@ class HintLineEdit : public KLineEdit
   TQ_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    HintLineEdit( const TQString &hint, const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
-    HintLineEdit( const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
-    HintLineEdit( TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+    HintLineEdit( const TQString &hint, const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+    HintLineEdit( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+    HintLineEdit( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
     virtual ~HintLineEdit();
-    virtual TQObject *tqparent();
+    virtual TQObject *parent();
     virtual void setHint( const TQString &hint );
 private:
     void init();
diff --git a/amarok/src/inotify/inotify-syscalls.h b/amarok/src/inotify/inotify-syscalls.h
index a8d06a33..1431d467 100644
--- a/amarok/src/inotify/inotify-syscalls.h
+++ b/amarok/src/inotify/inotify-syscalls.h
@@ -48,9 +48,9 @@ static inline int inotify_init (void)
 	return syscall (__NR_inotify_init);
 }
 
-static inline int inotify_add_watch (int fd, const char *name, __u32 tqmask)
+static inline int inotify_add_watch (int fd, const char *name, __u32 mask)
 {
-	return syscall (__NR_inotify_add_watch, fd, name, tqmask);
+	return syscall (__NR_inotify_add_watch, fd, name, mask);
 }
 
 static inline int inotify_rm_watch (int fd, __u32 wd)
diff --git a/amarok/src/inotify/inotify.h b/amarok/src/inotify/inotify.h
index 4c06aa13..7e0eb32b 100644
--- a/amarok/src/inotify/inotify.h
+++ b/amarok/src/inotify/inotify.h
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
  */
 struct inotify_event {
 	__s32		wd;		/* watch descriptor */
-	__u32		tqmask;		/* watch tqmask */
+	__u32		mask;		/* watch mask */
 	__u32		cookie;		/* cookie to synchronize two events */
 	__u32		len;		/* length (including nulls) of name */
 	char		name[0];	/* stub for possible name */
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ struct inotify_event {
 /* special flags */
 #define IN_ONLYDIR		0x01000000	/* only watch the path if it is a directory */
 #define IN_DONT_FOLLOW		0x02000000	/* don't follow a sym link */
-#define IN_MASK_ADD		0x20000000	/* add to the tqmask of an already existing watch */
+#define IN_MASK_ADD		0x20000000	/* add to the mask of an already existing watch */
 #define IN_ISDIR		0x40000000	/* event occurred against dir */
 #define IN_ONESHOT		0x80000000	/* only send event once */
 
@@ -82,13 +82,13 @@ extern u32 inotify_get_cookie(void);
 #else
 
 static inline void inotify_inode_queue_event(struct inode *inode,
-					     __u32 tqmask, __u32 cookie,
+					     __u32 mask, __u32 cookie,
 					     const char *filename)
 {
 }
 
 static inline void inotify_dentry_parent_queue_event(struct dentry *dentry,
-						     __u32 tqmask, __u32 cookie,
+						     __u32 mask, __u32 cookie,
 						     const char *filename)
 {
 }
diff --git a/amarok/src/kbookmarkhandler.cpp b/amarok/src/kbookmarkhandler.cpp
index b6fa3ffb..0e5a74e4 100644
--- a/amarok/src/kbookmarkhandler.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/kbookmarkhandler.cpp
@@ -26,8 +26,8 @@
 #include <kdiroperator.h>
 #include <kstandarddirs.h>
 
-KBookmarkHandler::KBookmarkHandler( KDirOperator *tqparent, KPopupMenu* rootmenu )
-        : TQObject( tqparent, "KBookmarkHandler" )
+KBookmarkHandler::KBookmarkHandler( KDirOperator *parent, KPopupMenu* rootmenu )
+        : TQObject( parent, "KBookmarkHandler" )
         , KBookmarkOwner()
 {
     const TQString file = Amarok::saveLocation() + "fileBrowserBookmarks.xml";
@@ -42,11 +42,11 @@ KBookmarkHandler::KBookmarkHandler( KDirOperator *tqparent, KPopupMenu* rootmenu
 TQString
 KBookmarkHandler::currentURL() const
 {
-    return static_cast<KDirOperator*>(TQT_TQWIDGET(tqparent()))->url().url();
+    return static_cast<KDirOperator*>(TQT_TQWIDGET(parent()))->url().url();
 }
 
 void
 KBookmarkHandler::openBookmarkURL( const TQString &url )
 {
-    static_cast<KDirOperator*>(TQT_TQWIDGET(tqparent()))->setURL( KURL(url), true );
+    static_cast<KDirOperator*>(TQT_TQWIDGET(parent()))->setURL( KURL(url), true );
 }
diff --git a/amarok/src/kbookmarkhandler.h b/amarok/src/kbookmarkhandler.h
index 4a5d3fa6..86a44eff 100644
--- a/amarok/src/kbookmarkhandler.h
+++ b/amarok/src/kbookmarkhandler.h
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ class KPopupMenu;
 class KBookmarkHandler : public TQObject, public KBookmarkOwner
 {
 public:
-    KBookmarkHandler( KDirOperator *tqparent, KPopupMenu* );
+    KBookmarkHandler( KDirOperator *parent, KPopupMenu* );
 
     /// KBookmarkOwner interface:
     virtual void openBookmarkURL( const TQString &url );
diff --git a/amarok/src/konquisidebar/universalamarok.cpp b/amarok/src/konquisidebar/universalamarok.cpp
index aa5b775f..72ab2f74 100644
--- a/amarok/src/konquisidebar/universalamarok.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/konquisidebar/universalamarok.cpp
@@ -46,8 +46,8 @@
 
 #define HTML_FILE KGlobal::dirs()->saveLocation( "data", "amarok/", true ) + "contextbrowser.html"
 
-amarokWidget::amarokWidget( TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name, WFlags f )
-                 : TQVBox(tqparent, name, f)
+amarokWidget::amarokWidget( TQWidget * parent, const char * name, WFlags f )
+                 : TQVBox(parent, name, f)
 {
     setAcceptDrops(true);
 }
@@ -76,8 +76,8 @@ bool amarokWidget::eventFilter( TQObject *, TQEvent *e )
     return true;
 }
 
-UniversalAmarok::UniversalAmarok(KInstance *inst,TQObject *tqparent,TQWidget *widgetParent, TQString &desktopName, const char* name):
-                   KonqSidebarPlugin(inst,tqparent,widgetParent,desktopName,name)
+UniversalAmarok::UniversalAmarok(KInstance *inst,TQObject *parent,TQWidget *widgetParent, TQString &desktopName, const char* name):
+                   KonqSidebarPlugin(inst,parent,widgetParent,desktopName,name)
 {
     KGlobal::iconLoader()->addAppDir( "amarok" );
     widget = new amarokWidget( widgetParent );
diff --git a/amarok/src/konquisidebar/universalamarok.h b/amarok/src/konquisidebar/universalamarok.h
index ed20ca73..f033101d 100644
--- a/amarok/src/konquisidebar/universalamarok.h
+++ b/amarok/src/konquisidebar/universalamarok.h
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ class amarokWidget : public TQVBox
 Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
 public:
-    amarokWidget( TQWidget * tqparent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 );
+    amarokWidget( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 );
 
 protected:
     virtual void dragEnterEvent ( TQDragEnterEvent * );
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ class UniversalAmarok : public KonqSidebarPlugin
 Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
 public:
-    UniversalAmarok(KInstance *inst,TQObject *tqparent,TQWidget *widgetParent, TQString &desktopName, const char* name=0);
+    UniversalAmarok(KInstance *inst,TQObject *parent,TQWidget *widgetParent, TQString &desktopName, const char* name=0);
 
     ~UniversalAmarok();
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/lastfm.cpp b/amarok/src/lastfm.cpp
index 27d46f6d..9fb03845 100644
--- a/amarok/src/lastfm.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/lastfm.cpp
@@ -51,8 +51,8 @@ using namespace LastFm;
 // DO NOT use this class for anything else, use KIO directly instead.
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 AmarokHttp::AmarokHttp ( const TQString& hostname, TQ_UINT16 port,
-                         TQObject* tqparent )
-    : TQObject( tqparent ),
+                         TQObject* parent )
+    : TQObject( parent ),
       m_hostname( hostname ),
       m_port( port )
 {}
@@ -382,8 +382,8 @@ Controller::stationDescription( TQString url )
 // CLASS WebService
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-WebService::WebService( TQObject* tqparent, bool useProxy )
-    : TQObject( tqparent, "lastfmParent" )
+WebService::WebService( TQObject* parent, bool useProxy )
+    : TQObject( parent, "lastfmParent" )
     , m_useProxy( useProxy )
     , m_deletionUnsafe( false )
     , m_wasCanceled( false )
@@ -1093,8 +1093,8 @@ void Bundle::detach() {
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 // CLASS LastFm::LoginDialog
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-LoginDialog::LoginDialog( TQWidget *tqparent )
-    : KDialogBase( tqparent, "LastfmLogin", true, TQString(), Ok|Cancel)
+LoginDialog::LoginDialog( TQWidget *parent )
+    : KDialogBase( parent, "LastfmLogin", true, TQString(), Ok|Cancel)
 {
     makeGridMainWidget( 1, Qt::Horizontal );
     new TQLabel( i18n( "To use last.fm with Amarok, you need a last.fm profile." ), mainWidget() );
@@ -1125,8 +1125,8 @@ void LoginDialog::slotOk()
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 // CLASS LastFm::CustomStationDialog
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-CustomStationDialog::CustomStationDialog( TQWidget *tqparent )
-    : KDialogBase( tqparent, "LastfmCustomStation", true, i18n( "Create Custom Station" ) , Ok|Cancel)
+CustomStationDialog::CustomStationDialog( TQWidget *parent )
+    : KDialogBase( parent, "LastfmCustomStation", true, i18n( "Create Custom Station" ) , Ok|Cancel)
 {
     makeVBoxMainWidget();
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/lastfm.h b/amarok/src/lastfm.h
index b5e01349..c3826889 100644
--- a/amarok/src/lastfm.h
+++ b/amarok/src/lastfm.h
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ class AmarokHttp : public TQObject
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-    AmarokHttp ( const TQString & hostname, TQ_UINT16 port = 80, TQObject* tqparent = 0 );
+    AmarokHttp ( const TQString & hostname, TQ_UINT16 port = 80, TQObject* parent = 0 );
     int get ( const TQString & path );
     TQHttp::State state() const;
     TQByteArray readAll ();
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ namespace LastFm
         public:
             enum DataType { Artist, Album, Track };
 
-            WebService( TQObject* tqparent, bool useProxy );
+            WebService( TQObject* parent, bool useProxy );
             ~WebService();
 
             bool handshake( const TQString& username, const TQString& password );
@@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ namespace LastFm
   TQ_OBJECT
 
         public:
-            LoginDialog( TQWidget *tqparent );
+            LoginDialog( TQWidget *parent );
 
         protected slots:
             void slotOk();
@@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ namespace LastFm
   TQ_OBJECT
 
         public:
-            CustomStationDialog( TQWidget *tqparent );
+            CustomStationDialog( TQWidget *parent );
 
             TQString text() const;
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneartistinfobox.h b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneartistinfobox.h
index 1d9bc139..b0d1ed44 100644
--- a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneartistinfobox.h
+++ b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneartistinfobox.h
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ class MagnatuneArtistInfoBox : public KHTMLPart
 public:
     /**
      * Constructor
-     * @param parentWidget The tqparent TQWidget
+     * @param parentWidget The parent TQWidget
      * @param widgetname The name of this widget
      * @return New MagnatuneArtistInfoBox object
      */
diff --git a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunedownloaddialog.cpp b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunedownloaddialog.cpp
index f0fca6b5..6959139e 100644
--- a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunedownloaddialog.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunedownloaddialog.cpp
@@ -29,8 +29,8 @@ Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
 #include <tqtextedit.h>
 
 
-MagnatuneDownloadDialog::MagnatuneDownloadDialog( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, bool modal, WFlags fl )
-        : MagnatuneDownloadDialogBase( tqparent, name, modal, fl )
+MagnatuneDownloadDialog::MagnatuneDownloadDialog( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool modal, WFlags fl )
+        : MagnatuneDownloadDialogBase( parent, name, modal, fl )
 {
     downloadTargetURLRequester->fileDialog() ->setMode( KFile::Directory );
     m_currentDownloadInfo = 0;
diff --git a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunedownloaddialog.h b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunedownloaddialog.h
index c9a3de33..956a7f6c 100644
--- a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunedownloaddialog.h
+++ b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunedownloaddialog.h
@@ -39,12 +39,12 @@ class MagnatuneDownloadDialog : public MagnatuneDownloadDialogBase
 public:
     /**
      * Overridden constructor.
-     * @param tqparent Pointer to the tqparent TQWidget.
+     * @param parent Pointer to the parent TQWidget.
      * @param name Name of this widget.
      * @param modal Sets modal state.
      * @param fl Additional dialog flags.
      */
-    MagnatuneDownloadDialog( TQWidget* tqparent = 0, const char* name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags fl = 0 );
+    MagnatuneDownloadDialog( TQWidget* parent = 0, const char* name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags fl = 0 );
 
     /**
      * Destructor
diff --git a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistview.cpp b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistview.cpp
index 0ea7c53e..3ea8a167 100644
--- a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistview.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistview.cpp
@@ -26,8 +26,8 @@
 
 #include <tqcolor.h>
 
-MagnatuneListView::MagnatuneListView( TQWidget * tqparent )
-        : KListView( tqparent )
+MagnatuneListView::MagnatuneListView( TQWidget * parent )
+        : KListView( parent )
 {
 
     setRootIsDecorated( true );
diff --git a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistview.h b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistview.h
index b116fece..2a7f7391 100644
--- a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistview.h
+++ b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistview.h
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ A specialized KListView that provides drag and drop functionality
 class MagnatuneListView : public KListView
 {
 public:
-    MagnatuneListView(TQWidget * tqparent);
+    MagnatuneListView(TQWidget * parent);
 
     ~MagnatuneListView();
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistviewitems.cpp b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistviewitems.cpp
index 47450697..8ce1046c 100644
--- a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistviewitems.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistviewitems.cpp
@@ -29,8 +29,8 @@
 
 
 
-MagnatuneListViewArtistItem::MagnatuneListViewArtistItem( MagnatuneArtist artist, KListView * tqparent )
-: KListViewItem( tqparent ), MagnatuneArtist( artist )
+MagnatuneListViewArtistItem::MagnatuneListViewArtistItem( MagnatuneArtist artist, KListView * parent )
+: KListViewItem( parent ), MagnatuneArtist( artist )
 {
     KListViewItem::setText( 0, artist.getName() );
 
@@ -84,8 +84,8 @@ void MagnatuneListViewArtistItem::setup()
 
 
 
-MagnatuneListViewAlbumItem::MagnatuneListViewAlbumItem( MagnatuneAlbum album, KListViewItem * tqparent )
-: KListViewItem( tqparent ), MagnatuneAlbum( album )
+MagnatuneListViewAlbumItem::MagnatuneListViewAlbumItem( MagnatuneAlbum album, KListViewItem * parent )
+: KListViewItem( parent ), MagnatuneAlbum( album )
 {
     KListViewItem::setText( 0, album.getName() );
     setDragEnabled( true );
@@ -141,8 +141,8 @@ void MagnatuneListViewAlbumItem::setup( )
 
 
 
-MagnatuneListViewTrackItem::MagnatuneListViewTrackItem( MagnatuneTrack track, KListViewItem * tqparent )
-: KListViewItem( tqparent ), MagnatuneTrack( track )
+MagnatuneListViewTrackItem::MagnatuneListViewTrackItem( MagnatuneTrack track, KListViewItem * parent )
+: KListViewItem( parent ), MagnatuneTrack( track )
 {
     
     int trackNumber = track.getTrackNumber();
diff --git a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistviewitems.h b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistviewitems.h
index cc848cc4..573acb67 100644
--- a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistviewitems.h
+++ b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunelistviewitems.h
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ A specialized KListViewItem that encapsulates a MagnatuneArtist
 class MagnatuneListViewArtistItem : public KListViewItem, public MagnatuneArtist
 {
 public:
-    MagnatuneListViewArtistItem(MagnatuneArtist artist, KListView * tqparent);
+    MagnatuneListViewArtistItem(MagnatuneArtist artist, KListView * parent);
 
     ~MagnatuneListViewArtistItem();
 
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ class MagnatuneListViewAlbumItem : public KListViewItem, public MagnatuneAlbum
 {
 public:
 
-    MagnatuneListViewAlbumItem(MagnatuneAlbum album, KListViewItem * tqparent);
+    MagnatuneListViewAlbumItem(MagnatuneAlbum album, KListViewItem * parent);
     ~MagnatuneListViewAlbumItem();
 
     void setOpen( bool o );
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ class MagnatuneListViewTrackItem : public KListViewItem, public MagnatuneTrack
 {
 public:
 
-    MagnatuneListViewTrackItem(MagnatuneTrack track, KListViewItem * tqparent);
+    MagnatuneListViewTrackItem(MagnatuneTrack track, KListViewItem * parent);
     ~MagnatuneListViewTrackItem();
 
 };
diff --git a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasedialog.cpp b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasedialog.cpp
index 4ea1166b..aeaa6843 100644
--- a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasedialog.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasedialog.cpp
@@ -29,8 +29,8 @@
 #include <tqlabel.h>
 
 
-MagnatunePurchaseDialog::MagnatunePurchaseDialog( TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name, bool modal, WFlags fl )
-        : magnatunePurchaseDialogBase( tqparent, name, modal, fl )
+MagnatunePurchaseDialog::MagnatunePurchaseDialog( TQWidget* parent, const char* name, bool modal, WFlags fl )
+        : magnatunePurchaseDialogBase( parent, name, modal, fl )
 {}
 
 MagnatunePurchaseDialog::~MagnatunePurchaseDialog()
diff --git a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasedialog.h b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasedialog.h
index 085ca931..b8042b30 100644
--- a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasedialog.h
+++ b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasedialog.h
@@ -32,12 +32,12 @@ public:
 
     /**
      * Overridden constructor.
-     * @param tqparent Pointer to the tqparent TQWidget.
+     * @param parent Pointer to the parent TQWidget.
      * @param name Name of this widget.
      * @param modal Sets modal state.
      * @param fl Additional dialog flags.
      */
-    MagnatunePurchaseDialog( TQWidget* tqparent = 0, const char* name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags fl = 0 );
+    MagnatunePurchaseDialog( TQWidget* parent = 0, const char* name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags fl = 0 );
 
     /**
      * Destructor
diff --git a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasehandler.cpp b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasehandler.cpp
index 053c039c..fbfed0ba 100644
--- a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasehandler.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasehandler.cpp
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ void MagnatunePurchaseHandler::showPurchaseDialog(  TQString coverTempLocation )
 
     if ( m_purchaseDialog == 0 )
     {
-        m_purchaseDialog = new MagnatunePurchaseDialog( m_tqparent, "PurchaseDialog", true, 0 );
+        m_purchaseDialog = new MagnatunePurchaseDialog( m_parent, "PurchaseDialog", true, 0 );
 
         connect( m_purchaseDialog, TQT_SIGNAL( makePurchase( TQString, TQString, TQString, TQString, TQString, TQString, int ) ), this, TQT_SLOT( processPayment( TQString, TQString, TQString, TQString, TQString, TQString, int ) ) );
         connect ( m_purchaseDialog, TQT_SIGNAL( cancelled() ), this, TQT_SLOT( albumPurchaseCancelled() ) );
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ void MagnatunePurchaseHandler::xmlDownloadComplete( KIO::Job * downloadJob )
 
     if ( m_downloadDialog == 0 )
     {
-        m_downloadDialog = new MagnatuneDownloadDialog( m_tqparent, "downloaddialog", true, 0 );
+        m_downloadDialog = new MagnatuneDownloadDialog( m_parent, "downloaddialog", true, 0 );
         connect( m_downloadDialog, TQT_SIGNAL( downloadAlbum( MagnatuneDownloadInfo * ) ), m_albumDownloader, TQT_SLOT( downloadAlbum( MagnatuneDownloadInfo * ) ) );
 
     }
@@ -171,16 +171,16 @@ void MagnatunePurchaseHandler::xmlDownloadComplete( KIO::Job * downloadJob )
     else
     {
 
-        TQMessageBox::information( m_tqparent, "Could not process payment",
+        TQMessageBox::information( m_parent, "Could not process payment",
                                   "There seems to be an error in the information entered (check the credit card number), please try again\n" );
         m_purchaseDialog->setEnabled( true );
     }
 }
 
 
-void MagnatunePurchaseHandler::setParent( TQWidget * tqparent )
+void MagnatunePurchaseHandler::setParent( TQWidget * parent )
 {
-    m_tqparent = tqparent;
+    m_parent = parent;
 
 }
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasehandler.h b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasehandler.h
index a9a5e538..4bae3105 100644
--- a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasehandler.h
+++ b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatunepurchasehandler.h
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ public:
     MagnatunePurchaseHandler();
     ~MagnatunePurchaseHandler();
     
-   void setParent( TQWidget * tqparent );
+   void setParent( TQWidget * parent );
    /**
     * Starts a purchase operation
     * @param album The album to purchase
@@ -58,8 +58,8 @@ private:
     KIO::TransferJob * m_resultDownloadJob;
 
 
-    //need a tqparent to pass to any dialogs we spawn
-    TQWidget * m_tqparent;
+    //need a parent to pass to any dialogs we spawn
+    TQWidget * m_parent;
     MagnatunePurchaseDialog * m_purchaseDialog;
     MagnatuneDownloadDialog * m_downloadDialog;
     MagnatuneAlbumDownloader * m_albumDownloader;
diff --git a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloaddialog.cpp b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloaddialog.cpp
index 0e3c26b3..5d7c1417 100644
--- a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloaddialog.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloaddialog.cpp
@@ -23,8 +23,8 @@
 #include <tqpushbutton.h>
 #include <klistview.h>
 
-MagnatuneRedownloadDialog::MagnatuneRedownloadDialog(TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name, bool modal, WFlags fl)
-: magnatuneReDownloadDialogBase(tqparent,name, modal,fl)
+MagnatuneRedownloadDialog::MagnatuneRedownloadDialog(TQWidget* parent, const char* name, bool modal, WFlags fl)
+: magnatuneReDownloadDialogBase(parent,name, modal,fl)
 {
     redownloadButton->setEnabled ( false );
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloaddialog.h b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloaddialog.h
index e7b5fc2a..ad4fd651 100644
--- a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloaddialog.h
+++ b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloaddialog.h
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ class MagnatuneRedownloadDialog : public magnatuneReDownloadDialogBase
   TQ_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    MagnatuneRedownloadDialog( TQWidget* tqparent = 0, const char* name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags fl = 0 );
+    MagnatuneRedownloadDialog( TQWidget* parent = 0, const char* name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags fl = 0 );
     ~MagnatuneRedownloadDialog();
     /*$PUBLIC_FUNCTIONS$*/
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloadhandler.cpp b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloadhandler.cpp
index 643dab5d..72e19ed4 100644
--- a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloadhandler.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloadhandler.cpp
@@ -30,9 +30,9 @@
 
 
 
-MagnatuneRedownloadHandler::MagnatuneRedownloadHandler(TQWidget * tqparent)
+MagnatuneRedownloadHandler::MagnatuneRedownloadHandler(TQWidget * parent)
 {
-    m_tqparent = tqparent;
+    m_parent = parent;
     m_redownloadDialog = 0;
     m_downloadDialog = 0;
     m_albumDownloader = 0;
@@ -51,13 +51,13 @@ void MagnatuneRedownloadHandler::showRedownloadDialog( )
     if (previousDownloads.isEmpty()) {
 
         //No previously purchased track information found. No more to do here...
-        TQMessageBox::information( m_tqparent, i18n( "No purchases found!" ) ,
+        TQMessageBox::information( m_parent, i18n( "No purchases found!" ) ,
                                   i18n( "No previous purchases have been found. Nothing to redownload..." ) + "\n" );
         return;
     }
 
     if (m_redownloadDialog == 0) {
-        m_redownloadDialog = new MagnatuneRedownloadDialog( m_tqparent );
+        m_redownloadDialog = new MagnatuneRedownloadDialog( m_parent );
         connect( m_redownloadDialog, TQT_SIGNAL( redownload( TQString) ), this, TQT_SLOT( redownload( TQString ) ) );
         connect( m_redownloadDialog, TQT_SIGNAL(cancelled() ), this, TQT_SLOT( selectionDialogCancelled() ));
     }
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ void MagnatuneRedownloadHandler::redownload( TQString storedInfoFileName )
 
 
     if (m_downloadDialog == 0) {
-        m_downloadDialog = new MagnatuneDownloadDialog(m_tqparent);
+        m_downloadDialog = new MagnatuneDownloadDialog(m_parent);
          connect( m_downloadDialog, TQT_SIGNAL( downloadAlbum( MagnatuneDownloadInfo *  ) ), m_albumDownloader, TQT_SLOT( downloadAlbum( MagnatuneDownloadInfo * ) ) );
     }
 
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ void MagnatuneRedownloadHandler::redownload( TQString storedInfoFileName )
     else
     {
 
-        TQMessageBox::information( m_tqparent, i18n( "Could not re-download album" ),
+        TQMessageBox::information( m_parent, i18n( "Could not re-download album" ),
                                   i18n( "There seems to be a problem with the selected redownload info file." ) + "\n" );
 
     }
diff --git a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloadhandler.h b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloadhandler.h
index f41e291a..b09ec64b 100644
--- a/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloadhandler.h
+++ b/amarok/src/magnatunebrowser/magnatuneredownloadhandler.h
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ class MagnatuneRedownloadHandler : public TQObject {
 Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
 public:
-    MagnatuneRedownloadHandler(TQWidget * tqparent);
+    MagnatuneRedownloadHandler(TQWidget * parent);
 
     ~MagnatuneRedownloadHandler();
 
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ signals:
 
 protected:
 
-    TQWidget * m_tqparent;
+    TQWidget * m_parent;
     TQStringList GetPurchaseList( );
     MagnatuneRedownloadDialog * m_redownloadDialog;
     MagnatuneDownloadDialog * m_downloadDialog;
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediabrowser.cpp b/amarok/src/mediabrowser.cpp
index ced592d1..967ace1f 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediabrowser.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/mediabrowser.cpp
@@ -112,8 +112,8 @@ bool MediaBrowser::isAvailable() //static
 
 class SpaceLabel : public TQLabel {
     public:
-    SpaceLabel(TQWidget *tqparent)
-        : TQLabel(tqparent)
+    SpaceLabel(TQWidget *parent)
+        : TQLabel(parent)
     {
         m_total = m_used = m_scheduled = 0;
         setBackgroundMode(TQt::NoBackground);
@@ -789,26 +789,26 @@ MediaBrowser::~MediaBrowser()
 }
 
 
-MediaItem::MediaItem( TQListView* tqparent )
-: KListViewItem( tqparent )
+MediaItem::MediaItem( TQListView* parent )
+: KListViewItem( parent )
 {
     init();
 }
 
-MediaItem::MediaItem( TQListViewItem* tqparent )
-: KListViewItem( tqparent )
+MediaItem::MediaItem( TQListViewItem* parent )
+: KListViewItem( parent )
 {
     init();
 }
 
-MediaItem::MediaItem( TQListView* tqparent, TQListViewItem* after )
-: KListViewItem( tqparent, after )
+MediaItem::MediaItem( TQListView* parent, TQListViewItem* after )
+: KListViewItem( parent, after )
 {
     init();
 }
 
-MediaItem::MediaItem( TQListViewItem* tqparent, TQListViewItem* after )
-: KListViewItem( tqparent, after )
+MediaItem::MediaItem( TQListViewItem* parent, TQListViewItem* after )
+: KListViewItem( parent, after )
 {
     init();
 }
@@ -1171,9 +1171,9 @@ class MediaItemTip : public TQToolTip
 };
 
 
-MediaView::MediaView( TQWidget* tqparent, MediaDevice *device )
-    : KListView( tqparent )
-    , m_tqparent( tqparent )
+MediaView::MediaView( TQWidget* parent, MediaDevice *device )
+    : KListView( parent )
+    , m_parent( parent )
     , m_device( device )
 {
     hide();
@@ -1317,17 +1317,17 @@ MediaView::nodeBuildDragList( MediaItem* item, int flags )
 }
 
 int
-MediaView::getSelectedLeaves( MediaItem *tqparent, TQPtrList<MediaItem> *list, int flags )
+MediaView::getSelectedLeaves( MediaItem *parent, TQPtrList<MediaItem> *list, int flags )
 {
     int numFiles = 0;
     if( !list )
         list = new TQPtrList<MediaItem>;
 
     MediaItem *it;
-    if( !tqparent )
+    if( !parent )
         it = dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(firstChild());
     else
-        it = dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(tqparent->firstChild());
+        it = dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(parent->firstChild());
 
     for( ; it; it = dynamic_cast<MediaItem*>(it->nextSibling()))
     {
@@ -1419,9 +1419,9 @@ MediaView::contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e )
         }
         else if( item->type() == MediaItem::PLAYLISTITEM )
         {
-            MediaItem *list = dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(item->tqparent());
+            MediaItem *list = dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(item->parent());
             MediaItem *after = 0;
-            for(MediaItem *it = dynamic_cast<MediaItem*>(item->tqparent()->firstChild());
+            for(MediaItem *it = dynamic_cast<MediaItem*>(item->parent()->firstChild());
                     it;
                     it = dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(it->nextSibling()))
             {
@@ -1513,14 +1513,14 @@ MediaView::rmbPressed( TQListViewItem *item, const TQPoint &p, int i )
 }
 
 MediaItem *
-MediaView::newDirectory( MediaItem *tqparent )
+MediaView::newDirectory( MediaItem *parent )
 {
     bool ok;
     const TQString name = KInputDialog::getText(i18n("Add Directory"), i18n("Directory Name:"), TQString(), &ok, this);
 
     if( ok && !name.isEmpty() )
     {
-        m_device->newDirectory( name, tqparent );
+        m_device->newDirectory( name, parent );
     }
 
     return 0;
@@ -1864,7 +1864,7 @@ MediaBrowser::updateStats()
 
 
 bool
-MediaView::setFilter( const TQString &filter, MediaItem *tqparent )
+MediaView::setFilter( const TQString &filter, MediaItem *parent )
 {
     bool advanced = ExpressionParser::isAdvancedExpression( filter );
     TQValueList<int> defaultColumns;
@@ -1874,14 +1874,14 @@ MediaView::setFilter( const TQString &filter, MediaItem *tqparent )
 
     bool root = false;
     MediaItem *it;
-    if( !tqparent )
+    if( !parent )
     {
         root = true;
         it = dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(firstChild());
     }
     else
     {
-        it = dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(tqparent->firstChild());
+        it = dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(parent->firstChild());
     }
 
     bool tqchildrenVisible = false;
@@ -1947,7 +1947,7 @@ MediaDevice::MediaDevice()
     , m_transcodeAlways( false )
     , m_transcodeRemove( false )
     , sysProc ( 0 )
-    , m_tqparent( 0 )
+    , m_parent( 0 )
     , m_view( 0 )
     , m_wait( false )
     , m_requireMount( false )
@@ -1968,11 +1968,11 @@ MediaDevice::MediaDevice()
     sysProc = new KShellProcess(); Q_CHECK_PTR(sysProc);
 }
 
-void MediaDevice::init( MediaBrowser* tqparent )
+void MediaDevice::init( MediaBrowser* parent )
 {
-    m_tqparent = tqparent;
+    m_parent = parent;
     if( !m_view )
-        m_view = new MediaView( m_tqparent->m_views, this );
+        m_view = new MediaView( m_parent->m_views, this );
     m_view->hide();
 }
 
@@ -2057,7 +2057,7 @@ MediaDevice::view()
 void
 MediaDevice::hideProgress()
 {
-    m_tqparent->m_progressBox->hide();
+    m_parent->m_progressBox->hide();
 }
 
 void
@@ -2083,7 +2083,7 @@ MediaQueue::syncPlaylist( const TQString &name, const TQString &query, bool load
     item->m_playlistName = name;
     item->setText( 0, name );
     item->m_flags |= MediaItem::SmartPlaylist;
-    m_tqparent->m_progress->setTotalSteps( m_tqparent->m_progress->totalSteps() + 1 );
+    m_parent->m_progress->setTotalSteps( m_parent->m_progress->totalSteps() + 1 );
     itemCountChanged();
     if( !loading )
         URLsAdded();
@@ -2098,7 +2098,7 @@ MediaQueue::syncPlaylist( const TQString &name, const KURL &url, bool loading )
     item->setData( url.url() );
     item->m_playlistName = name;
     item->setText( 0, name );
-    m_tqparent->m_progress->setTotalSteps( m_tqparent->m_progress->totalSteps() + 1 );
+    m_parent->m_progress->setTotalSteps( m_parent->m_progress->totalSteps() + 1 );
     itemCountChanged();
     if( !loading )
         URLsAdded();
@@ -2323,8 +2323,8 @@ MediaQueue::addURL( const KURL& url2, MetaBundle *bundle, const TQString &playli
     }
     item->setText( 0, text);
 
-    m_tqparent->updateButtons();
-    m_tqparent->m_progress->setTotalSteps( m_tqparent->m_progress->totalSteps() + 1 );
+    m_parent->updateButtons();
+    m_parent->m_progress->setTotalSteps( m_parent->m_progress->totalSteps() + 1 );
     addItemToSize( item );
     itemCountChanged();
 }
@@ -2354,8 +2354,8 @@ MediaQueue::addURL( const KURL &url, MediaItem *item )
     }
     newitem->setText( 0, text);
     newitem->setBundle( bundle );
-    m_tqparent->updateButtons();
-    m_tqparent->m_progress->setTotalSteps( m_tqparent->m_progress->totalSteps() + 1 );
+    m_parent->updateButtons();
+    m_parent->m_progress->setTotalSteps( m_parent->m_progress->totalSteps() + 1 );
     addItemToSize( item );
     itemCountChanged();
 
@@ -2374,13 +2374,13 @@ MediaQueue::addURLs( const KURL::List urls, const TQString &playlistName )
 void
 MediaQueue::URLsAdded()
 {
-    m_tqparent->updateStats();
-    m_tqparent->updateButtons();
-    if( m_tqparent->currentDevice()
-            && m_tqparent->currentDevice()->isConnected()
-            && m_tqparent->currentDevice()->asynchronousTransfer()
-            && !m_tqparent->currentDevice()->isTransferring() )
-        m_tqparent->currentDevice()->transferFiles();
+    m_parent->updateStats();
+    m_parent->updateButtons();
+    if( m_parent->currentDevice()
+            && m_parent->currentDevice()->isConnected()
+            && m_parent->currentDevice()->asynchronousTransfer()
+            && !m_parent->currentDevice()->isTransferring() )
+        m_parent->currentDevice()->transferFiles();
 
     save( Amarok::saveLocation() + "transferlist.xml" );
 }
@@ -2662,8 +2662,8 @@ MediaDevice::connectDevice( bool silent )
     {
         MediaBrowser::instance()->activateDevice( this );
     }
-    m_tqparent->updateStats();
-    m_tqparent->updateButtons();
+    m_parent->updateStats();
+    m_parent->updateButtons();
 
     if( !isConnected() )
     {
@@ -2686,7 +2686,7 @@ MediaDevice::connectDevice( bool silent )
 
         if(numFiles > 0)
         {
-            m_tqparent->m_stats->setText( i18n( "1 track to be deleted", "%n tracks to be deleted", numFiles ) );
+            m_parent->m_stats->setText( i18n( "1 track to be deleted", "%n tracks to be deleted", numFiles ) );
 
             setProgress( 0, numFiles );
 
@@ -2708,9 +2708,9 @@ MediaDevice::connectDevice( bool silent )
 
             synchronizeDevice();
 
-            TQTimer::singleShot( 1500, m_tqparent->m_progressBox, TQT_SLOT(hide()) );
-            m_tqparent->queue()->computeSize();
-            m_tqparent->updateStats();
+            TQTimer::singleShot( 1500, m_parent->m_progressBox, TQT_SLOT(hide()) );
+            m_parent->queue()->computeSize();
+            m_parent->updateStats();
         }
     }
     unlockDevice();
@@ -2725,7 +2725,7 @@ MediaDevice::connectDevice( bool silent )
 
     Amarok::StatusBar::instance()->shortMessage( i18n( "Device successfully connected" ) );
 
-    m_tqparent->updateDevices();
+    m_parent->updateDevices();
 
     return true;
 }
@@ -2756,7 +2756,7 @@ MediaDevice::disconnectDevice( bool postDisconnectHook )
     closeDevice();
     unlockDevice();
 
-    m_tqparent->updateStats();
+    m_parent->updateStats();
 
     bool result = true;
     if( postDisconnectHook && runPostDisconnectCommand() != 0 )
@@ -2769,7 +2769,7 @@ MediaDevice::disconnectDevice( bool postDisconnectHook )
     else
         Amarok::StatusBar::instance()->shortMessage( i18n( "Device successfully disconnected" ) );
 
-    m_tqparent->updateDevices();
+    m_parent->updateDevices();
 
     return result;
 }
@@ -2790,7 +2790,7 @@ MediaDevice::syncStatsFromDevice( MediaItem *root )
         switch( it->type() )
         {
         case MediaItem::TRACK:
-            if( !it->tqparent() || static_cast<MediaItem *>( it->tqparent() )->type() != MediaItem::PLAYLIST )
+            if( !it->parent() || static_cast<MediaItem *>( it->parent() )->type() != MediaItem::PLAYLIST )
             {
                 const MetaBundle *bundle = it->bundle();
                 for( int i=0; i<it->recentlyPlayed(); i++ )
@@ -2830,7 +2830,7 @@ MediaDevice::syncStatsFromDevice( MediaItem *root )
             }
             break;
         case MediaItem::PODCASTITEM:
-            if( !it->tqparent() || static_cast<MediaItem *>( it->tqparent() )->type() != MediaItem::PLAYLIST )
+            if( !it->parent() || static_cast<MediaItem *>( it->parent() )->type() != MediaItem::PLAYLIST )
             {
                 const MetaBundle *bundle = it->bundle();
                 if( it->played() || it->recentlyPlayed() )
@@ -2840,11 +2840,11 @@ MediaDevice::syncStatsFromDevice( MediaItem *root )
                         debug() << "marking podcast episode as played: " << peb->url() << endl;
                         if( PlaylistBrowser::instance() )
                         {
-                            PodcastEpisode *p = PlaylistBrowser::instance()->findPodcastEpisode( peb->url(), peb->tqparent() );
+                            PodcastEpisode *p = PlaylistBrowser::instance()->findPodcastEpisode( peb->url(), peb->parent() );
                             if ( p )
                                 p->setListened();
                             else
-                                debug() << "did not find podcast episode: " << peb->url() << " from " << peb->tqparent() << endl;
+                                debug() << "did not find podcast episode: " << peb->url() << " from " << peb->parent() << endl;
                         }
                     }
                 }
@@ -2892,7 +2892,7 @@ MediaDevice::syncStatsToDevice( MediaItem *root )
         switch( it->type() )
         {
         case MediaItem::TRACK:
-            if( !it->tqparent() || static_cast<MediaItem *>( it->tqparent() )->type() != MediaItem::PLAYLIST )
+            if( !it->parent() || static_cast<MediaItem *>( it->parent() )->type() != MediaItem::PLAYLIST )
             {
                 const MetaBundle *bundle = it->bundle();
                 TQString url = CollectionDB::instance()->getURL( *bundle );
@@ -2901,14 +2901,14 @@ MediaDevice::syncStatsToDevice( MediaItem *root )
             break;
 
         case MediaItem::PODCASTITEM:
-            if( !it->tqparent() || static_cast<MediaItem *>( it->tqparent() )->type() != MediaItem::PLAYLIST )
+            if( !it->parent() || static_cast<MediaItem *>( it->parent() )->type() != MediaItem::PLAYLIST )
             {
                 const MetaBundle *bundle = it->bundle();
                 if( PodcastEpisodeBundle *peb = bundle->podcastBundle() )
                 {
                     if( PlaylistBrowser::instance() )
                     {
-                        PodcastEpisode *p = PlaylistBrowser::instance()->findPodcastEpisode( peb->url(), peb->tqparent() );
+                        PodcastEpisode *p = PlaylistBrowser::instance()->findPodcastEpisode( peb->url(), peb->parent() );
                         if( p )
                             it->setListened( !p->isNew() );
                     }
@@ -2934,16 +2934,16 @@ MediaDevice::transferFiles()
     setCanceled( false );
 
     m_transferring = true;
-    m_tqparent->m_toolbar->getButton(MediaBrowser::TRANSFER)->setEnabled( false );
+    m_parent->m_toolbar->getButton(MediaBrowser::TRANSFER)->setEnabled( false );
 
-    setProgress( 0, m_tqparent->m_queue->childCount() );
+    setProgress( 0, m_parent->m_queue->childCount() );
 
     // ok, let's copy the stuff to the device
 
     KURL::List existing, unplayable;
     unsigned transcodeFail = 0;
     // iterate through items
-    MediaItem *next = static_cast<MediaItem *>(m_tqparent->m_queue->firstChild());
+    MediaItem *next = static_cast<MediaItem *>(m_parent->m_queue->firstChild());
     while( next )
     {
         MediaItem *transferredItem = next;
@@ -2954,10 +2954,10 @@ MediaDevice::transferFiles()
         if( transferredItem->device() )
         {
             transferredItem->device()->copyTrackFromDevice( transferredItem );
-            m_tqparent->m_queue->subtractItemFromSize( transferredItem, true );
+            m_parent->m_queue->subtractItemFromSize( transferredItem, true );
             delete transferredItem;
             setProgress( progress() + 1 );
-            m_tqparent->m_queue->itemCountChanged();
+            m_parent->m_queue->itemCountChanged();
             kapp->tqprocessEvents( 100 );
             continue;
         }
@@ -2976,9 +2976,9 @@ MediaDevice::transferFiles()
         {
             // this should not happen
             debug() << "invalid item in transfer queue" << endl;
-            m_tqparent->m_queue->subtractItemFromSize( transferredItem, true );
+            m_parent->m_queue->subtractItemFromSize( transferredItem, true );
             delete transferredItem;
-            m_tqparent->m_queue->itemCountChanged();
+            m_parent->m_queue->itemCountChanged();
             continue;
         }
 
@@ -3120,17 +3120,17 @@ MediaDevice::transferFiles()
 
         if( isCanceled() )
         {
-            m_tqparent->updateStats();
+            m_parent->updateStats();
             break;
         }
 
         if( !(transferredItem->flags() & MediaItem::Failed) )
         {
-            m_tqparent->m_queue->subtractItemFromSize( transferredItem, true );
+            m_parent->m_queue->subtractItemFromSize( transferredItem, true );
             delete transferredItem;
-            m_tqparent->m_queue->itemCountChanged();
+            m_parent->m_queue->itemCountChanged();
         }
-        m_tqparent->updateStats();
+        m_parent->updateStats();
 
         kapp->tqprocessEvents( 100 );
     }
@@ -3189,8 +3189,8 @@ MediaDevice::transferFiles()
         Amarok::StatusBar::instance()->shortMessage( msg, KDE::StatusBar::Sorry );
     }
 
-    m_tqparent->updateButtons();
-    m_tqparent->queue()->save( Amarok::saveLocation() + "transferlist.xml" );
+    m_parent->updateButtons();
+    m_parent->queue()->save( Amarok::saveLocation() + "transferlist.xml" );
     m_transferring = false;
 
     if( m_deferredDisconnect )
@@ -3208,24 +3208,24 @@ MediaDevice::transferFiles()
 int
 MediaDevice::progress() const
 {
-    return m_tqparent->m_progress->progress();
+    return m_parent->m_progress->progress();
 }
 
 void
 MediaDevice::setProgress( const int progress, const int total )
 {
     if( total != -1 )
-        m_tqparent->m_progress->setTotalSteps( total );
-    m_tqparent->m_progress->setProgress( progress );
-    m_tqparent->m_progressBox->show();
+        m_parent->m_progress->setTotalSteps( total );
+    m_parent->m_progress->setProgress( progress );
+    m_parent->m_progressBox->show();
 }
 
 void
 MediaDevice::fileTransferFinished()  //SLOT
 {
-    m_tqparent->updateStats();
-    m_tqparent->m_progressBox->hide();
-    m_tqparent->m_toolbar->getButton(MediaBrowser::TRANSFER)->setEnabled( isConnected() && m_tqparent->queue()->childCount() > 0 );
+    m_parent->updateStats();
+    m_parent->m_progressBox->hide();
+    m_parent->m_toolbar->getButton(MediaBrowser::TRANSFER)->setEnabled( isConnected() && m_parent->queue()->childCount() > 0 );
     m_wait = false;
 }
 
@@ -3249,10 +3249,10 @@ MediaDevice::deleteFromDevice(MediaItem *item, int flags )
         //NOTE we assume that currentItem is the main target
         int numFiles  = m_view->getSelectedLeaves(item, &list, MediaView::OnlySelected | ((flags & OnlyPlayed) ? MediaView::OnlyPlayed : MediaView::None) );
 
-        m_tqparent->m_stats->setText( i18n( "1 track to be deleted", "%n tracks to be deleted", numFiles ) );
+        m_parent->m_stats->setText( i18n( "1 track to be deleted", "%n tracks to be deleted", numFiles ) );
         if( numFiles > 0 && (flags & DeleteTrack) )
         {
-            int button = KMessageBox::warningContinueCancel( m_tqparent,
+            int button = KMessageBox::warningContinueCancel( m_parent,
                     i18n( "<p>You have selected 1 track to be <b>irreversibly</b> deleted.",
                         "<p>You have selected %n tracks to be <b>irreversibly</b> deleted.",
                         numFiles
@@ -3262,8 +3262,8 @@ MediaDevice::deleteFromDevice(MediaItem *item, int flags )
 
             if ( button != KMessageBox::Continue )
             {
-                m_tqparent->queue()->computeSize();
-                m_tqparent->updateStats();
+                m_parent->queue()->computeSize();
+                m_parent->updateStats();
                 m_deleting = false;
                 unlockDevice();
                 return 0;
@@ -3315,7 +3315,7 @@ MediaDevice::deleteFromDevice(MediaItem *item, int flags )
                     count = -1;
             }
         }
-        m_tqparent->updateStats();
+        m_parent->updateStats();
 
         fi = next;
     }
@@ -3329,7 +3329,7 @@ MediaDevice::deleteFromDevice(MediaItem *item, int flags )
 
         if(!isTransferring())
         {
-            TQTimer::singleShot( 1500, m_tqparent->m_progressBox, TQT_SLOT(hide()) );
+            TQTimer::singleShot( 1500, m_parent->m_progressBox, TQT_SLOT(hide()) );
         }
 
         if( m_deferredDisconnect )
@@ -3338,8 +3338,8 @@ MediaDevice::deleteFromDevice(MediaItem *item, int flags )
             disconnectDevice( m_runDisconnectHook );
         }
     }
-    m_tqparent->queue()->computeSize();
-    m_tqparent->updateStats();
+    m_parent->queue()->computeSize();
+    m_parent->updateStats();
 
     return count;
 }
@@ -3448,7 +3448,7 @@ MediaQueue::save( const TQString &path )
             i.appendChild( attr );
 
             attr = newdoc.createElement( "PodcastRSS" );
-            t = newdoc.createTextNode( peb->tqparent().url() );
+            t = newdoc.createTextNode( peb->parent().url() );
             attr.appendChild( t );
             i.appendChild( attr );
 
@@ -3599,8 +3599,8 @@ MediaDevice::isPreferredFormat( const MetaBundle &bundle )
 }
 
 
-MediaQueue::MediaQueue(MediaBrowser *tqparent)
-    : KListView( tqparent ), m_tqparent( tqparent )
+MediaQueue::MediaQueue(MediaBrowser *parent)
+    : KListView( parent ), m_parent( parent )
 {
     setFixedHeight( 200 );
     setSelectionMode( TQListView::Extended );
@@ -3640,7 +3640,7 @@ MediaQueue::acceptDrag( TQDropEvent *e ) const
 }
 
 void
-MediaQueue::slotDropped( TQDropEvent* e, TQListViewItem* tqparent, TQListViewItem* after)
+MediaQueue::slotDropped( TQDropEvent* e, TQListViewItem* parent, TQListViewItem* after)
 {
     if( e->source() != viewport() )
     {
@@ -3664,7 +3664,7 @@ MediaQueue::slotDropped( TQDropEvent* e, TQListViewItem* tqparent, TQListViewIte
     }
     else if( TQListViewItem *i = currentItem() )
     {
-        moveItem( i, tqparent, after );
+        moveItem( i, parent, after );
     }
 }
 
@@ -3699,9 +3699,9 @@ MediaQueue::computeSize() const
         MediaItem *item = static_cast<MediaItem *>(it);
 
         if( item && item->bundle() &&
-                ( !m_tqparent->currentDevice()
-                  || !m_tqparent->currentDevice()->isConnected()
-                  || !m_tqparent->currentDevice()->trackExists(*item->bundle()) ) )
+                ( !m_parent->currentDevice()
+                  || !m_parent->currentDevice()->isConnected()
+                  || !m_parent->currentDevice()->trackExists(*item->bundle()) ) )
             m_totalSize += ((item->size()+1023)/1024)*1024;
     }
 }
@@ -3716,9 +3716,9 @@ void
 MediaQueue::addItemToSize( const MediaItem *item ) const
 {
     if( item && item->bundle() &&
-            ( !m_tqparent->currentDevice()
-              || !m_tqparent->currentDevice()->isConnected()
-              || !m_tqparent->currentDevice()->trackExists(*item->bundle()) ) )
+            ( !m_parent->currentDevice()
+              || !m_parent->currentDevice()->isConnected()
+              || !m_parent->currentDevice()->trackExists(*item->bundle()) ) )
         m_totalSize += ((item->size()+1023)/1024)*1024;
 }
 
@@ -3726,9 +3726,9 @@ void
 MediaQueue::subtractItemFromSize( const MediaItem *item, bool unconditionally ) const
 {
     if( item && item->bundle() &&
-            ( !m_tqparent->currentDevice()
-              || !m_tqparent->currentDevice()->isConnected()
-              || (unconditionally || !m_tqparent->currentDevice()->trackExists(*item->bundle())) ) )
+            ( !m_parent->currentDevice()
+              || !m_parent->currentDevice()->isConnected()
+              || (unconditionally || !m_parent->currentDevice()->trackExists(*item->bundle())) ) )
         m_totalSize -= ((item->size()+1023)/1024)*1024;
 }
 
@@ -3743,7 +3743,7 @@ MediaQueue::removeSelected()
         {
             subtractItemFromSize( static_cast<MediaItem *>(item) );
             delete item;
-            if( m_tqparent->currentDevice() && m_tqparent->currentDevice()->isTransferring() )
+            if( m_parent->currentDevice() && m_parent->currentDevice()->isTransferring() )
             {
                 MediaBrowser::instance()->m_progress->setTotalSteps( MediaBrowser::instance()->m_progress->totalSteps() - 1 );
             }
@@ -3812,11 +3812,11 @@ MediaQueue::clearItems()
 {
     clear();
     itemCountChanged();
-    if(m_tqparent)
+    if(m_parent)
     {
         computeSize();
-        m_tqparent->updateStats();
-        m_tqparent->updateButtons();
+        m_parent->updateStats();
+        m_parent->updateButtons();
     }
 }
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediabrowser.h b/amarok/src/mediabrowser.h
index 88eab485..2e93c2f8 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediabrowser.h
+++ b/amarok/src/mediabrowser.h
@@ -46,10 +46,10 @@ class TQPalette;
 class LIBAMAROK_EXPORT MediaItem : public KListViewItem
 {
     public:
-        MediaItem( TQListView* tqparent );
-        MediaItem( TQListViewItem* tqparent );
-        MediaItem( TQListView* tqparent, TQListViewItem* after );
-        MediaItem( TQListViewItem* tqparent, TQListViewItem* after );
+        MediaItem( TQListView* parent );
+        MediaItem( TQListViewItem* parent );
+        MediaItem( TQListView* parent, TQListViewItem* after );
+        MediaItem( TQListViewItem* parent, TQListViewItem* after );
         void init();
         virtual ~MediaItem();
 
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ class MediaQueue : public KListView, public DropProxyTarget
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        MediaQueue(MediaBrowser *tqparent);
+        MediaQueue(MediaBrowser *parent);
         MediaItem *findPath( TQString path );
 
         KIO::filesize_t totalSize() const; // total size of items to transfer in KB
@@ -160,11 +160,11 @@ class MediaQueue : public KListView, public DropProxyTarget
     private slots:
         void selectAll() {TQListView::selectAll(true); }
         void slotShowContextMenu( TQListViewItem* item, const TQPoint& point, int );
-        void slotDropped (TQDropEvent* e, TQListViewItem* tqparent, TQListViewItem* after);
+        void slotDropped (TQDropEvent* e, TQListViewItem* parent, TQListViewItem* after);
 
     private:
         void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e );
-        MediaBrowser *m_tqparent;
+        MediaBrowser *m_parent;
         mutable KIO::filesize_t m_totalSize;
 };
 
@@ -292,12 +292,12 @@ class MediaView : public KListView
             OnlyPlayed = 2
         };
 
-        MediaView( TQWidget *tqparent, MediaDevice *device );
+        MediaView( TQWidget *parent, MediaDevice *device );
         virtual ~MediaView();
         LIBAMAROK_EXPORT KURL::List nodeBuildDragList( MediaItem* item, int flags=OnlySelected );
-        int getSelectedLeaves(MediaItem *tqparent, TQPtrList<MediaItem> *list, int flags=OnlySelected );
-        LIBAMAROK_EXPORT MediaItem *newDirectory( MediaItem* tqparent );
-        bool setFilter( const TQString &filter, MediaItem *tqparent=NULL );
+        int getSelectedLeaves(MediaItem *parent, TQPtrList<MediaItem> *list, int flags=OnlySelected );
+        LIBAMAROK_EXPORT MediaItem *newDirectory( MediaItem* parent );
+        bool setFilter( const TQString &filter, MediaItem *parent=NULL );
 
     private slots:
         void rmbPressed( TQListViewItem*, const TQPoint&, int );
@@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ class MediaView : public KListView
         bool acceptDrag( TQDropEvent *e ) const;
         TQDragObject *dragObject();
 
-        TQWidget *m_tqparent;
+        TQWidget *m_parent;
         MediaDevice *m_device;
         MediaItemTip *m_toolTip;
 };
@@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ class LIBAMAROK_EXPORT MediaDevice : public TQObject, public Amarok::Plugin
         };
 
         MediaDevice();
-        virtual void init( MediaBrowser* tqparent );
+        virtual void init( MediaBrowser* parent );
         virtual ~MediaDevice();
 
         MediaView *view();
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ class LIBAMAROK_EXPORT MediaDevice : public TQObject, public Amarok::Plugin
 
         /**
          * Adds particular tracks to a playlist
-         * @param playlist tqparent playlist for tracks to be added to
+         * @param playlist parent playlist for tracks to be added to
          * @param after insert following this item
          * @param items tracks to add to playlist
          */
@@ -391,15 +391,15 @@ class LIBAMAROK_EXPORT MediaDevice : public TQObject, public Amarok::Plugin
         /**
          * Create a new playlist
          * @param name playlist title
-         * @param tqparent tqparent MediaItem of the new playlist
+         * @param parent parent MediaItem of the new playlist
          * @param items tracks to add to the new playlist
          * @return the newly created playlist
          */
-        virtual MediaItem *newPlaylist(const TQString &name, MediaItem *tqparent, TQPtrList<MediaItem> items) { Q_UNUSED(name); Q_UNUSED(tqparent); Q_UNUSED(items); return 0; }
+        virtual MediaItem *newPlaylist(const TQString &name, MediaItem *parent, TQPtrList<MediaItem> items) { Q_UNUSED(name); Q_UNUSED(parent); Q_UNUSED(items); return 0; }
 
         /**
          * Move items to a directory
-         * @param directory new tqparent of dropped items
+         * @param directory new parent of dropped items
          * @param items tracks to add to the directory
          */
         virtual void      addToDirectory( MediaItem *directory, TQPtrList<MediaItem> items ) { Q_UNUSED(directory); Q_UNUSED(items); }
@@ -407,11 +407,11 @@ class LIBAMAROK_EXPORT MediaDevice : public TQObject, public Amarok::Plugin
         /**
          * Create a new directory
          * @param name directory title
-         * @param tqparent tqparent MediaItem of the new directory
+         * @param parent parent MediaItem of the new directory
          * @param items tracks to add to the new directory
          * @return the newly created directory
          */
-        virtual MediaItem *newDirectory( const TQString &name, MediaItem *tqparent ) { Q_UNUSED(name); Q_UNUSED(tqparent); return 0; }
+        virtual MediaItem *newDirectory( const TQString &name, MediaItem *parent ) { Q_UNUSED(name); Q_UNUSED(parent); return 0; }
 
         /**
          * Notify device of changed tags
@@ -444,8 +444,8 @@ class LIBAMAROK_EXPORT MediaDevice : public TQObject, public Amarok::Plugin
          */
         virtual bool needsManualConfig() { return true; }
 
-        virtual void addConfigElements( TQWidget * /*tqparent*/ ) {}
-        virtual void removeConfigElements( TQWidget * /*tqparent*/ ) {}
+        virtual void addConfigElements( TQWidget * /*parent*/ ) {}
+        virtual void removeConfigElements( TQWidget * /*parent*/ ) {}
         virtual void applyConfig() {}
         virtual void loadConfig();
 
@@ -630,7 +630,7 @@ class LIBAMAROK_EXPORT MediaDevice : public TQObject, public Amarok::Plugin
         bool        m_transcodeRemove;
 
         KShellProcess   *sysProc;
-        MediaBrowser    *m_tqparent;
+        MediaBrowser    *m_parent;
         MediaView       *m_view;
         Medium           m_medium;
         TQString          m_transferDir;
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapclient.cpp b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapclient.cpp
index 7fbffac4..d73a1f89 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapclient.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapclient.cpp
@@ -468,8 +468,8 @@ DaapClient::customClicked()
     {
 
         public:
-            AddHostDialog( TQWidget *tqparent )
-                : KDialogBase( tqparent, "DaapAddHostDialog", true, i18n( "Add Computer" ) , Ok|Cancel)
+            AddHostDialog( TQWidget *parent )
+                : KDialogBase( parent, "DaapAddHostDialog", true, i18n( "Add Computer" ) , Ok|Cancel)
             {
                 m_base = new AddHostBase( this, "DaapAddHostBase" );
                 m_base->m_downloadPixmap->setPixmap( TQPixmap( KGlobal::iconLoader()->iconPath( Amarok::icon( "download" ), -KIcon::SizeEnormous ) ) );
@@ -512,8 +512,8 @@ DaapClient::passwordPrompt()
     class PasswordDialog : public KDialogBase
     {
         public:
-            PasswordDialog( TQWidget *tqparent )
-            : KDialogBase( tqparent, "PasswordDialog", true, i18n( "Password Required" ) , Ok|Cancel)
+            PasswordDialog( TQWidget *parent )
+            : KDialogBase( parent, "PasswordDialog", true, i18n( "Password Required" ) , Ok|Cancel)
             {
                 makeHBoxMainWidget();
 
@@ -601,12 +601,12 @@ DaapClient::trackExistsInCollection( MetaBundle *bundle )
 /// Configuration Dialog Extension
 
 void
-DaapClient::addConfigElements( TQWidget * tqparent )
+DaapClient::addConfigElements( TQWidget * parent )
 {
-    m_broadcastServerCheckBox = new TQCheckBox( "Broadcast my music", tqparent );
+    m_broadcastServerCheckBox = new TQCheckBox( "Broadcast my music", parent );
     m_broadcastServerCheckBox->setChecked( m_broadcastServer );
 
-    m_removeDuplicatesCheckBox = new TQCheckBox( "Hide songs in my collection", tqparent );
+    m_removeDuplicatesCheckBox = new TQCheckBox( "Hide songs in my collection", parent );
     m_removeDuplicatesCheckBox->setChecked( m_removeDuplicates );
 
     TQToolTip::add( m_removeDuplicatesCheckBox, i18n( "Enabling this may reduce connection times" ) );
@@ -614,7 +614,7 @@ DaapClient::addConfigElements( TQWidget * tqparent )
 
 
 void
-DaapClient::removeConfigElements( TQWidget * /* tqparent */ )
+DaapClient::removeConfigElements( TQWidget * /* parent */ )
 {
     if( m_broadcastServerCheckBox != 0 )
         delete m_broadcastServerCheckBox;
@@ -680,8 +680,8 @@ DEBUG_BLOCK
 // CLASS ServerItem
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-ServerItem::ServerItem( TQListView* tqparent, DaapClient* client, const TQString& ip, TQ_UINT16 port, const TQString& title, const TQString& host )
-    : MediaItem( tqparent )
+ServerItem::ServerItem( TQListView* parent, DaapClient* client, const TQString& ip, TQ_UINT16 port, const TQString& title, const TQString& host )
+    : MediaItem( parent )
     , m_daapClient( client )
     , m_reader( 0 )
     , m_ip( ip )
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapclient.h b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapclient.h
index 9b0af159..4b111a76 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapclient.h
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapclient.h
@@ -66,8 +66,8 @@ class DaapClient : public MediaDevice
         bool isConnected();
 
         virtual bool needsManualConfig() { return true; }
-        virtual void addConfigElements   ( TQWidget * /*tqparent*/ );
-        virtual void removeConfigElements( TQWidget * /*tqparent*/ );
+        virtual void addConfigElements   ( TQWidget * /*parent*/ );
+        virtual void removeConfigElements( TQWidget * /*parent*/ );
         virtual void applyConfig();
         virtual void loadConfig();
 
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ class ServerItem : public TQObject, public MediaItem
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        ServerItem( TQListView* tqparent, DaapClient* client, const TQString& ip, TQ_UINT16 port, const TQString& title, const TQString& host );
+        ServerItem( TQListView* parent, DaapClient* client, const TQString& ip, TQ_UINT16 port, const TQString& title, const TQString& host );
         ~ServerItem();
         void setOpen( bool o );
         void resetTitle()                     { setText( 0, m_title ); }
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/authentication/contentfetcher.cpp b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/authentication/contentfetcher.cpp
index 57b36fc3..e27f27eb 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/authentication/contentfetcher.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/authentication/contentfetcher.cpp
@@ -26,8 +26,8 @@
 using namespace Daap;
 int ContentFetcher::s_requestId = 10;
 
-ContentFetcher::ContentFetcher( const TQString & hostname, TQ_UINT16 port, const TQString& password, TQObject * tqparent, const char * name )
- : TQHttp(hostname, port, tqparent, name)
+ContentFetcher::ContentFetcher( const TQString & hostname, TQ_UINT16 port, const TQString& password, TQObject * parent, const char * name )
+ : TQHttp(hostname, port, parent, name)
  , m_hostname( hostname )
  , m_port( port )
  , m_selfDestruct( false )
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/authentication/contentfetcher.h b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/authentication/contentfetcher.h
index a890ec7d..5823a948 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/authentication/contentfetcher.h
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/authentication/contentfetcher.h
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ class ContentFetcher : public TQHttp
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        ContentFetcher( const TQString & hostname, TQ_UINT16 port, const TQString& password, TQObject * tqparent = 0, const char * name = 0 );
+        ContentFetcher( const TQString & hostname, TQ_UINT16 port, const TQString& password, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 );
         ~ContentFetcher();
 
         void getDaap( const TQString & command, TQIODevice* musicFile = 0 );
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/reader.cpp b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/reader.cpp
index 61ec5404..b0629c9d 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/reader.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/reader.cpp
@@ -28,8 +28,8 @@ using namespace Daap;
 TQMap<TQString, Code> Reader::s_codes;
 
 
-Reader::Reader(const TQString& host, TQ_UINT16 port, ServerItem* root, const TQString& password, TQObject* tqparent, const char* name)
-    : TQObject(tqparent, name)
+Reader::Reader(const TQString& host, TQ_UINT16 port, ServerItem* root, const TQString& password, TQObject* parent, const char* name)
+    : TQObject(parent, name)
     , m_host( host )
     , m_port( port )
     , m_sessionId( -1 )
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/reader.h b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/reader.h
index c05ce0ce..535200bd 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/reader.h
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapreader/reader.h
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ namespace Daap
 
         public:
             Reader( const TQString& host, TQ_UINT16 port, ServerItem* root,
-                    const TQString& password, TQObject* tqparent, const char* name );
+                    const TQString& password, TQObject* parent, const char* name );
            ~Reader();
 
             //TQPtrList<MetaBundle> getSongList();
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapserver.cpp b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapserver.cpp
index 40e4cf24..af0fe7f9 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapserver.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapserver.cpp
@@ -21,8 +21,8 @@
 #if DNSSD_SUPPORT
     #include <dnssd/publicservice.h>
 #endif
-DaapServer::DaapServer(TQObject* tqparent, char* name)
-  : TQObject( tqparent, name )
+DaapServer::DaapServer(TQObject* parent, char* name)
+  : TQObject( parent, name )
   , m_service( 0 )
 {
     DEBUG_BLOCK
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapserver.h b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapserver.h
index f096a1a4..8833279f 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapserver.h
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/daapserver.h
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ class DaapServer : public TQObject
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        DaapServer(TQObject* tqparent, char* name);
+        DaapServer(TQObject* parent, char* name);
         ~DaapServer();
     public slots:
         void readSql();
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/mongrel/http11/tst_delete.c b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/mongrel/http11/tst_delete.c
index aca99fe4..cb18f16a 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/mongrel/http11/tst_delete.c
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/mongrel/http11/tst_delete.c
@@ -6,9 +6,9 @@
 void *tst_delete(unsigned char *key, struct tst *tst)
 {
    struct node *current_node;
-   struct node *current_node_tqparent;
+   struct node *current_node_parent;
    struct node *last_branch;
-   struct node *last_branch_tqparent;
+   struct node *last_branch_parent;
    struct node *next_node;
    struct node *last_branch_replacement;
    struct node *last_branch_dangling_child;
@@ -21,9 +21,9 @@ void *tst_delete(unsigned char *key, struct tst *tst)
       return NULL;
    
    last_branch = NULL;
-   last_branch_tqparent = NULL;
+   last_branch_parent = NULL;
    current_node = tst->head[(int)key[0]];
-   current_node_tqparent = NULL;
+   current_node_parent = NULL;
    key_index = 1;
    while(current_node != NULL)
    {
@@ -33,13 +33,13 @@ void *tst_delete(unsigned char *key, struct tst *tst)
          if( (current_node->left != NULL) || (current_node->right != NULL) )
          {
             last_branch = current_node;
-            last_branch_tqparent = current_node_tqparent;
+            last_branch_parent = current_node_parent;
          }
          if(key[key_index] == 0)
             break;
          else
          {
-            current_node_tqparent = current_node;
+            current_node_parent = current_node;
             current_node = current_node->middle;
             key_index++;
             continue;
@@ -49,16 +49,16 @@ void *tst_delete(unsigned char *key, struct tst *tst)
          ((current_node->value != 0) && (key[key_index] <
          current_node->value)) )
       {
-         last_branch_tqparent = current_node;
-         current_node_tqparent = current_node;
+         last_branch_parent = current_node;
+         current_node_parent = current_node;
          current_node = current_node->left;
          last_branch = current_node;
          continue;
       }
       else
       {
-         last_branch_tqparent = current_node;
-         current_node_tqparent = current_node;
+         last_branch_parent = current_node;
+         current_node_parent = current_node;
          current_node = current_node->right;
          last_branch = current_node;
          continue;
@@ -77,10 +77,10 @@ void *tst_delete(unsigned char *key, struct tst *tst)
    else if( (last_branch->left == NULL) && (last_branch->right == NULL) )
    {
       
-      if(last_branch_tqparent->left == last_branch)
-         last_branch_tqparent->left = NULL;
+      if(last_branch_parent->left == last_branch)
+         last_branch_parent->left = NULL;
       else
-         last_branch_tqparent->right = NULL;
+         last_branch_parent->right = NULL;
       
       next_node = last_branch;
    }
@@ -103,16 +103,16 @@ void *tst_delete(unsigned char *key, struct tst *tst)
          last_branch_dangling_child = NULL;
       }
       
-      if(last_branch_tqparent == NULL)
+      if(last_branch_parent == NULL)
          tst->head[(int)key[0]]=last_branch_replacement;
       else
       {
-         if (last_branch_tqparent->left == last_branch)
-            last_branch_tqparent->left = last_branch_replacement;
-         else if (last_branch_tqparent->right == last_branch)
-            last_branch_tqparent->right = last_branch_replacement;
+         if (last_branch_parent->left == last_branch)
+            last_branch_parent->left = last_branch_replacement;
+         else if (last_branch_parent->right == last_branch)
+            last_branch_parent->right = last_branch_replacement;
          else
-            last_branch_tqparent->middle = last_branch_replacement;
+            last_branch_parent->middle = last_branch_replacement;
       }
       
       if(last_branch_dangling_child != NULL)
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/mongrel/lib/mongrel/handlers.rb b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/mongrel/lib/mongrel/handlers.rb
index af6108af..cce1f36a 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/mongrel/lib/mongrel/handlers.rb
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/daap/mongrel/lib/mongrel/handlers.rb
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ module Mongrel
           Dir.entries(dir).each do |child|
             next if child == "."
             out << "<a href=\"#{base}/#{ HttpRequest.escape(child)}\">"
-            out << (child == ".." ? "Up to tqparent.." : child)
+            out << (child == ".." ? "Up to parent.." : child)
             out << "</a><br/>"
           end
           out << "</body></html>"
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/generic/genericmediadevice.cpp b/amarok/src/mediadevice/generic/genericmediadevice.cpp
index f0f32159..7a13253a 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/generic/genericmediadevice.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/generic/genericmediadevice.cpp
@@ -72,12 +72,12 @@ typedef TQPtrListIterator<GenericMediaFile> MediaFileListIterator;
 class GenericMediaItem : public MediaItem
 {
     public:
-        GenericMediaItem( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 )
-            : MediaItem( tqparent, after )
+        GenericMediaItem( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 )
+            : MediaItem( parent, after )
         { }
 
-        GenericMediaItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 )
-            : MediaItem( tqparent, after )
+        GenericMediaItem( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 )
+            : MediaItem( parent, after )
         { }
 
         // List directories first, always
@@ -108,22 +108,22 @@ class GenericMediaItem : public MediaItem
 class GenericMediaFile
 {
     public:
-        GenericMediaFile( GenericMediaFile *tqparent, TQString basename, GenericMediaDevice *device )
-        : m_tqparent( tqparent )
+        GenericMediaFile( GenericMediaFile *parent, TQString basename, GenericMediaDevice *device )
+        : m_parent( parent )
         , m_device( device )
         {
             m_listed = false;
             m_tqchildren = new MediaFileList();
 
-            if( m_tqparent )
+            if( m_parent )
             {
-                if( m_tqparent == m_device->getInitialFile() )
+                if( m_parent == m_device->getInitialFile() )
                     m_viewItem = new GenericMediaItem( m_device->view() );
                 else
-                    m_viewItem = new GenericMediaItem( m_tqparent->getViewItem() );
+                    m_viewItem = new GenericMediaItem( m_parent->getViewItem() );
                 setNamesFromBase( basename );
                 m_viewItem->setText( 0, m_baseName );
-                m_tqparent->getChildren()->append( this );
+                m_parent->getChildren()->append( this );
             }
             else
             {
@@ -148,8 +148,8 @@ class GenericMediaFile
 
         ~GenericMediaFile()
         {
-            if( m_tqparent )
-                m_tqparent->removeChild( this );
+            if( m_parent )
+                m_parent->removeChild( this );
             m_device->getItemMap().erase( m_viewItem );
             m_device->getFileMap().erase( m_fullName );
             if ( m_tqchildren )
@@ -159,16 +159,16 @@ class GenericMediaFile
         }
 
         GenericMediaFile*
-        getParent() { return m_tqparent; }
+        getParent() { return m_parent; }
 
         void
-        setParent( GenericMediaFile* tqparent )
+        setParent( GenericMediaFile* parent )
         {
             m_device->getFileMap().erase( m_fullName );
-            m_tqparent->getChildren()->remove( this );
-            m_tqparent = tqparent;
-            if( m_tqparent )
-                m_tqparent->getChildren()->append( this );
+            m_parent->getChildren()->remove( this );
+            m_parent = parent;
+            if( m_parent )
+                m_parent->getChildren()->append( this );
             setNamesFromBase( m_baseName );
             m_device->getFileMap()[m_fullName] = this;
         }
@@ -200,8 +200,8 @@ class GenericMediaFile
         {
             if( name != TQString() )
                 m_baseName = name;
-            if( m_tqparent )
-                m_fullName = m_tqparent->getFullName() + '/' + m_baseName;
+            if( m_parent )
+                m_fullName = m_parent->getFullName() + '/' + m_baseName;
             else
                 m_fullName = m_baseName;
             if( m_viewItem )
@@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ class GenericMediaFile
     private:
         TQString m_fullName;
         TQString m_baseName;
-        GenericMediaFile *m_tqparent;
+        GenericMediaFile *m_parent;
         MediaFileList *m_tqchildren;
         GenericMediaItem *m_viewItem;
         GenericMediaDevice* m_device;
@@ -314,9 +314,9 @@ GenericMediaDevice::GenericMediaDevice()
 }
 
 void
-GenericMediaDevice::init( MediaBrowser* tqparent )
+GenericMediaDevice::init( MediaBrowser* parent )
 {
-    MediaDevice::init( tqparent );
+    MediaDevice::init( parent );
 }
 
 GenericMediaDevice::~GenericMediaDevice()
@@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ GenericMediaDevice::newDirectory( const TQString &name, MediaItem *parent )
     debug() << "Creating directory: " << fullPath << endl;    
     const KURL url( fullPath );
 
-    if( !KIO::NetAccess::mkdir( url, m_tqparent ) ) //failed
+    if( !KIO::NetAccess::mkdir( url, m_parent ) ) //failed
     {
         debug() << "Failed to create directory " << fullPath << endl;
         return 0;
@@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ GenericMediaDevice::addToDirectory( MediaItem *directory, TQPtrList<MediaItem> i
         const KURL srcurl(src);
         const KURL dsturl(dst);
 
-        if ( !KIO::NetAccess::file_move( srcurl, dsturl, -1, false, false, m_tqparent ) )
+        if ( !KIO::NetAccess::file_move( srcurl, dsturl, -1, false, false, m_parent ) )
             debug() << "Failed moving " << src << " to " << dst << endl;
         else
         {
@@ -597,7 +597,7 @@ GenericMediaDevice::checkAndBuildLocation( const TQString& location )
         TQString secondpart = cleanPath( location.section( '/', i, i ) );
         KURL url = KURL::fromPathOrURL( firstpart + '/' + secondpart );
 
-        if( !KIO::NetAccess::exists( url, false, m_tqparent ) )
+        if( !KIO::NetAccess::exists( url, false, m_parent ) )
         {
             debug() << "directory does not exist, creating..." << url << endl;
             if( !KIO::NetAccess::mkdir(url, m_view ) ) //failed
@@ -614,21 +614,21 @@ GenericMediaDevice::buildPodcastDestination( const PodcastEpisodeBundle *bundle
 {
     TQString location = m_podcastLocation.endsWith("/") ? m_podcastLocation : m_podcastLocation + '/';
     // get info about the PodcastChannel
-    TQString parentUrl = bundle->tqparent().url();
-    TQString sql = "SELECT title,tqparent FROM podcastchannels WHERE url='" + CollectionDB::instance()->escapeString( parentUrl ) + "';";
+    TQString parentUrl = bundle->parent().url();
+    TQString sql = "SELECT title,parent FROM podcastchannels WHERE url='" + CollectionDB::instance()->escapeString( parentUrl ) + "';";
     TQStringList values = CollectionDB::instance()->query( sql );
     TQString channelTitle;
-    int tqparent = 0;
+    int parent = 0;
     channelTitle = values.first();
-    tqparent = values.last().toInt();
+    parent = values.last().toInt();
     // Put the file in a directory tree like in the playlistbrowser
-    sql = "SELECT name,tqparent FROM podcastfolders WHERE id=%1;";
+    sql = "SELECT name,parent FROM podcastfolders WHERE id=%1;";
     TQString name;
-    while ( tqparent > 0 )
+    while ( parent > 0 )
     {
-        values = CollectionDB::instance()->query( sql.tqarg( tqparent ) );
+        values = CollectionDB::instance()->query( sql.tqarg( parent ) );
         name    =    values.first();
-        tqparent  =   values.last().toInt();
+        parent  =   values.last().toInt();
         location += cleanPath( name ) + '/';
     }
     location += cleanPath( channelTitle ) + '/' + cleanPath( bundle->localUrl().filename() );
@@ -856,8 +856,8 @@ GenericMediaDevice::addTrackToList( int type, KURL url, int /*size*/ )
     TQString baseName = path.right( path.length() - index - 1 );
     TQString parentName = path.left( index );
 
-    GenericMediaFile* tqparent = m_mfm[parentName];
-    GenericMediaFile* newItem = new GenericMediaFile( tqparent, baseName, this );
+    GenericMediaFile* parent = m_mfm[parentName];
+    GenericMediaFile* newItem = new GenericMediaFile( parent, baseName, this );
 
     if( type == MediaItem::DIRECTORY ) //directory
         newItem->getViewItem()->setType( MediaItem::DIRECTORY );
@@ -877,7 +877,7 @@ GenericMediaDevice::addTrackToList( int type, KURL url, int /*size*/ )
             newItem->getViewItem()->setType( MediaItem::UNKNOWN );
     }
 
-    refreshDir( tqparent->getFullName() );
+    refreshDir( parent->getFullName() );
 
     return 0;
 }
@@ -889,7 +889,7 @@ GenericMediaDevice::getCapacity( KIO::filesize_t *total, KIO::filesize_t *availa
 {
     if( !m_connected || !KURL::fromPathOrURL( m_medium.mountPoint() ).isLocalFile() ) return false;
 
-    KDiskFreeSp* kdf = new KDiskFreeSp( TQT_TQOBJECT(m_tqparent), "generic_kdf" );
+    KDiskFreeSp* kdf = new KDiskFreeSp( TQT_TQOBJECT(m_parent), "generic_kdf" );
     kdf->readDF( m_medium.mountPoint() );
     connect(kdf, TQT_SIGNAL(foundMountPoint( const TQString &, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long )),
                  TQT_SLOT(foundMountPoint( const TQString &, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long )));
@@ -983,7 +983,7 @@ GenericMediaDevice::rmbPressed( TQListViewItem* qitem, const TQPoint& point, int
                 if( item->type() == MediaItem::DIRECTORY )
                     m_view->newDirectory( static_cast<MediaItem*>(item) );
                 else
-                    m_view->newDirectory( static_cast<MediaItem*>(item->tqparent()) );
+                    m_view->newDirectory( static_cast<MediaItem*>(item->parent()) );
                 break;
 
             case RENAME:
@@ -1072,15 +1072,15 @@ bool GenericMediaDevice::isPreferredFormat( const MetaBundle &bundle )
 
 /// Configuration Dialog Extension
 
-void GenericMediaDevice::addConfigElements( TQWidget * tqparent )
+void GenericMediaDevice::addConfigElements( TQWidget * parent )
 {
-    m_configDialog = new GenericMediaDeviceConfigDialog( tqparent );
+    m_configDialog = new GenericMediaDeviceConfigDialog( parent );
 
     m_configDialog->setDevice( this );
 }
 
 
-void GenericMediaDevice::removeConfigElements( TQWidget * /* tqparent */ )
+void GenericMediaDevice::removeConfigElements( TQWidget * /* parent */ )
 {
     if( m_configDialog != 0 )
         delete m_configDialog;
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/generic/genericmediadevice.h b/amarok/src/mediadevice/generic/genericmediadevice.h
index 9791b0ac..246fd92e 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/generic/genericmediadevice.h
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/generic/genericmediadevice.h
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ class GenericMediaDevice : public MediaDevice
 
     public:
                           GenericMediaDevice();
-        void              init( MediaBrowser* tqparent );
+        void              init( MediaBrowser* parent );
         virtual           ~GenericMediaDevice();
 
         bool              isConnected() { return m_connected; }
@@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ class GenericMediaDevice : public MediaDevice
         bool              isPreferredFormat( const MetaBundle &bundle );
 
         bool              needsManualConfig() { return false; }
-        void              addConfigElements( TQWidget * tqparent );
-        void              removeConfigElements( TQWidget * /* tqparent */);
+        void              addConfigElements( TQWidget * parent );
+        void              removeConfigElements( TQWidget * /* parent */);
 
         void              applyConfig();
         void              loadConfig();
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ class GenericMediaDevice : public MediaDevice
 
         MediaItem        *copyTrackToDevice( const MetaBundle& bundle );
         int               deleteItemFromDevice( MediaItem *item, int flags=DeleteTrack );
-        MediaItem        *newDirectory( const TQString &name, MediaItem *tqparent );
+        MediaItem        *newDirectory( const TQString &name, MediaItem *parent );
         void              addToDirectory( MediaItem *directory, TQPtrList<MediaItem> items );
 
         bool              getCapacity( KIO::filesize_t *total, KIO::filesize_t *available );
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/ifp/ifpmediadevice.cpp b/amarok/src/mediadevice/ifp/ifpmediadevice.cpp
index b8b3571e..f1df4e76 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/ifp/ifpmediadevice.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/ifp/ifpmediadevice.cpp
@@ -57,12 +57,12 @@ namespace Amarok {
 class IfpMediaItem : public MediaItem
 {
     public:
-        IfpMediaItem( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 )
-            : MediaItem( tqparent, after )
+        IfpMediaItem( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 )
+            : MediaItem( parent, after )
         {}
 
-        IfpMediaItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 )
-            : MediaItem( tqparent, after )
+        IfpMediaItem( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 )
+            : MediaItem( parent, after )
         {}
 
         void
@@ -127,9 +127,9 @@ IfpMediaDevice::IfpMediaDevice()
 }
 
 void
-IfpMediaDevice::init( MediaBrowser* tqparent )
+IfpMediaDevice::init( MediaBrowser* parent )
 {
-    MediaDevice::init( tqparent );
+    MediaDevice::init( parent );
 }
 
 IfpMediaDevice::~IfpMediaDevice()
@@ -278,32 +278,32 @@ IfpMediaDevice::renameItem( TQListViewItem *item ) // SLOT
 /// Creating a directory
 
 MediaItem *
-IfpMediaDevice::newDirectory( const TQString &name, MediaItem *tqparent )
+IfpMediaDevice::newDirectory( const TQString &name, MediaItem *parent )
 {
     if( !m_connected || name.isEmpty() ) return 0;
 
     TQString cleanedName = cleanPath( name );
 
-    const TQCString dirPath = TQFile::encodeName( getFullPath( tqparent ) + "\\" + cleanedName );
+    const TQCString dirPath = TQFile::encodeName( getFullPath( parent ) + "\\" + cleanedName );
     debug() << "Creating directory: " << dirPath << endl;
     int err = ifp_mkdir( &m_ifpdev, dirPath );
 
     if( err ) //failed
         return 0;
 
-    m_tmpParent = tqparent;
+    m_tmpParent = parent;
     addTrackToList( IFP_DIR, cleanedName );
     return m_last;
 }
 
 MediaItem *
-IfpMediaDevice::newDirectoryRecursive( const TQString &name, MediaItem *tqparent )
+IfpMediaDevice::newDirectoryRecursive( const TQString &name, MediaItem *parent )
 {
     TQStringList folders = TQStringList::split( '\\', name );
     TQString progress = "";
 
-    if( tqparent )
-        progress += getFullPath( tqparent ) + "\\";
+    if( parent )
+        progress += getFullPath( parent ) + "\\";
     else
         progress += "\\";
 
@@ -315,32 +315,32 @@ IfpMediaDevice::newDirectoryRecursive( const TQString &name, MediaItem *tqparent
 
         if( ifp_exists( &m_ifpdev, dirPath ) == IFP_DIR )
         {
-            m_tmpParent = tqparent;
-            tqparent = findChildItem( *it, tqparent );
-            if( !tqparent )
+            m_tmpParent = parent;
+            parent = findChildItem( *it, parent );
+            if( !parent )
             {
                 addTrackToList( IFP_DIR, *it );
-                tqparent = m_last;
+                parent = m_last;
             }
         }
         else
         {
-            tqparent = newDirectory( *it, tqparent );
-            if( !tqparent ) //failed
+            parent = newDirectory( *it, parent );
+            if( !parent ) //failed
                 return 0;
         }
         progress += "\\";
     }
-    return tqparent;
+    return parent;
 }
 
 MediaItem *
-IfpMediaDevice::findChildItem( const TQString &name, MediaItem *tqparent )
+IfpMediaDevice::findChildItem( const TQString &name, MediaItem *parent )
 {
     TQListViewItem *child;
 
-    tqparent ?
-        child = tqparent->firstChild():
+    parent ?
+        child = parent->firstChild():
         child = m_view->firstChild();
 
     while( child )
@@ -628,12 +628,12 @@ IfpMediaDevice::getFullPath( const TQListViewItem *item, const bool getFilename
 
     if( getFilename ) path = item->text(0);
 
-    TQListViewItem *tqparent = item->tqparent();
-    while( tqparent )
+    TQListViewItem *parent = item->parent();
+    while( parent )
     {
         path.prepend( "\\" );
-        path.prepend( tqparent->text(0) );
-        tqparent = tqparent->tqparent();
+        path.prepend( parent->text(0) );
+        parent = parent->parent();
     }
     path.prepend( "\\" );
 
@@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ IfpMediaDevice::rmbPressed( TQListViewItem* qitem, const TQPoint& point, int )
                 if( item->type() == MediaItem::DIRECTORY )
                     m_view->newDirectory( static_cast<MediaItem*>(item) );
                 else
-                    m_view->newDirectory( static_cast<MediaItem*>(item->tqparent()) );
+                    m_view->newDirectory( static_cast<MediaItem*>(item->parent()) );
                 break;
 
             case RENAME:
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/ifp/ifpmediadevice.h b/amarok/src/mediadevice/ifp/ifpmediadevice.h
index 8aa6b66c..9dcffbe6 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/ifp/ifpmediadevice.h
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/ifp/ifpmediadevice.h
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ class IfpMediaDevice : public MediaDevice
 
     public:
                           IfpMediaDevice();
-        void              init( MediaBrowser* tqparent );
+        void              init( MediaBrowser* parent );
         virtual           ~IfpMediaDevice();
 
         bool              isConnected() { return m_connected; }
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ class IfpMediaDevice : public MediaDevice
         MediaItem        *copyTrackToDevice( const MetaBundle& bundle);
         int               deleteItemFromDevice( MediaItem *item, int flags=DeleteTrack );
         bool              getCapacity( KIO::filesize_t *total, KIO::filesize_t *available );
-        MediaItem        *newDirectory( const TQString &name, MediaItem *tqparent );
+        MediaItem        *newDirectory( const TQString &name, MediaItem *parent );
         void              addToDirectory( MediaItem *directory, TQPtrList<MediaItem> items );
 
     protected slots:
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ class IfpMediaDevice : public MediaDevice
         bool              checkResult( int result, TQString message );
 
         // file transfer
-        MediaItem        *newDirectoryRecursive( const TQString &name, MediaItem *tqparent );
+        MediaItem        *newDirectoryRecursive( const TQString &name, MediaItem *parent );
         int               uploadTrack( const TQCString& src, const TQCString& dest );
         void              downloadSelectedItems();
         int               downloadTrack( const TQCString& src, const TQCString& dest );
@@ -88,11 +88,11 @@ class IfpMediaDevice : public MediaDevice
         static int        filetransferCallback( void *pData, struct ifp_transfer_status *progress );
         int               setProgressInfo( struct ifp_transfer_status *progress );
         // Will iterate over parents and add directory name to the item.
-        // getFilename = false will return only tqparent structure, as opposed to returning the filename as well
+        // getFilename = false will return only parent structure, as opposed to returning the filename as well
         TQString           getFullPath( const TQListViewItem *item, const bool getFilename = true );
         TQString           cleanPath( const TQString &component );
         
-        MediaItem        *findChildItem( const TQString &name, MediaItem *tqparent );
+        MediaItem        *findChildItem( const TQString &name, MediaItem *parent );
 
         // IFP device
         struct usb_device *m_dev;
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ class IfpMediaDevice : public MediaDevice
         bool               m_connected;
 
         IfpMediaItem      *m_last;
-        //used to specify new IfpMediaItem tqparent. Make sure it is restored to 0 (m_listview)
+        //used to specify new IfpMediaItem parent. Make sure it is restored to 0 (m_listview)
         TQListViewItem     *m_tmpParent;
         TransferDialog    *m_td;
 };
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/ipod/ipodmediadevice.cpp b/amarok/src/mediadevice/ipod/ipodmediadevice.cpp
index c0830531..2dd6e8c5 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/ipod/ipodmediadevice.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/ipod/ipodmediadevice.cpp
@@ -107,17 +107,17 @@ class TrackList : public TQPtrList<Itdb_Track>
 class IpodMediaItem : public MediaItem
 {
     public:
-        IpodMediaItem( TQListView *tqparent, MediaDevice *dev )
-            : MediaItem( tqparent ) { init( dev ); }
+        IpodMediaItem( TQListView *parent, MediaDevice *dev )
+            : MediaItem( parent ) { init( dev ); }
 
-        IpodMediaItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, MediaDevice *dev )
-            : MediaItem( tqparent ) { init( dev ); }
+        IpodMediaItem( TQListViewItem *parent, MediaDevice *dev )
+            : MediaItem( parent ) { init( dev ); }
 
-        IpodMediaItem( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, MediaDevice *dev )
-            : MediaItem( tqparent, after ) { init( dev ); }
+        IpodMediaItem( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after, MediaDevice *dev )
+            : MediaItem( parent, after ) { init( dev ); }
 
-        IpodMediaItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, MediaDevice *dev )
-            : MediaItem( tqparent, after ) { init( dev ); }
+        IpodMediaItem( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, MediaDevice *dev )
+            : MediaItem( parent, after ) { init( dev ); }
 
         virtual ~IpodMediaItem() { delete m_podcastInfo; }
 
@@ -410,9 +410,9 @@ IpodMediaDevice::slotIpodAction( int id )
 }
 
 void
-IpodMediaDevice::init( MediaBrowser* tqparent )
+IpodMediaDevice::init( MediaBrowser* parent )
 {
-    MediaDevice::init( tqparent );
+    MediaDevice::init( parent );
 }
 
 IpodMediaDevice::~IpodMediaDevice()
@@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ IpodMediaDevice::updateTrackInDB( IpodMediaItem *item, const TQString &pathname,
         if( metaBundle.podcastBundle() )
         {
             PodcastChannelBundle pcb;
-            if( CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastChannelBundle( metaBundle.podcastBundle()->tqparent(), &pcb ) )
+            if( CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastChannelBundle( metaBundle.podcastBundle()->parent(), &pcb ) )
                 image = CollectionDB::instance()->podcastImage( pcb.imageURL().url(), 0 );
         }
         if( image.isEmpty() )
@@ -608,14 +608,14 @@ IpodMediaDevice::updateTrackInDB( IpodMediaItem *item, const TQString &pathname,
 
     if( item )
     {
-        MediaItem *tqparent = dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(item->tqparent());
-        if( tqparent )
+        MediaItem *parent = dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(item->parent());
+        if( parent )
         {
-            tqparent->takeItem( item );
-            if( tqparent->childCount() == 0 && !isSpecialItem( tqparent ) )
+            parent->takeItem( item );
+            if( parent->childCount() == 0 && !isSpecialItem( parent ) )
             {
-                MediaItem *pp = dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(tqparent->tqparent());
-                delete tqparent;
+                MediaItem *pp = dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(parent->parent());
+                delete parent;
                 if( pp && pp->childCount() == 0 && !isSpecialItem( pp ) )
                     delete pp;
             }
@@ -702,7 +702,7 @@ IpodMediaDevice::copyTrackToDevice(const MetaBundle &bundle)
         podcastInfo->url = peb->url().url();
         podcastInfo->description = peb->description();
         podcastInfo->author = peb->author();
-        podcastInfo->rss = peb->tqparent().url();
+        podcastInfo->rss = peb->parent().url();
         podcastInfo->date = peb->dateTime();
         podcastInfo->listened = !peb->isNew();
     }
@@ -747,10 +747,10 @@ IpodMediaDevice::trackExists( const MetaBundle& bundle )
 }
 
 MediaItem *
-IpodMediaDevice::newPlaylist(const TQString &name, MediaItem *tqparent, TQPtrList<MediaItem> items)
+IpodMediaDevice::newPlaylist(const TQString &name, MediaItem *parent, TQPtrList<MediaItem> items)
 {
     m_dbChanged = true;
-    IpodMediaItem *item = new IpodMediaItem(tqparent, this);
+    IpodMediaItem *item = new IpodMediaItem(parent, this);
     item->setType(MediaItem::PLAYLIST);
     item->setText(0, name);
 
@@ -801,7 +801,7 @@ IpodMediaDevice::addToPlaylist(MediaItem *mlist, MediaItem *after, TQPtrList<Med
             continue;
 
         IpodMediaItem *add;
-        if(it->tqparent() == list)
+        if(it->parent() == list)
         {
             add = it;
             if(after)
@@ -998,7 +998,7 @@ IpodMediaDevice::createLockFile( bool silent )
 
         if( !silent )
         {
-            if( KMessageBox::warningContinueCancel( m_tqparent, msg, i18n( "Remove iTunes Lock File?" ),
+            if( KMessageBox::warningContinueCancel( m_parent, msg, i18n( "Remove iTunes Lock File?" ),
                         KGuiItem(i18n("&Remove"), "editdelete"), TQString(), KMessageBox::Dangerous )
                     == KMessageBox::Continue )
             {
@@ -1188,7 +1188,7 @@ IpodMediaDevice::openDevice( bool silent )
                 "Should I try to initialize your iPod?" ).tqarg( mountPoint() );
 
         if( !silent
-                && KMessageBox::warningContinueCancel( m_tqparent, msg, i18n( "Initialize iPod?" ),
+                && KMessageBox::warningContinueCancel( m_parent, msg, i18n( "Initialize iPod?" ),
                     KGuiItem(i18n("&Initialize"), "new") ) == KMessageBox::Continue )
         {
             if( !initializeIpod() )
@@ -1260,7 +1260,7 @@ IpodMediaDevice::openDevice( bool silent )
     for( cur = m_itdb->tracks; cur; cur = cur->next )
     {
         Itdb_Track *track = (Itdb_Track *)cur->data;
-        addTrackToView( track, 0 /*tqparent*/, false /*checkintegrity*/, true /*batchmode*/ );
+        addTrackToView( track, 0 /*parent*/, false /*checkintegrity*/, true /*batchmode*/ );
     }
 
     if( !silent )
@@ -1854,8 +1854,8 @@ IpodMediaDevice::ipodPath(const TQString &realPath)
 class IpodWriteDBJob : public ThreadManager::DependentJob
 {
     public:
-        IpodWriteDBJob( TQObject *tqparent, Itdb_iTunesDB *itdb, bool isShuffle, bool *resultPtr )
-        : ThreadManager::DependentJob( tqparent, "IpodWriteDBJob" )
+        IpodWriteDBJob( TQObject *parent, Itdb_iTunesDB *itdb, bool isShuffle, bool *resultPtr )
+        : ThreadManager::DependentJob( parent, "IpodWriteDBJob" )
         , m_itdb( itdb )
         , m_isShuffle( isShuffle )
         , m_resultPtr( resultPtr )
@@ -2285,7 +2285,7 @@ IpodMediaDevice::rmbPressed( TQListViewItem* qitem, const TQPoint& point, int )
         {
             IpodMediaItem *it = static_cast<IpodMediaItem *>(item);
             menu.insertItem( SmallIconSet( Amarok::icon( "podcast" ) ), i18n( "Subscribe to This Podcast" ), SUBSCRIBE );
-            //menu.setItemEnabled( SUBSCRIBE, item->bundle()->podcastBundle() && item->bundle()->podcastBundle()->tqparent().isValid() );
+            //menu.setItemEnabled( SUBSCRIBE, item->bundle()->podcastBundle() && item->bundle()->podcastBundle()->parent().isValid() );
             menu.setItemEnabled( SUBSCRIBE, it->m_podcastInfo && !it->m_podcastInfo->rss.isEmpty() );
             menu.insertSeparator();
         }
@@ -2492,7 +2492,7 @@ IpodMediaDevice::rmbPressed( TQListViewItem* qitem, const TQPoint& point, int )
                                 continue;
                             }
 
-                            i->tqparent()->takeItem(i);
+                            i->parent()->takeItem(i);
                             insertTrackIntoDB(i->url().path(), *i->bundle(), *i->bundle(), 0);
                             delete i;
                         }
@@ -2508,7 +2508,7 @@ IpodMediaDevice::rmbPressed( TQListViewItem* qitem, const TQPoint& point, int )
                 {
                     MediaItem *podcasts = 0;
                     if(item->type() == MediaItem::PODCASTCHANNEL)
-                        podcasts = dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(item->tqparent());
+                        podcasts = dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(item->parent());
                     else
                         podcasts = item;
                     deleteFromDevice( podcasts, true );
@@ -2590,21 +2590,21 @@ IpodMediaDevice::supportedFiletypes()
 }
 
 void
-IpodMediaDevice::addConfigElements( TQWidget *tqparent )
+IpodMediaDevice::addConfigElements( TQWidget *parent )
 {
-    m_autoDeletePodcastsCheck = new TQCheckBox( tqparent );
+    m_autoDeletePodcastsCheck = new TQCheckBox( parent );
     m_autoDeletePodcastsCheck->setText( i18n( "&Automatically delete podcasts" ) );
     TQToolTip::add( m_autoDeletePodcastsCheck, i18n( "Automatically delete podcast shows already played when connecting device" ) );
     m_autoDeletePodcastsCheck->setChecked( m_autoDeletePodcasts );
 
-    m_syncStatsCheck = new TQCheckBox( tqparent );
+    m_syncStatsCheck = new TQCheckBox( parent );
     m_syncStatsCheck->setText( i18n( "&Synchronize with Amarok statistics" ) );
     TQToolTip::add( m_syncStatsCheck, i18n( "Synchronize with Amarok statistics and submit tracks played to last.fm" ) );
     m_syncStatsCheck->setChecked( m_syncStats );
 }
 
 void
-IpodMediaDevice::removeConfigElements( TQWidget * /*tqparent*/ )
+IpodMediaDevice::removeConfigElements( TQWidget * /*parent*/ )
 {
     delete m_syncStatsCheck;
     m_syncStatsCheck = 0;
@@ -2680,7 +2680,7 @@ IpodMediaDevice::fileDeleted( KIO::Job *job )  //SLOT
         debug() << "file deletion failed: " << job->errorText() << endl;
     }
     m_waitForDeletion = false;
-    m_tqparent->updateStats();
+    m_parent->updateStats();
 }
 
 void
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/ipod/ipodmediadevice.h b/amarok/src/mediadevice/ipod/ipodmediadevice.h
index 8fbebc32..022cb24c 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/ipod/ipodmediadevice.h
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/ipod/ipodmediadevice.h
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ class IpodMediaDevice : public MediaDevice
 
     public:
         IpodMediaDevice();
-        void              init( MediaBrowser* tqparent );
+        void              init( MediaBrowser* parent );
         virtual           ~IpodMediaDevice();
         virtual bool      autoConnect()          { return m_autoConnect; }
         virtual bool      asynchronousTransfer() { return false; /* kernel buffer flushes freeze Amarok */ }
@@ -64,8 +64,8 @@ class IpodMediaDevice : public MediaDevice
 
         bool              isConnected();
 
-        virtual void      addConfigElements( TQWidget *tqparent );
-        virtual void      removeConfigElements( TQWidget *tqparent );
+        virtual void      addConfigElements( TQWidget *parent );
+        virtual void      removeConfigElements( TQWidget *parent );
         virtual void      applyConfig();
         virtual void      loadConfig();
         virtual MediaItem*tagsChanged( MediaItem *item, const MetaBundle &bundle );
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/mtp/mtpmediadevice.cpp b/amarok/src/mediadevice/mtp/mtpmediadevice.cpp
index cd0f68b8..97952ce4 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/mtp/mtpmediadevice.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/mtp/mtpmediadevice.cpp
@@ -112,9 +112,9 @@ MtpMediaDevice::MtpMediaDevice() : MediaDevice()
 }
 
 void
-MtpMediaDevice::init( MediaBrowser *tqparent )
+MtpMediaDevice::init( MediaBrowser *parent )
 {
-    MediaDevice::init( tqparent );
+    MediaDevice::init( parent );
 }
 
 bool
@@ -279,10 +279,10 @@ MediaItem
         parent_id = checkFolderStructure( bundle );
         if( parent_id == 0 )
         {
-            debug() << "Couldn't create new tqparent (" << m_folderStructure << ")" << endl;
+            debug() << "Couldn't create new parent (" << m_folderStructure << ")" << endl;
             Amarok::StatusBar::instance()->shortLongMessage(
                 genericError,
-                i18n( "Cannot create tqparent folder. Check your structure." ),
+                i18n( "Cannot create parent folder. Check your structure." ),
                 KDE::StatusBar::Error
             );
             return 0;
@@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ MtpMediaDevice::getDefaultParentId( void )
             debug() << "Parent folder could not be found. Going to use top level." << endl;
         }
     }
-    // Give up and don't set a tqparent folder, let the device deal with it
+    // Give up and don't set a parent folder, let the device deal with it
     else
     {
         debug() << "No folders found. Going to use top level." << endl;
@@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ LIBMTP_album_t
 
 /**
  * Check (and optionally create) the folder structure to put a
- * track into. Return the (possibly new) tqparent folder ID
+ * track into. Return the (possibly new) parent folder ID
  */
 uint32_t
 MtpMediaDevice::checkFolderStructure( const MetaBundle &bundle, bool create )
@@ -592,12 +592,12 @@ MtpMediaDevice::checkFolderStructure( const MetaBundle &bundle, bool create )
             }
         }
         completePath += (*it).utf8() + '/';
-        // set new tqparent
+        // set new parent
         parent_id = check_folder;
     }
     m_critical_mutex.unlock();
     debug() << "Folder path : " << completePath << endl;
-    // return tqparent
+    // return parent
     return parent_id;
 }
 
@@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ MtpMediaDevice::createFolder( const char *name, uint32_t parent_id )
 
 /**
  * Recursively search the folder list for a matching one under the specified
- * tqparent ID and return the child's ID
+ * parent ID and return the child's ID
  */
 uint32_t
 MtpMediaDevice::subfolderNameToID( const char *name, LIBMTP_folder_t *folderlist, uint32_t parent_id )
@@ -766,10 +766,10 @@ MediaItem
  * Create a new playlist
  */
 MtpMediaItem
-*MtpMediaDevice::newPlaylist( const TQString &name, MediaItem *tqparent, TQPtrList<MediaItem> items )
+*MtpMediaDevice::newPlaylist( const TQString &name, MediaItem *parent, TQPtrList<MediaItem> items )
 {
     DEBUG_BLOCK
-    MtpMediaItem *item = new MtpMediaItem( tqparent, this );
+    MtpMediaItem *item = new MtpMediaItem( parent, this );
     item->setType( MediaItem::PLAYLIST );
     item->setText( 0, name );
     item->setPlaylist( new MtpPlaylist() );
@@ -819,7 +819,7 @@ MtpMediaDevice::addToPlaylist( MediaItem *mlist, MediaItem *after, TQPtrList<Med
             continue;
 
         MtpMediaItem *add;
-        if( it->tqparent() == list )
+        if( it->parent() == list )
         {
             add = it;
             if( after )
@@ -980,10 +980,10 @@ MtpMediaDevice::deleteItemFromDevice(MediaItem* item, int flags )
                 break;
             if( item )
             {
-                MtpMediaItem *tqparent = dynamic_cast<MtpMediaItem *> ( item->tqparent() );
-                if( tqparent && tqparent->type() == MediaItem::PLAYLIST ) {
+                MtpMediaItem *parent = dynamic_cast<MtpMediaItem *> ( item->parent() );
+                if( parent && parent->type() == MediaItem::PLAYLIST ) {
                     delete( item );
-                    playlistFromItem( tqparent );
+                    playlistFromItem( parent );
                 }
             }
             break;
@@ -1121,7 +1121,7 @@ MtpMediaDevice::openDevice( bool silent )
         m_name += " (" + ownername + ')';
 
     m_default_parent_folder = m_device->default_music_folder;
-    debug() << "setting default tqparent : " << m_default_parent_folder << endl;
+    debug() << "setting default parent : " << m_default_parent_folder << endl;
 
     MtpMediaDevice::readMtpMusic();
 
@@ -1341,7 +1341,7 @@ MtpMediaDevice::rmbPressed( TQListViewItem *qitem, const TQPoint &point, int )
 
                 if( items->count() > 100 )
                 {
-                    int button = KMessageBox::warningContinueCancel( m_tqparent,
+                    int button = KMessageBox::warningContinueCancel( m_parent,
                             i18n( "<p>You are updating cover art for 1 track. This may take some time.",
                                 "<p>You are updating cover art for %n tracks. This may take some time.",
                                 items->count()
@@ -1363,13 +1363,13 @@ MtpMediaDevice::rmbPressed( TQListViewItem *qitem, const TQPoint &point, int )
  * Add gui elements to the device configuration
  */
 void
-MtpMediaDevice::addConfigElements( TQWidget *tqparent )
+MtpMediaDevice::addConfigElements( TQWidget *parent )
 {
 
-    m_folderLabel = new TQLabel( tqparent );
+    m_folderLabel = new TQLabel( parent );
     m_folderLabel->setText( i18n( "Folder structure:" ) );
 
-    m_folderStructureBox = new TQLineEdit( tqparent );
+    m_folderStructureBox = new TQLineEdit( parent );
     m_folderStructureBox->setText( m_folderStructure );
     TQToolTip::add( m_folderStructureBox,
         i18n( "Files copied to the device will be placed in this folder." ) + '\n'
@@ -1384,9 +1384,9 @@ MtpMediaDevice::addConfigElements( TQWidget *tqparent )
  * Remove gui elements from the device configuration
  */
 void
-MtpMediaDevice::removeConfigElements( TQWidget *tqparent)
+MtpMediaDevice::removeConfigElements( TQWidget *parent)
 {
-    Q_UNUSED(tqparent)
+    Q_UNUSED(parent)
 
     delete m_folderStructureBox;
     m_folderStructureBox = 0;
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/mtp/mtpmediadevice.h b/amarok/src/mediadevice/mtp/mtpmediadevice.h
index e8a595a6..1cf4210d 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/mtp/mtpmediadevice.h
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/mtp/mtpmediadevice.h
@@ -91,14 +91,14 @@ class MtpAlbum {
 class MtpMediaItem : public MediaItem
 {
     public:
-        MtpMediaItem( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 )
-            : MediaItem( tqparent, after ) {}
-        MtpMediaItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 )
-            : MediaItem( tqparent, after ) {}
-        MtpMediaItem( TQListView *tqparent, MediaDevice *dev )
-            : MediaItem( tqparent ) { init( dev ); }
-        MtpMediaItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, MediaDevice *dev )
-            : MediaItem( tqparent ) { init( dev ); }
+        MtpMediaItem( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 )
+            : MediaItem( parent, after ) {}
+        MtpMediaItem( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 )
+            : MediaItem( parent, after ) {}
+        MtpMediaItem( TQListView *parent, MediaDevice *dev )
+            : MediaItem( parent ) { init( dev ); }
+        MtpMediaItem( TQListViewItem *parent, MediaDevice *dev )
+            : MediaItem( parent ) { init( dev ); }
 
         void init( MediaDevice *dev )
         {
@@ -135,13 +135,13 @@ class MtpMediaDevice : public MediaDevice
         LIBMTP_mtpdevice_t      *current_device();
         void                    setDisconnected();
         virtual void            rmbPressed( TQListViewItem *qitem, const TQPoint &point, int arg1 );
-        virtual void            init( MediaBrowser* tqparent );
+        virtual void            init( MediaBrowser* parent );
         virtual TQStringList     supportedFiletypes();
         void                    setFolders( LIBMTP_folder_t *folders );
         void                    cancelTransfer();
         void                    customClicked();
-        virtual void            addConfigElements( TQWidget *tqparent );
-        virtual void            removeConfigElements( TQWidget *tqparent );
+        virtual void            addConfigElements( TQWidget *parent );
+        virtual void            removeConfigElements( TQWidget *parent );
         virtual void            applyConfig();
         virtual void            loadConfig();
         static int              progressCallback( uint64_t const sent, uint64_t const total, void const * const data );
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/njb/njbmediadevice.cpp b/amarok/src/mediadevice/njb/njbmediadevice.cpp
index 542e2313..ea07df5f 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/njb/njbmediadevice.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/njb/njbmediadevice.cpp
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ NjbMediaDevice::downloadSelectedItems()
         path = destDir.path();
         if( it->type() == MediaItem::TRACK )
         {
-            dynamic_cast<MediaBrowser *>( tqparent() )->queue()->addURL(path, dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(it) );
+            dynamic_cast<MediaBrowser *>( parent() )->queue()->addURL(path, dynamic_cast<MediaItem *>(it) );
 
         }
     }
@@ -510,12 +510,12 @@ NjbMediaDevice::copyTrackFromDevice( MediaItem *item )
 }
 
 MediaItem*
-NjbMediaDevice::newPlaylist(const TQString& name, MediaItem* tqparent, TQPtrList< MediaItem > items)
+NjbMediaDevice::newPlaylist(const TQString& name, MediaItem* parent, TQPtrList< MediaItem > items)
 {
     DEBUG_BLOCK
 
-    Q_UNUSED(tqparent);
-    //MediaItem* newplaylist = new MediaItem(tqparent);
+    Q_UNUSED(parent);
+    //MediaItem* newplaylist = new MediaItem(parent);
 
     NjbPlaylist playlist;
     int status = playlist.setName( name );
@@ -594,9 +594,9 @@ NjbMediaDevice::cancelTransfer()
 }
 
 void
-NjbMediaDevice::init(MediaBrowser* tqparent)
+NjbMediaDevice::init(MediaBrowser* parent)
 {
-    MediaDevice::init(tqparent);
+    MediaDevice::init(parent);
 }
 
 void
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/njb/njbmediadevice.h b/amarok/src/mediadevice/njb/njbmediadevice.h
index bcf29d09..5d81178d 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/njb/njbmediadevice.h
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/njb/njbmediadevice.h
@@ -64,10 +64,10 @@ extern trackValueList* theTracks;
 class NjbMediaItem : public MediaItem
 {
     public:
-        NjbMediaItem( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 ) : MediaItem( tqparent, after )
+        NjbMediaItem( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 ) : MediaItem( parent, after )
         {}
 
-        NjbMediaItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 ) : MediaItem( tqparent, after )
+        NjbMediaItem( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 ) : MediaItem( parent, after )
         {}
 
         ~NjbMediaItem()
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ class NjbMediaDevice : public MediaDevice
 
         //    virtual bool needsManualConfig();
 
-        virtual MediaItem* newPlaylist(const TQString& name, MediaItem* tqparent, TQPtrList< MediaItem > items);
+        virtual MediaItem* newPlaylist(const TQString& name, MediaItem* parent, TQPtrList< MediaItem > items);
 
         //    virtual MediaItem* tagsChanged(MediaItem* item, const MetaBundle& changed);
 
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ class NjbMediaDevice : public MediaDevice
         virtual void addToDirectory(MediaItem* directory, TQPtrList< MediaItem > items) { Q_UNUSED(directory) Q_UNUSED(items) }
         virtual void addToPlaylist(MediaItem* playlist, MediaItem* after, TQPtrList< MediaItem > items);
         virtual void applyConfig();
-        virtual void init(MediaBrowser* tqparent);
+        virtual void init(MediaBrowser* parent);
         virtual void loadConfig();
         virtual void removeConfigElements(TQWidget* arg1);
         virtual void rmbPressed(TQListViewItem* qitem, const TQPoint& point, int arg1);
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/riokarma/riokarmamediadevice.cpp b/amarok/src/mediadevice/riokarma/riokarmamediadevice.cpp
index 954053cf..7dc83c33 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/riokarma/riokarmamediadevice.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/riokarma/riokarmamediadevice.cpp
@@ -60,9 +60,9 @@ RioKarmaMediaDevice::RioKarmaMediaDevice() : MediaDevice()
 }
 
 void
-RioKarmaMediaDevice::init( MediaBrowser *tqparent )
+RioKarmaMediaDevice::init( MediaBrowser *parent )
 {
-    MediaDevice::init( tqparent );
+    MediaDevice::init( parent );
 }
 
 bool
@@ -165,10 +165,10 @@ MediaItem
  * @note Playlists not implemented yet... :-)
  */
 RioKarmaMediaItem
-*RioKarmaMediaDevice::newPlaylist( const TQString &name, MediaItem *tqparent, TQPtrList<MediaItem> items )
+*RioKarmaMediaDevice::newPlaylist( const TQString &name, MediaItem *parent, TQPtrList<MediaItem> items )
 {
     Q_UNUSED( name );
-    Q_UNUSED( tqparent );
+    Q_UNUSED( parent );
     Q_UNUSED( items );
     return 0;
 }
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediadevice/riokarma/riokarmamediadevice.h b/amarok/src/mediadevice/riokarma/riokarmamediadevice.h
index 0cbf61bd..54d0dfec 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediadevice/riokarma/riokarmamediadevice.h
+++ b/amarok/src/mediadevice/riokarma/riokarmamediadevice.h
@@ -55,9 +55,9 @@ class RioKarmaTrack {
 class RioKarmaMediaItem : public MediaItem
 {
     public:
-        RioKarmaMediaItem( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 ) : MediaItem( tqparent, after )
+        RioKarmaMediaItem( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 ) : MediaItem( parent, after )
         {}
-        RioKarmaMediaItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 ) : MediaItem( tqparent, after )
+        RioKarmaMediaItem( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after = 0 ) : MediaItem( parent, after )
         {}
         ~RioKarmaMediaItem()
         {
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ class RioKarmaMediaDevice : public MediaDevice
         int                         current_id();
         void                        setDisconnected();
         virtual void                rmbPressed( TQListViewItem *qitem, const TQPoint &point, int arg1 );
-        virtual void                init( MediaBrowser *tqparent );
+        virtual void                init( MediaBrowser *parent );
         virtual TQStringList         supportedFiletypes();
 
     protected:
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediumpluginmanager.cpp b/amarok/src/mediumpluginmanager.cpp
index efd00d12..d2f3ba1a 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediumpluginmanager.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/mediumpluginmanager.cpp
@@ -376,8 +376,8 @@ ManualDeviceAdder::getMedium( bool recreate )
     return m_newMed;
 }
 
-MediaDeviceConfig::MediaDeviceConfig( Medium *medium, MediumPluginManager *mgr, const bool nographics, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
-: TQHBox( tqparent, name )
+MediaDeviceConfig::MediaDeviceConfig( Medium *medium, MediumPluginManager *mgr, const bool nographics, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+: TQHBox( parent, name )
 , m_manager( mgr )
 , m_medium( medium )
 , m_configButton( 0 )
diff --git a/amarok/src/mediumpluginmanager.h b/amarok/src/mediumpluginmanager.h
index 3a0a5bcd..4e1461d8 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mediumpluginmanager.h
+++ b/amarok/src/mediumpluginmanager.h
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ class MediaDeviceConfig : public TQHBox
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        MediaDeviceConfig( Medium *medium, MediumPluginManager *mgr, const bool nographics=false, TQWidget *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 );
+        MediaDeviceConfig( Medium *medium, MediumPluginManager *mgr, const bool nographics=false, TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0 );
         ~MediaDeviceConfig();
         TQString oldPlugin();
         void setOldPlugin( const TQString &oldPlugin );
diff --git a/amarok/src/metabundle.cpp b/amarok/src/metabundle.cpp
index 59b9fde4..be64494b 100644
--- a/amarok/src/metabundle.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/metabundle.cpp
@@ -728,7 +728,7 @@ void MetaBundle::copyFrom( const PodcastEpisodeBundle &peb )
     setTitle( peb.title() );
     setArtist( peb.author() );
     PodcastChannelBundle pcb;
-    if( CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastChannelBundle( peb.tqparent(), &pcb ) )
+    if( CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastChannelBundle( peb.parent(), &pcb ) )
     {
         if( !pcb.title().isEmpty() )
             setAlbum( pcb.title() );
@@ -1871,7 +1871,7 @@ void PodcastEpisodeBundle::detach()
 {
     m_url = Amarok::detachedKURL( m_url );
     m_localUrl = Amarok::detachedKURL( m_localUrl );
-    m_tqparent = Amarok::detachedKURL( m_tqparent );
+    m_parent = Amarok::detachedKURL( m_parent );
 
     m_author = TQDeepCopy<TQString>(m_author);
     m_title = TQDeepCopy<TQString>(m_title);
diff --git a/amarok/src/metadata/m4a/mp4propsproxy.h b/amarok/src/metadata/m4a/mp4propsproxy.h
index c6b6f9df..0ea29e2b 100644
--- a/amarok/src/metadata/m4a/mp4propsproxy.h
+++ b/amarok/src/metadata/m4a/mp4propsproxy.h
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ namespace TagLib
   namespace MP4
   {
     //! Mp4PropsProxy is used to access the stsd box and mvhd box directly
-    /*! this class works as a shortcut to avoid stepping through all tqparent boxes
+    /*! this class works as a shortcut to avoid stepping through all parent boxes
      *  to access the boxes in question
      */
     class Mp4PropsProxy
diff --git a/amarok/src/moodbar.cpp b/amarok/src/moodbar.cpp
index 2cbdce5f..ac1d51f0 100644
--- a/amarok/src/moodbar.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/moodbar.cpp
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@
 //               dataExists() or load() is called.  Note that load()
 //               will return immediately unless the state is Unloaded.
 //   CantLoad:   For some reason we know that we'll never be able to
-//               load the Moodbar, for instance if the tqparent bundle
+//               load the Moodbar, for instance if the parent bundle
 //               describes a streaming source.  Most methods will return
 //               immediately in this state.
 //   JobQueued:  At some point load() was called, so we queued a job with
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@
 // aren't displayed in the GUI.
 //
 // Important members:
-//   m_bundle: link to the tqparent bundle
+//   m_bundle: link to the parent bundle
 //   m_data:   if we are loaded, this is the contents of the .mood file
 //   m_pixmap: the last time draw() was called, we cached what we drew
 //             here
diff --git a/amarok/src/moodbar.h b/amarok/src/moodbar.h
index 4ae13cfb..c71495b8 100644
--- a/amarok/src/moodbar.h
+++ b/amarok/src/moodbar.h
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ signals:
   
 private:
   // Undefined!  We can't construct unless we know what
-  // *our* tqparent bundle is.
+  // *our* parent bundle is.
   Moodbar( const Moodbar& );
 
   bool readFile( void );
diff --git a/amarok/src/multitabbar.cpp b/amarok/src/multitabbar.cpp
index fb450f33..b11b3a67 100644
--- a/amarok/src/multitabbar.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/multitabbar.cpp
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ class MultiTabBarButtonPrivate
 };
 
 
-MultiTabBarInternal::MultiTabBarInternal( TQWidget *tqparent, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarMode bm ) : TQScrollView( tqparent )
+MultiTabBarInternal::MultiTabBarInternal( TQWidget *parent, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarMode bm ) : TQScrollView( parent )
 {
     m_expandedTabSize = -1;
     m_showActiveTabTexts = false;
@@ -508,8 +508,8 @@ uint MultiTabBarInternal::sizePerTab()
 
 
 MultiTabBarButton::MultiTabBarButton( const TQPixmap& pic, const TQString& text, TQPopupMenu *popup,
-                                      int id, TQWidget *tqparent, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarPosition pos, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarStyle style )
-        : TQPushButton( TQIconSet(), text, tqparent )
+                                      int id, TQWidget *parent, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarPosition pos, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarStyle style )
+        : TQPushButton( TQIconSet(), text, parent )
         , m_position( pos )
         , m_style( style )
         , m_id( id )
@@ -532,8 +532,8 @@ MultiTabBarButton::MultiTabBarButton( const TQPixmap& pic, const TQString& text,
 }
 
 MultiTabBarButton::MultiTabBarButton( const TQString& text, TQPopupMenu *popup,
-                                      int id, TQWidget *tqparent, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarPosition pos, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarStyle style )
-        : TQPushButton( TQIconSet(), text, tqparent ), m_style( style )
+                                      int id, TQWidget *parent, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarPosition pos, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarStyle style )
+        : TQPushButton( TQIconSet(), text, parent ), m_style( style )
         , m_animCount( 0 )
         , m_animTimer( new TQTimer( this ) )
         , m_dragSwitchTimer( new TQTimer( this ) )
@@ -720,9 +720,9 @@ TQSize MultiTabBarButton::tqsizeHint() const
 
 
 MultiTabBarTab::MultiTabBarTab( const TQPixmap& pic, const TQString& text,
-                                int id, TQWidget *tqparent, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarPosition pos,
+                                int id, TQWidget *parent, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarPosition pos,
                                 MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarStyle style )
-        : MultiTabBarButton( text, 0, id, tqparent, pos, style ),
+        : MultiTabBarButton( text, 0, id, parent, pos, style ),
         m_visible(true),
         m_showActiveTabText( false )
 {
@@ -1142,7 +1142,7 @@ TQColor MultiTabBarTab::blendColors( const TQColor& color1, const TQColor& color
 
 
 
-MultiTabBar::MultiTabBar( MultiTabBarMode bm, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) : TQWidget( tqparent, name )
+MultiTabBar::MultiTabBar( MultiTabBarMode bm, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) : TQWidget( parent, name )
 {
     m_buttons.setAutoDelete( false );
     if ( bm == Vertical ) {
diff --git a/amarok/src/multitabbar.h b/amarok/src/multitabbar.h
index b94020e9..b63d90ae 100644
--- a/amarok/src/multitabbar.h
+++ b/amarok/src/multitabbar.h
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ class MultiTabBar: public TQWidget
         */
         enum MultiTabBarStyle{VSNET = 0, KDEV3 = 1, KONTQSBC = 2, KDEV3ICON = 3, AMAROK = 4, STYLELAST = 0xffff};
 
-        MultiTabBar( MultiTabBarMode bm, TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+        MultiTabBar( MultiTabBarMode bm, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
         virtual ~MultiTabBar();
 
         /**
@@ -177,9 +177,9 @@ class MultiTabBarButton: public TQPushButton
   TQ_OBJECT
     public:
         MultiTabBarButton( const TQPixmap& pic, const TQString&, TQPopupMenu *popup,
-                           int id, TQWidget *tqparent, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarPosition pos, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarStyle style );
+                           int id, TQWidget *parent, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarPosition pos, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarStyle style );
         MultiTabBarButton( const TQString&, TQPopupMenu *popup,
-                           int id, TQWidget *tqparent, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarPosition pos, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarStyle style );
+                           int id, TQWidget *parent, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarPosition pos, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarStyle style );
         virtual ~MultiTabBarButton();
         int id() const;
 
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ class MultiTabBarTab: public MultiTabBarButton
         Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
     public:
-        MultiTabBarTab( const TQPixmap& pic, const TQString&, int id, TQWidget *tqparent,
+        MultiTabBarTab( const TQPixmap& pic, const TQString&, int id, TQWidget *parent,
                         MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarPosition pos, MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarStyle style );
         virtual ~MultiTabBarTab();
         /**
diff --git a/amarok/src/multitabbar_p.h b/amarok/src/multitabbar_p.h
index b11cd58b..74cf8fad 100644
--- a/amarok/src/multitabbar_p.h
+++ b/amarok/src/multitabbar_p.h
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ class MultiTabBarInternal: public TQScrollView
         Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
 public:
-        MultiTabBarInternal(TQWidget *tqparent,MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarMode bm);
+        MultiTabBarInternal(TQWidget *parent,MultiTabBar::MultiTabBarMode bm);
         int appendTab(const TQPixmap &,int=-1,const TQString& =TQString(), const TQString&identifier=TQString());
         MultiTabBarTab *tab(int) const;
         void removeTab(int);
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ protected:
         /**
         * [contentsM|m]ousePressEvent are reimplemented from TQScrollView
         * in order to ignore all mouseEvents on the viewport, so that the
-        * tqparent can handle them.
+        * parent can handle them.
         */
         virtual void contentsMousePressEvent(TQMouseEvent *);
         virtual void mousePressEvent(TQMouseEvent *);
diff --git a/amarok/src/mydiroperator.cpp b/amarok/src/mydiroperator.cpp
index 0233bb0e..e00878d9 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mydiroperator.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/mydiroperator.cpp
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 
 #include <tqdir.h>
 
-MyDirOperator::MyDirOperator ( const KURL &url, TQWidget *tqparent, Medium *medium ) : KDirOperator( url, tqparent )
+MyDirOperator::MyDirOperator ( const KURL &url, TQWidget *parent, Medium *medium ) : KDirOperator( url, parent )
 {
     m_medium = medium;
     setDirLister( new MyDirLister( true ) );
diff --git a/amarok/src/mydiroperator.h b/amarok/src/mydiroperator.h
index c9787648..8c0134b4 100644
--- a/amarok/src/mydiroperator.h
+++ b/amarok/src/mydiroperator.h
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ class MyDirOperator : public KDirOperator {
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        MyDirOperator( const KURL &url, TQWidget *tqparent, Medium *medium = 0 );
+        MyDirOperator( const KURL &url, TQWidget *parent, Medium *medium = 0 );
 
     public slots:
         //reimplemented due to a bug in KDirOperator::activatedMenu ( KDE 3.4.2 ) - See Bug #103305
diff --git a/amarok/src/organizecollectiondialog.ui.h b/amarok/src/organizecollectiondialog.ui.h
index bc1c7754..1d2f517b 100644
--- a/amarok/src/organizecollectiondialog.ui.h
+++ b/amarok/src/organizecollectiondialog.ui.h
@@ -201,9 +201,9 @@ void OrganizeCollectionDialog::slotDetails()
         formatHelp->hide();
     }
 
-    if( dynamic_cast<TQWidget *>(tqparent()) ) {
-        TQT_TQWIDGET(tqparent())->adjustSize();
-        TQT_TQWIDGET(tqparent())->updateGeometry();
+    if( dynamic_cast<TQWidget *>(parent()) ) {
+        TQT_TQWIDGET(parent())->adjustSize();
+        TQT_TQWIDGET(parent())->updateGeometry();
     }
 }
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/osd.cpp b/amarok/src/osd.cpp
index 187340ea..cc475524 100644
--- a/amarok/src/osd.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/osd.cpp
@@ -45,8 +45,8 @@ namespace ShadowEngine
 #define MOODBAR_HEIGHT 20
 
 
-OSDWidget::OSDWidget( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
-        : TQWidget( tqparent, name, WType_TopLevel | WNoAutoErase | WStyle_Customize | WX11BypassWM | WStyle_StaysOnTop )
+OSDWidget::OSDWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+        : TQWidget( parent, name, WType_TopLevel | WNoAutoErase | WStyle_Customize | WX11BypassWM | WStyle_StaysOnTop )
         , m_duration( 2000 )
         , m_timer( new TQTimer( this ) )
         , m_tqalignment( Middle )
@@ -284,16 +284,16 @@ OSDWidget::render( const uint M, const TQSize &size )
     const uint xround = (M * 200) / size.width();
     const uint yround = (M * 200) / size.height();
 
-    {   /// apply the tqmask
-        static TQBitmap tqmask;
+    {   /// apply the mask
+        static TQBitmap mask;
 
-        tqmask.resize( size );
-        tqmask.fill( TQt::black );
+        mask.resize( size );
+        mask.fill( TQt::black );
 
-        TQPainter p( &tqmask );
+        TQPainter p( &mask );
         p.setBrush( TQt::white );
         p.drawRoundRect( rect, xround, yround );
-        setMask( tqmask );
+        setMask( mask );
     }
 
     TQColor shadowColor;
@@ -370,11 +370,11 @@ OSDWidget::render( const uint M, const TQSize &size )
 
         KPixmap pixmapGradient;
         { // gradient
-            TQBitmap tqmask;
-            tqmask.resize( vol.size() );
-            tqmask.fill( TQt::black );
+            TQBitmap mask;
+            mask.resize( vol.size() );
+            mask.fill( TQt::black );
 
-            TQPainter p( &tqmask );
+            TQPainter p( &mask );
             p.setBrush( TQt::white );
             p.drawRoundRect ( 3, 3, vol.width() - 6, vol.height() - 6,
                 M * 300 / vol.width(), 99 );
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ OSDWidget::render( const uint M, const TQSize &size )
             pixmapGradient = TQPixmap( vol.size() );
             KPixmapEffect::gradient( pixmapGradient, tqcolorGroup().background(),
                 tqcolorGroup().highlight(), KPixmapEffect::EllipticGradient );
-            pixmapGradient.setMask( tqmask );
+            pixmapGradient.setMask( mask );
         }
 
         if( m_translucency )
@@ -396,11 +396,11 @@ OSDWidget::render( const uint M, const TQSize &size )
             vol.fill( backgroundColor() );
 
         { // vol ( bg-alpha )
-            static TQBitmap tqmask;
-            tqmask.resize( vol.size() );
-            tqmask.fill( TQt::white );
+            static TQBitmap mask;
+            mask.resize( vol.size() );
+            mask.fill( TQt::white );
 
-            TQPainter p( &tqmask );
+            TQPainter p( &mask );
             p.setBrush( TQt::black );
             p.drawRoundRect ( 1, 1, rect.width()-2, rect.height() + fontMetrics().height() / 4 - 2,
                 M * 300 / vol.width(), 99 );
@@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ OSDWidget::render( const uint M, const TQSize &size )
             p.drawRoundRect ( 3, 3, vol.width() - 6, vol.height() - 6,
                 M * 300 / vol.width(), 99 );
             p.end();
-            vol.setMask( tqmask );
+            vol.setMask( mask );
         }
         buf.fill( backgroundColor().dark() );
 
@@ -544,8 +544,8 @@ namespace Amarok
     TQImage icon() { return TQImage( KIconLoader().iconPath( "amarok", -KIcon::SizeHuge ) ); }
 }
 
-OSDPreviewWidget::OSDPreviewWidget( TQWidget *tqparent )
-        : OSDWidget( tqparent, "osdpreview" )
+OSDPreviewWidget::OSDPreviewWidget( TQWidget *parent )
+        : OSDWidget( parent, "osdpreview" )
         , m_dragging( false )
 {
     m_text = i18n( "OSD Preview - drag to reposition" );
@@ -841,7 +841,7 @@ Amarok::OSD::slotImageChanged( const TQString &remoteURL )
     if( CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastEpisodeBundle( url, &peb ) )
     {
         PodcastChannelBundle pcb;
-        if( CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastChannelBundle( peb.tqparent().url(), &pcb ) )
+        if( CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastChannelBundle( peb.parent().url(), &pcb ) )
         {
             if( pcb.imageURL().url() == remoteURL )
             {
diff --git a/amarok/src/osd.h b/amarok/src/osd.h
index f8c3cabc..cfa5cf70 100644
--- a/amarok/src/osd.h
+++ b/amarok/src/osd.h
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ class OSDWidget : public TQWidget
     public:
         enum Alignment { Left, Middle, Center, Right };
 
-        OSDWidget( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name = "osd" );
+        OSDWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name = "osd" );
 
         /** resets the colours to defaults */
         void unsetColors();
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ class OSDPreviewWidget : public OSDWidget
   TQ_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    OSDPreviewWidget( TQWidget *tqparent );
+    OSDPreviewWidget( TQWidget *parent );
 
     int screen()    { return m_screen; }
     int tqalignment() { return m_tqalignment; }
diff --git a/amarok/src/playerwindow.cpp b/amarok/src/playerwindow.cpp
index 3e501d3d..91e03f9f 100644
--- a/amarok/src/playerwindow.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/playerwindow.cpp
@@ -71,16 +71,16 @@ using Amarok::getPNG;
 //fairly pointless template which was designed to make the ctor clearer,
 //but probably achieves the opposite. Still, the code is neater..
 template<class W> static inline W*
-createWidget( const TQRect &r, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name = 0, TQt::WFlags f = 0 )
+createWidget( const TQRect &r, TQWidget *parent, const char *name = 0, TQt::WFlags f = 0 )
 {
-    W *w = new W( tqparent, name, f );
+    W *w = new W( parent, name, f );
     w->setGeometry( r );
     return w;
 }
 
 
-PlayerWidget::PlayerWidget( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, bool enablePlaylist )
-    : TQWidget( tqparent, name, TQt::WType_TopLevel )
+PlayerWidget::PlayerWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool enablePlaylist )
+    : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WType_TopLevel )
     , EngineObserver( EngineController::instance() )
     , m_minimalView( false )
     , m_pAnimTimer( new TQTimer( this ) )
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ PlayerWidget::PlayerWidget( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, bool enablePla
     // Sets caption and icon correctly (needed e.g. for GNOME)
     kapp->setTopWidget( this );
 
-    tqparent->installEventFilter( this ); //for hidePLaylistWithMainWindow mode
+    parent->installEventFilter( this ); //for hidePLaylistWithMainWindow mode
 
     //if this is the first time we have ever been run we let KWin place us
     if ( AmarokConfig::playerPos() != TQPoint(-1,-1) )
@@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ PlayerWidget::PlayerWidget( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, bool enablePla
 
     m_pPlaylistButton = new IconButton( this, "pl", TQT_SIGNAL(playlistToggled( bool )) );
     m_pPlaylistButton->setGeometry( 5,85, 28,13 );
-    m_pPlaylistButton->setOn( tqparent->isShown() || enablePlaylist );
+    m_pPlaylistButton->setOn( parent->isShown() || enablePlaylist );
 
 
     m_pDescription = createWidget<TQLabel>( TQRect(4,6, 250,10), this );
@@ -549,7 +549,7 @@ bool PlayerWidget::event( TQEvent *e )
     case 6/*TQEvent::KeyPress*/:
         if (TQT_TQKEYEVENT(e)->key() == TQt::Key_D/* && (m_pAnalyzer->inherits(TQGLWIDGET_OBJECT_NAME_STRING)*/)
         {
-            if( m_pAnalyzer->tqparent() )
+            if( m_pAnalyzer->parent() )
             {
                 m_pAnalyzer->reparent( 0, TQPoint(50,50), true );
                 m_pAnalyzer->setCaption( kapp->makeStdCaption( i18n("Analyzer") ) );
@@ -676,7 +676,7 @@ bool PlayerWidget::event( TQEvent *e )
 bool
 PlayerWidget::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e )
 {
-    //NOTE we only monitor for tqparent() - which is the PlaylistWindow
+    //NOTE we only monitor for parent() - which is the PlaylistWindow
 
     if( TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(m_pAnalyzer) )
     {
@@ -839,8 +839,8 @@ void PlayerWidget::slotShowEqualizer( bool show ) //SLOT
 
 #include <kiconeffect.h>
 #include <kimageeffect.h>
-NavButton::NavButton( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &icon, KAction *action )
-    : TQToolButton( tqparent )
+NavButton::NavButton( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &icon, KAction *action )
+    : TQToolButton( parent )
     , m_glowIndex( 0 )
 {
     // Prevent flicker
@@ -925,19 +925,19 @@ void NavButton::drawButtonLabel( TQPainter* p )
 // CLASS IconButton
 //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-IconButton::IconButton( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &icon, const char *signal )
-    : TQButton( tqparent )
+IconButton::IconButton( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &icon, const char *signal )
+    : TQButton( parent )
     , m_up(   getPNG( icon + "_active2" ) ) //TODO rename files better (like the right way round for one!)
     , m_down( getPNG( icon + "_inactive2" ) )
 {
-    connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL(toggled( bool )), tqparent, signal );
+    connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL(toggled( bool )), parent, signal );
 
     setToggleButton( true );
     setFocusPolicy( TQ_NoFocus ); //we have no way to show focus on these widgets currently
 }
 
-IconButton::IconButton( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &icon, TQObject* receiver, const char *slot )
-    : TQButton( tqparent )
+IconButton::IconButton( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &icon, TQObject* receiver, const char *slot )
+    : TQButton( parent )
     , m_up(   getPNG( icon + "_active2" ) ) //TODO rename files better (like the right way round for one!)
     , m_down( getPNG( icon + "_inactive2" ) )
 {
diff --git a/amarok/src/playlist.cpp b/amarok/src/playlist.cpp
index f881c0e8..e8d1698e 100644
--- a/amarok/src/playlist.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/playlist.cpp
@@ -163,8 +163,8 @@ namespace Glow
 TQMutex* Playlist::s_dynamicADTMutex = new TQMutex();
 Playlist *Playlist::s_instance = 0;
 
-Playlist::Playlist( TQWidget *tqparent )
-        : KListView( tqparent, "ThePlaylist" )
+Playlist::Playlist( TQWidget *parent )
+        : KListView( parent, "ThePlaylist" )
         , EngineObserver( EngineController::instance() )
         , m_startupTime_t( TQDateTime::tqcurrentDateTime().toTime_t() )
         , m_oldestTime_t( CollectionDB::instance()->query( "SELECT MIN( createdate ) FROM statistics;" ).first().toInt() )
@@ -2425,8 +2425,8 @@ Playlist::contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e )
 {
     DEBUG_BLOCK
 
-    //NOTE tqparent is always 0 currently, but we support it in case we start using trees
-    TQListViewItem *tqparent = 0;
+    //NOTE parent is always 0 currently, but we support it in case we start using trees
+    TQListViewItem *parent = 0;
     TQListViewItem *after  = m_marker;
 
     //make sure to disable only if in dynamic mode and you're inserting 
@@ -2448,13 +2448,13 @@ Playlist::contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e )
     }
 
     if( !after )
-        findDrop( e->pos(), tqparent, after ); //shouldn't happen, but you never know!
+        findDrop( e->pos(), parent, after ); //shouldn't happen, but you never know!
 
     slotEraseMarker();
 
     if ( e->source() == viewport() ) {
         setSorting( NO_SORT ); //disableSorting and saveState()
-        movableDropEvent( tqparent, after );
+        movableDropEvent( parent, after );
         TQPtrList<TQListViewItem> items = selectedItems();
         if( dynamicMode() && after )
         {
@@ -4291,10 +4291,10 @@ TQValueList<int> Playlist::visibleColumns() const
 }
 
 MetaBundle::ColumnMask Playlist::getVisibleColumnMask() const {
-    MetaBundle::ColumnMask tqmask = 0;
+    MetaBundle::ColumnMask mask = 0;
     for( int i = 0, n = columns(); i < n; ++i)
-        if( columnWidth( i ) ) tqmask = tqmask | (1 << i);
-    return tqmask;
+        if( columnWidth( i ) ) mask = mask | (1 << i);
+    return mask;
 }
 
 
@@ -4770,8 +4770,8 @@ Playlist::showTagDialog( TQPtrList<TQListViewItem> items )
     class CustomColumnDialog : public KDialog
     {
     public:
-        CustomColumnDialog( TQWidget *tqparent )
-            : KDialog( tqparent )
+        CustomColumnDialog( TQWidget *parent )
+            : KDialog( parent )
         {
             TQLabel *textLabel1, *textLabel2, *textLabel3;
             TQLineEdit *lineEdit1, *lineEdit2;
diff --git a/amarok/src/playlist.h b/amarok/src/playlist.h
index 6e39f05c..66ad6aa0 100644
--- a/amarok/src/playlist.h
+++ b/amarok/src/playlist.h
@@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ class PlaylistIterator : public TQListViewItemIterator
 public:
     PlaylistIterator( TQListViewItem *item, int flags = 0 )
         //TQListViewItemIterator is not great and doesn't allow you to see everything if you
-        //tqmask both Visible and Invisible :( instead just visible items are returned
+        //mask both Visible and Invisible :( instead just visible items are returned
         : TQListViewItemIterator( item, flags == All ? 0 : flags | Visible  )
     {}
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/playlistbrowser.cpp b/amarok/src/playlistbrowser.cpp
index 8f424f18..3d74d65f 100644
--- a/amarok/src/playlistbrowser.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/playlistbrowser.cpp
@@ -460,18 +460,18 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::loadCoolStreams()
     }
 }
 
-void PlaylistBrowser::addStream( TQListViewItem *tqparent )
+void PlaylistBrowser::addStream( TQListViewItem *parent )
 {
     StreamEditor dialog( this, i18n( "Radio Stream" ), TQString() );
     dialog.setCaption( i18n( "Add Radio Stream" ) );
 
-    if( !tqparent ) tqparent = static_cast<TQListViewItem*>(m_streamsCategory);
+    if( !parent ) parent = static_cast<TQListViewItem*>(m_streamsCategory);
 
     if( dialog.exec() == TQDialog::Accepted )
     {
-        new StreamEntry( tqparent, 0, dialog.url(), dialog.name() );
-        tqparent->sortChildItems( 0, true );
-        tqparent->setOpen( true );
+        new StreamEntry( parent, 0, dialog.url(), dialog.name() );
+        parent->sortChildItems( 0, true );
+        parent->setOpen( true );
 
         saveStreams();
     }
@@ -582,23 +582,23 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::loadLastfmStreams( const bool subscriber /*false*/ )
     }
 }
 
-void PlaylistBrowser::addLastFmRadio( TQListViewItem *tqparent )
+void PlaylistBrowser::addLastFmRadio( TQListViewItem *parent )
 {
     StreamEditor dialog( this, i18n( "Last.fm Radio" ), TQString() );
     dialog.setCaption( i18n( "Add Last.fm Radio" ) );
 
-    if( !tqparent ) tqparent = static_cast<TQListViewItem*>(m_lastfmCategory);
+    if( !parent ) parent = static_cast<TQListViewItem*>(m_lastfmCategory);
 
     if( dialog.exec() == TQDialog::Accepted )
     {
-        new LastFmEntry( tqparent, 0, dialog.url(), dialog.name() );
-        tqparent->sortChildItems( 0, true );
-        tqparent->setOpen( true );
+        new LastFmEntry( parent, 0, dialog.url(), dialog.name() );
+        parent->sortChildItems( 0, true );
+        parent->setOpen( true );
         saveLastFm();
     }
 }
 
-void PlaylistBrowser::addLastFmCustomRadio( TQListViewItem *tqparent )
+void PlaylistBrowser::addLastFmCustomRadio( TQListViewItem *parent )
 {
     TQString token = LastFm::Controller::createCustomStation();
     if( token.isEmpty() ) return;
@@ -609,7 +609,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::addLastFmCustomRadio( TQListViewItem *tqparent )
 
     TQString name = LastFm::Controller::stationDescription( text );
     name.replace( "%252", "/" );
-    new LastFmEntry( tqparent, 0, url, name );
+    new LastFmEntry( parent, 0, url, name );
     saveLastFm();
 }
 
@@ -651,18 +651,18 @@ TQString PlaylistBrowser::smartplaylistBrowserCache() const
     return Amarok::saveLocation() + "smartplaylistbrowser_save.xml";
 }
 
-void PlaylistBrowser::addSmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent ) //SLOT
+void PlaylistBrowser::addSmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *parent ) //SLOT
 {
     if( CollectionDB::instance()->isEmpty() || !m_smartCategory )
         return;
 
-    if( !tqparent ) tqparent = static_cast<TQListViewItem*>(m_smartCategory);
+    if( !parent ) parent = static_cast<TQListViewItem*>(m_smartCategory);
 
 
     SmartPlaylistEditor dialog( i18n("Untitled"), this );
     if( dialog.exec() == TQDialog::Accepted ) {
 
-        PlaylistCategory *category = dynamic_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(tqparent);
+        PlaylistCategory *category = dynamic_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(parent);
         for( TQListViewItem *item = category->firstChild(); item; item = item->nextSibling() ) {
             SmartPlaylist *sp = dynamic_cast<SmartPlaylist*>(item);
             if ( sp && sp->title() == dialog.name() ) {
@@ -678,9 +678,9 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::addSmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent ) //SLOT
                     return;
             }
         }
-        new SmartPlaylist( tqparent, 0, dialog.result() );
-        tqparent->sortChildItems( 0, true );
-        tqparent->setOpen( true );
+        new SmartPlaylist( parent, 0, dialog.result() );
+        parent->sortChildItems( 0, true );
+        parent->setOpen( true );
 
         saveSmartPlaylists();
     }
@@ -1171,14 +1171,14 @@ DEBUG_BLOCK
 
     foreachType( TQValueList<PodcastChannelBundle>, channels )
     {
-        PlaylistCategory *tqparent = p;
+        PlaylistCategory *parent = p;
         const int parentId = (*it).parentId();
         if( parentId > 0 && folderMap.find( parentId ) != folderMap.end() )
-            tqparent = folderMap[parentId];
+            parent = folderMap[parentId];
 
-        channel  = new PodcastChannel( tqparent, channel, *it );
+        channel  = new PodcastChannel( parent, channel, *it );
 
-        bool hasNew = CollectionDB::instance()->query( TQString("SELECT COUNT(tqparent) FROM podcastepisodes WHERE ( tqparent='%1' AND isNew=%2 ) LIMIT 1" )
+        bool hasNew = CollectionDB::instance()->query( TQString("SELECT COUNT(parent) FROM podcastepisodes WHERE ( parent='%1' AND isNew=%2 ) LIMIT 1" )
                         .tqarg( (*it).url().url(), CollectionDB::instance()->boolT() ) )
                         .first().toInt() > 0;
 
@@ -1196,10 +1196,10 @@ TQMap<int,PlaylistCategory*>
 PlaylistBrowser::loadPodcastFolders( PlaylistCategory *p )
 {
 DEBUG_BLOCK
-    TQString sql = "SELECT * FROM podcastfolders ORDER BY tqparent ASC;";
+    TQString sql = "SELECT * FROM podcastfolders ORDER BY parent ASC;";
     TQStringList values = CollectionDB::instance()->query( sql );
 
-    // store the folder and IDs so finding a tqparent is fast
+    // store the folder and IDs so finding a parent is fast
     TQMap<int,PlaylistCategory*> folderMap;
     PlaylistCategory *folder = 0;
     foreach( values )
@@ -1209,11 +1209,11 @@ DEBUG_BLOCK
         const int     parentId =   (*++it).toInt();
         const bool    isOpen   = ( (*++it) == CollectionDB::instance()->boolT() ? true : false );
 
-        PlaylistCategory *tqparent = p;
+        PlaylistCategory *parent = p;
         if( parentId > 0 && folderMap.find( parentId ) != folderMap.end() )
-            tqparent = folderMap[parentId];
+            parent = folderMap[parentId];
 
-        folder = new PlaylistCategory( tqparent, folder, t, id );
+        folder = new PlaylistCategory( parent, folder, t, id );
         folder->setOpen( isOpen );
 
         folderMap[id] = folder;
@@ -1242,7 +1242,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::savePodcastFolderStates( PlaylistCategory *folder )
     {
         if( folder->id() < 0 ) // probably due to a 1.3->1.4 migration
         {                      // we add the folder to the db, set the id and then update all the tqchildren
-            int parentId = static_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(folder->tqparent())->id();
+            int parentId = static_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(folder->parent())->id();
             int newId = CollectionDB::instance()->addPodcastFolder( folder->text(0), parentId, folder->isOpen() );
             folder->setId( newId );
             PodcastChannel *chan = static_cast<PodcastChannel*>(folder->firstChild());
@@ -1257,7 +1257,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::savePodcastFolderStates( PlaylistCategory *folder )
         else
         {
             CollectionDB::instance()->updatePodcastFolder( folder->id(), folder->text(0),
-                              static_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(folder->tqparent())->id(), folder->isOpen() );
+                              static_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(folder->parent())->id(), folder->isOpen() );
         }
     }
 }
@@ -1277,9 +1277,9 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::scanPodcasts()
     m_podcastTimer->start( m_podcastTimerInterval );
 }
 
-void PlaylistBrowser::refreshPodcasts( TQListViewItem *tqparent )
+void PlaylistBrowser::refreshPodcasts( TQListViewItem *parent )
 {
-    for( TQListViewItem *child = tqparent->firstChild();
+    for( TQListViewItem *child = parent->firstChild();
             child;
             child = child->nextSibling() )
     {
@@ -1290,21 +1290,21 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::refreshPodcasts( TQListViewItem *tqparent )
     }
 }
 
-void PlaylistBrowser::addPodcast( TQListViewItem *tqparent )
+void PlaylistBrowser::addPodcast( TQListViewItem *parent )
 {
     bool ok;
     const TQString name = KInputDialog::getText(i18n("Add Podcast"), i18n("Enter Podcast URL:"), TQString(), &ok, this);
 
     if( ok && !name.isEmpty() )
     {
-        addPodcast( KURL::fromPathOrURL( name ), tqparent );
+        addPodcast( KURL::fromPathOrURL( name ), parent );
     }
 }
 
-void PlaylistBrowser::configurePodcasts( TQListViewItem *tqparent )
+void PlaylistBrowser::configurePodcasts( TQListViewItem *parent )
 {
     TQPtrList<PodcastChannel> podcastChannelList;
-    for( TQListViewItem *child = tqparent->firstChild();
+    for( TQListViewItem *child = parent->firstChild();
          child;
          child = child->nextSibling() )
     {
@@ -1314,7 +1314,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::configurePodcasts( TQListViewItem *tqparent )
         }
     }
     if( !podcastChannelList.isEmpty() )
-        configurePodcasts( podcastChannelList, i18n( "Podcasts contained in %1", "All in %1").tqarg( tqparent->text( 0 ) ) );
+        configurePodcasts( podcastChannelList, i18n( "Podcasts contained in %1", "All in %1").tqarg( parent->text( 0 ) ) );
 }
 
 void PlaylistBrowser::configureSelectedPodcasts()
@@ -1375,11 +1375,11 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::configurePodcasts( TQPtrList<PodcastChannel> &podcastChann
 }
 
 PodcastChannel *
-PlaylistBrowser::findPodcastChannel( const KURL &feed, TQListViewItem *tqparent ) const
+PlaylistBrowser::findPodcastChannel( const KURL &feed, TQListViewItem *parent ) const
 {
-    if( !tqparent ) tqparent = static_cast<TQListViewItem*>(m_podcastCategory);
+    if( !parent ) parent = static_cast<TQListViewItem*>(m_podcastCategory);
 
-    for( TQListViewItem *it = tqparent->firstChild();
+    for( TQListViewItem *it = parent->firstChild();
             it;
             it = it->nextSibling() )
     {
@@ -1425,9 +1425,9 @@ PlaylistBrowser::findPodcastEpisode( const KURL &episode, const KURL &feed ) con
     return 0;
 }
 
-void PlaylistBrowser::addPodcast( const KURL& origUrl, TQListViewItem *tqparent )
+void PlaylistBrowser::addPodcast( const KURL& origUrl, TQListViewItem *parent )
 {
-    if( !tqparent ) tqparent = static_cast<TQListViewItem*>(m_podcastCategory);
+    if( !parent ) parent = static_cast<TQListViewItem*>(m_podcastCategory);
 
     KURL url( origUrl );
     if( url.protocol() == "itpc" || url.protocol() == "pcast" )
@@ -1443,7 +1443,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::addPodcast( const KURL& origUrl, TQListViewItem *tqparent
         return;
     }
 
-    PodcastChannel *pc = new PodcastChannel( tqparent, 0, url );
+    PodcastChannel *pc = new PodcastChannel( parent, 0, url );
 
     if( m_podcastItemsToScan.isEmpty() )
     {
@@ -1455,8 +1455,8 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::addPodcast( const KURL& origUrl, TQListViewItem *tqparent
         m_podcastItemsToScan.append( pc );
     }
 
-    tqparent->sortChildItems( 0, true );
-    tqparent->setOpen( true );
+    parent->sortChildItems( 0, true );
+    parent->setOpen( true );
 }
 
 void PlaylistBrowser::changePodcastInterval()
@@ -1686,11 +1686,11 @@ DynamicMode *PlaylistBrowser::findDynamicModeByTitle( const TQString &title )
 }
 
 PlaylistEntry *
-PlaylistBrowser::findPlaylistEntry( const TQString &url, TQListViewItem *tqparent ) const
+PlaylistBrowser::findPlaylistEntry( const TQString &url, TQListViewItem *parent ) const
 {
-    if( !tqparent ) tqparent = static_cast<TQListViewItem*>(m_playlistCategory);
+    if( !parent ) parent = static_cast<TQListViewItem*>(m_playlistCategory);
 
-    for( TQListViewItem *it = tqparent->firstChild();
+    for( TQListViewItem *it = parent->firstChild();
             it;
             it = it->nextSibling() )
     {
@@ -1728,7 +1728,7 @@ int PlaylistBrowser::loadPlaylist( const TQString &playlist, bool /*force*/ )
     // roland
 }
 
-void PlaylistBrowser::addPlaylist( const TQString &path, TQListViewItem *tqparent, bool force, bool imported )
+void PlaylistBrowser::addPlaylist( const TQString &path, TQListViewItem *parent, bool force, bool imported )
 {
     // this function adds a playlist to the playlist browser
 
@@ -1757,9 +1757,9 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::addPlaylist( const TQString &path, TQListViewItem *tqparen
         }
         if ( !playlistImports )   //We didn't find the Imported folder, so create it.
             playlistImports = new PlaylistCategory( m_playlistCategory, 0, i18n("Imported") );
-        tqparent = playlistImports;
+        parent = playlistImports;
     }
-    else if( !tqparent ) tqparent = static_cast<TQListViewItem*>(m_playlistCategory);
+    else if( !parent ) parent = static_cast<TQListViewItem*>(m_playlistCategory);
 
     if( !playlist ) {
         if( !m_playlistCategory || !m_playlistCategory->childCount() ) {  //first child
@@ -1769,11 +1769,11 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::addPlaylist( const TQString &path, TQListViewItem *tqparen
 
         KURL auxKURL;
         auxKURL.setPath(path);
-        m_lastPlaylist = playlist = new PlaylistEntry( tqparent, 0, auxKURL );
+        m_lastPlaylist = playlist = new PlaylistEntry( parent, 0, auxKURL );
     }
 
-    tqparent->setOpen( true );
-    tqparent->sortChildItems( 0, true );
+    parent->setOpen( true );
+    parent->sortChildItems( 0, true );
     m_listview->clearSelection();
     playlist->setSelected( true );
 }
@@ -1836,7 +1836,7 @@ bool PlaylistBrowser::savePlaylist( const TQString &path, const TQValueList<KURL
     return true;
 }
 
-void PlaylistBrowser::openPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent ) //SLOT
+void PlaylistBrowser::openPlaylist( TQListViewItem *parent ) //SLOT
 {
     // open a file selector to add playlists to the playlist browser
     TQStringList files;
@@ -1844,7 +1844,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::openPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent ) //SLOT
 
     const TQStringList::ConstIterator end  = files.constEnd();
     for( TQStringList::ConstIterator it = files.constBegin(); it != end; ++it )
-        addPlaylist( *it, tqparent );
+        addPlaylist( *it, parent );
 
     savePlaylists();
 }
@@ -1930,7 +1930,7 @@ PlaylistBrowser::findItem( TQString &t, int c ) const
     return static_cast<PlaylistBrowserEntry *>( m_listview->findItem( t, c, TQt::ExactMatch ) );
 }
 
-bool PlaylistBrowser::createPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent, bool current, TQString title )
+bool PlaylistBrowser::createPlaylist( TQListViewItem *parent, bool current, TQString title )
 {
     if( title.isEmpty() ) title = i18n("Untitled");
 
@@ -1938,8 +1938,8 @@ bool PlaylistBrowser::createPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent, bool current, TQ
     if( path.isEmpty() )
         return false;
 
-    if( !tqparent )
-        tqparent = static_cast<TQListViewItem *>( m_playlistCategory );
+    if( !parent )
+        parent = static_cast<TQListViewItem *>( m_playlistCategory );
 
     if( current )
     {
@@ -1951,7 +1951,7 @@ bool PlaylistBrowser::createPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent, bool current, TQ
     {
         //Remove any items in Listview that have the same path as this one
         //  Should only happen when overwriting a playlist
-        TQListViewItem *item = tqparent->firstChild();
+        TQListViewItem *item = parent->firstChild();
         while( item )
         {
             if( static_cast<PlaylistEntry*>( item )->url() == path )
@@ -1968,8 +1968,8 @@ bool PlaylistBrowser::createPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent, bool current, TQ
         if ( TQFileInfo( path ).exists() )
             TQFileInfo( path ).dir().remove( path );
 
-        m_lastPlaylist = new PlaylistEntry( tqparent, 0, path );
-        tqparent->sortChildItems( 0, true );
+        m_lastPlaylist = new PlaylistEntry( parent, 0, path );
+        parent->sortChildItems( 0, true );
     }
 
     savePlaylists();
@@ -2105,18 +2105,18 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::removeSelectedItems() //SLOT
             continue;
 
         // if the playlist containing this item is already selected the current item will be skipped
-        // it will be deleted from the tqparent
-        TQListViewItem *tqparent = it.current()->tqparent();
+        // it will be deleted from the parent
+        TQListViewItem *parent = it.current()->parent();
 
-        if( tqparent && tqparent->isSelected() ) //tqparent will remove tqchildren
+        if( parent && parent->isSelected() ) //parent will remove tqchildren
             continue;
 
-	if (tqparent) {
-            while( tqparent->tqparent() && static_cast<PlaylistBrowserEntry*>(tqparent)->isKept() )
-                tqparent = tqparent->tqparent();
+	if (parent) {
+            while( parent->parent() && static_cast<PlaylistBrowserEntry*>(parent)->isKept() )
+                parent = parent->parent();
 	}
 
-        if( tqparent && !static_cast<PlaylistBrowserEntry*>(tqparent)->isKept() )
+        if( parent && !static_cast<PlaylistBrowserEntry*>(parent)->isKept() )
             continue;
 
         switch( (*it)->rtti() )
@@ -2154,7 +2154,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::removeSelectedItems() //SLOT
 
             case PlaylistCategory::RTTI:
                 folderCount++;
-                if( tqparent == m_playlistCategory )
+                if( parent == m_playlistCategory )
                 {
                     for( TQListViewItem *ch = (*it)->firstChild(); ch; ch = ch->nextSibling() )
                     {
@@ -2172,7 +2172,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::removeSelectedItems() //SLOT
                     playlistFoldersToDelete.append( static_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(*it) );
                     continue; // don't add the folder to selected, else it will be deleted twice
                 }
-                else if( tqparent == m_podcastCategory )
+                else if( parent == m_podcastCategory )
                 {
                     for( TQListViewItem *ch = (*it)->firstChild(); ch; ch = ch->nextSibling() )
                     {
@@ -2235,7 +2235,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::removeSelectedItems() //SLOT
     {
         if ( isPlaylistTrackItem( *it ) )
         {
-            static_cast<PlaylistEntry*>( (*it)->tqparent() )->removeTrack( (*it) );
+            static_cast<PlaylistEntry*>( (*it)->parent() )->removeTrack( (*it) );
             continue;
         }
         if ( isDynamic( *it ) )
@@ -2556,8 +2556,8 @@ void PlaylistBrowser::showContextMenu( TQListViewItem *item, const TQPoint &p, i
 //    CLASS PlaylistBrowserView
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-PlaylistBrowserView::PlaylistBrowserView( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
-    : KListView( tqparent, name )
+PlaylistBrowserView::PlaylistBrowserView( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : KListView( parent, name )
     , m_marker( 0 )
 {
     addColumn( i18n("Playlists") );
@@ -2619,7 +2619,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowserView::contentsDragLeaveEvent( TQDragLeaveEvent* )
 
 void PlaylistBrowserView::contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e )
 {
-    TQListViewItem *tqparent = 0;
+    TQListViewItem *parent = 0;
     TQListViewItem *after;
 
     const TQPoint p = contentsToViewport( e->pos() );
@@ -2630,7 +2630,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowserView::contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e )
     }
 
     if( !isPlaylist( item ) )
-        findDrop( e->pos(), tqparent, after );
+        findDrop( e->pos(), parent, after );
 
     eraseMarker();
 
@@ -2656,7 +2656,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowserView::contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e )
                 { // check if it is podcast category
                     TQListViewItem *cat = item;
                     while( isCategory(cat) && cat!=PlaylistBrowser::instance()->podcastCategory() )
-                        cat = cat->tqparent();
+                        cat = cat->parent();
 
                     if( cat == PlaylistBrowser::instance()->podcastCategory() )
                         PlaylistBrowser::instance()->addPodcast(*it, item);
@@ -2691,24 +2691,24 @@ void PlaylistBrowserView::contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e )
 
             if( bundles.isEmpty() ) return;
 
-            if( tqparent && isPlaylist( tqparent ) ) {
+            if( parent && isPlaylist( parent ) ) {
                 //insert the dropped tracks
-                PlaylistEntry *playlist = static_cast<PlaylistEntry *>( tqparent );
+                PlaylistEntry *playlist = static_cast<PlaylistEntry *>( parent );
                 playlist->insertTracks( after, bundles );
             }
             else //dropped on a playlist item
             {
-                TQListViewItem *tqparent = item;
+                TQListViewItem *parent = item;
                 bool isPlaylistFolder = false;
 
-                while( tqparent )
+                while( parent )
                 {
-                    if( tqparent == PlaylistBrowser::instance()->m_playlistCategory )
+                    if( parent == PlaylistBrowser::instance()->m_playlistCategory )
                     {
                         isPlaylistFolder = true;
                         break;
                     }
-                    tqparent = tqparent->tqparent();
+                    parent = parent->parent();
                 }
 
                 if( isPlaylist( item ) ) {
@@ -2795,7 +2795,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowserView::moveSelectedItems( TQListViewItem *newParent )
         isSmartPlaylist( newParent ) || isPodcastEpisode( newParent ) || isStream( newParent ) )
     {
         after = newParent;
-        newParent = newParent->tqparent();
+        newParent = newParent->parent();
     }
 
     #define newParent static_cast<PlaylistBrowserEntry*>(newParent)
@@ -2807,7 +2807,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowserView::moveSelectedItems( TQListViewItem *newParent )
     TQListViewItemIterator it( this, TQListViewItemIterator::Selected );
     for( ; it.current(); ++it )
     {
-        if( !(*it)->tqparent() ) //must be a base category we are draggin'
+        if( !(*it)->parent() ) //must be a base category we are draggin'
             continue;
 
         selected.append( *it );
@@ -2815,15 +2815,15 @@ void PlaylistBrowserView::moveSelectedItems( TQListViewItem *newParent )
 
     for( TQListViewItem *item = selected.first(); item; item = selected.next() )
     {
-        TQListViewItem *itemParent = item->tqparent();
+        TQListViewItem *itemParent = item->parent();
         if( isPlaylistTrackItem( item ) )
         {
             if( isPlaylistTrackItem( newParent ) )
             {
-                if( !after && newParent != newParent->tqparent()->firstChild() )
+                if( !after && newParent != newParent->parent()->firstChild() )
                     after = newParent->itemAbove();
 
-                newParent = static_cast<PlaylistEntry*>(newParent->tqparent());
+                newParent = static_cast<PlaylistEntry*>(newParent->parent());
             }
             else if( !isPlaylist( newParent ) )
                 continue;
@@ -2841,8 +2841,8 @@ void PlaylistBrowserView::moveSelectedItems( TQListViewItem *newParent )
             continue;
 
         TQListViewItem *base = newParent;
-        while( base->tqparent() )
-            base = base->tqparent();
+        while( base->parent() )
+            base = base->parent();
 
         if( base == PlaylistBrowser::instance()->m_playlistCategory && isPlaylist( item )   ||
             base == PlaylistBrowser::instance()->m_streamsCategory && isStream( item )      ||
@@ -2850,7 +2850,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowserView::moveSelectedItems( TQListViewItem *newParent )
             base == PlaylistBrowser::instance()->m_dynamicCategory && isDynamic( item )      )
         {
             // if the item is from the cool streams dir, copy it.
-            if( item->tqparent() == PlaylistBrowser::instance()->m_coolStreams )
+            if( item->parent() == PlaylistBrowser::instance()->m_coolStreams )
             {
                 #define item static_cast<StreamEntry*>(item)
                 new StreamEntry( newParent, after, item->url(), item->title() );
@@ -2951,8 +2951,8 @@ void PlaylistBrowserView::startDrag()
 
         else if( isPodcastEpisode( *it ) )
         {
-            if( (*it)->tqparent()->isSelected() ) continue;
-            if( !podList.isEmpty() && lastPodcastEpisode && lastPodcastEpisode->TQListViewItem::tqparent() != (*it)->tqparent() )
+            if( (*it)->parent()->isSelected() ) continue;
+            if( !podList.isEmpty() && lastPodcastEpisode && lastPodcastEpisode->TQListViewItem::parent() != (*it)->parent() )
             {   // we moved onto a new podcast channel
                 urls += podList;
                 podList.clear();
@@ -3026,7 +3026,7 @@ void PlaylistBrowserView::startDrag()
 
         else if( isPlaylistTrackItem( *it ) )
         {
-            if( (*it)->tqparent()->isSelected() ) continue;
+            if( (*it)->parent()->isSelected() ) continue;
             urls     += static_cast<PlaylistTrackItem*>(*it)->url();
             itemList += static_cast<PlaylistTrackItem*>(*it)->url();
         }
@@ -3124,8 +3124,8 @@ void PlaylistDialog::slotCustomPath()
 }
 
 
-InfoPane::InfoPane( TQWidget *tqparent )
-        : TQVBox( tqparent ),
+InfoPane::InfoPane( TQWidget *parent )
+        : TQVBox( parent ),
           m_enable( false ),
           m_storedHeight( 100 )
 {
diff --git a/amarok/src/playlistbrowser.h b/amarok/src/playlistbrowser.h
index aac06bab..6e87f659 100644
--- a/amarok/src/playlistbrowser.h
+++ b/amarok/src/playlistbrowser.h
@@ -65,15 +65,15 @@ class PlaylistBrowser : public TQVBox
 
         void setInfo( const TQString &title, const TQString &info );
 
-        void addStream( TQListViewItem *tqparent = 0 );
-        void addSmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent = 0 );
-        void addDynamic( TQListViewItem *tqparent = 0 );
-        void addPlaylist( const TQString &path, TQListViewItem *tqparent = 0, bool force=false, bool imported=false );
-        PlaylistEntry *findPlaylistEntry( const TQString &url, TQListViewItem *tqparent=0 ) const;
+        void addStream( TQListViewItem *parent = 0 );
+        void addSmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *parent = 0 );
+        void addDynamic( TQListViewItem *parent = 0 );
+        void addPlaylist( const TQString &path, TQListViewItem *parent = 0, bool force=false, bool imported=false );
+        PlaylistEntry *findPlaylistEntry( const TQString &url, TQListViewItem *parent=0 ) const;
         int  loadPlaylist( const TQString &playlist, bool force=false );
 
-        void addPodcast( TQListViewItem *tqparent = 0 );
-        void addPodcast( const KURL &url, TQListViewItem *tqparent = 0 );
+        void addPodcast( TQListViewItem *parent = 0 );
+        void addPodcast( const KURL &url, TQListViewItem *parent = 0 );
         void loadPodcastsFromDatabase( PlaylistCategory *p = 0 );
         void registerPodcastSettings( const TQString &title, const PodcastSettings *settings );
 
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ class PlaylistBrowser : public TQVBox
         void selectionChanged();
 
     public slots:
-        void openPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent = 0 );
+        void openPlaylist( TQListViewItem *parent = 0 );
         void scanPodcasts();
 
     private slots:
@@ -146,8 +146,8 @@ class PlaylistBrowser : public TQVBox
         void saveStreams();
 
         void loadLastfmStreams( const bool subscriber = false );
-        void addLastFmRadio( TQListViewItem *tqparent );
-        void addLastFmCustomRadio( TQListViewItem *tqparent );
+        void addLastFmRadio( TQListViewItem *parent );
+        void addLastFmCustomRadio( TQListViewItem *parent );
         void saveLastFm();
 
         PlaylistCategory* loadSmartPlaylists();
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ class PlaylistBrowser : public TQVBox
         PlaylistCategory* loadPodcasts();
         TQMap<int,PlaylistCategory*> loadPodcastFolders( PlaylistCategory *p );
         void changePodcastInterval();
-        void configurePodcasts( TQListViewItem *tqparent );
+        void configurePodcasts( TQListViewItem *parent );
         void configurePodcasts( TQPtrList<PodcastChannel> &podcastChannelList, const TQString &caption );
         void configureSelectedPodcasts();
         bool deleteSelectedPodcastItems( const bool removeItem=false, const bool silent=false );
@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ class PlaylistBrowser : public TQVBox
         void refreshPodcasts( TQListViewItem *category );
         void removePodcastFolder( PlaylistCategory *item );
         void savePodcastFolderStates( PlaylistCategory *folder );
-        PodcastChannel *findPodcastChannel( const KURL &feed, TQListViewItem *tqparent=0 ) const;
+        PodcastChannel *findPodcastChannel( const KURL &feed, TQListViewItem *parent=0 ) const;
 
         void markDynamicEntries();
         PlaylistBrowserEntry* findByName( TQString name );
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ class PlaylistBrowser : public TQVBox
         PlaylistCategory* loadPlaylists();
         void savePlaylists();
         void savePlaylist( PlaylistEntry * );
-        bool createPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent = 0, bool current = true, TQString title = 0 );
+        bool createPlaylist( TQListViewItem *parent = 0, bool current = true, TQString title = 0 );
         bool deletePlaylists( TQPtrList<PlaylistEntry> items );
         bool deletePlaylists( KURL::List items );
 
@@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ class PlaylistBrowserView : public KListView
     friend class PlaylistEntry;
 
     public:
-        PlaylistBrowserView( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name=0 );
+        PlaylistBrowserView( TQWidget *parent, const char *name=0 );
         ~PlaylistBrowserView();
 
         void rename( TQListViewItem *item, int c );
@@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ class InfoPane : public TQVBox
   TQ_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    InfoPane( TQWidget *tqparent );
+    InfoPane( TQWidget *parent );
     ~InfoPane();
     int getHeight();
     void setStoredHeight( const int newHeight );
diff --git a/amarok/src/playlistbrowseritem.cpp b/amarok/src/playlistbrowseritem.cpp
index f0c476db..229340c4 100644
--- a/amarok/src/playlistbrowseritem.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/playlistbrowseritem.cpp
@@ -156,15 +156,15 @@ PlaylistBrowserEntry::slotDoubleClicked()
 void
 PlaylistBrowserEntry::slotRenameItem()
 {
-    TQListViewItem *tqparent = KListViewItem::tqparent();
+    TQListViewItem *parent = KListViewItem::parent();
 
-    while( tqparent )
+    while( parent )
     {
-        if( !static_cast<PlaylistBrowserEntry*>( tqparent )->isKept() )
+        if( !static_cast<PlaylistBrowserEntry*>( parent )->isKept() )
             return;
-        if( !tqparent->tqparent() )
+        if( !parent->parent() )
             break;
-        tqparent = tqparent->tqparent();
+        parent = parent->parent();
     }
 
     setRenameEnabled( 0, true );
@@ -181,8 +181,8 @@ PlaylistBrowserEntry::slotPostRenameItem( const TQString /*newName*/ )
 ///    CLASS PlaylistCategory
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-PlaylistCategory::PlaylistCategory( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &t, bool isFolder )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+PlaylistCategory::PlaylistCategory( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &t, bool isFolder )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
     , m_title( t )
     , m_id( -1 )
     , m_folder( isFolder )
@@ -194,8 +194,8 @@ PlaylistCategory::PlaylistCategory( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after,
 }
 
 
-PlaylistCategory::PlaylistCategory( PlaylistCategory *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &t, bool isFolder )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+PlaylistCategory::PlaylistCategory( PlaylistCategory *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &t, bool isFolder )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
     , m_title( t )
     , m_id( -1 )
     , m_folder( isFolder )
@@ -207,8 +207,8 @@ PlaylistCategory::PlaylistCategory( PlaylistCategory *tqparent, TQListViewItem *
 }
 
 
-PlaylistCategory::PlaylistCategory( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition, bool isFolder )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+PlaylistCategory::PlaylistCategory( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition, bool isFolder )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
     , m_id( -1 )
     , m_folder( isFolder )
 {
@@ -219,8 +219,8 @@ PlaylistCategory::PlaylistCategory( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after,
 }
 
 
-PlaylistCategory::PlaylistCategory( PlaylistCategory *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+PlaylistCategory::PlaylistCategory( PlaylistCategory *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
     , m_id( -1 )
     , m_folder( true )
 {
@@ -230,8 +230,8 @@ PlaylistCategory::PlaylistCategory( PlaylistCategory *tqparent, TQListViewItem *
     setPixmap( 0, SmallIcon( Amarok::icon( "files" ) ) );
 }
 
-PlaylistCategory::PlaylistCategory( PlaylistCategory *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &t, const int id )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+PlaylistCategory::PlaylistCategory( PlaylistCategory *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &t, const int id )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
     , m_title( t )
     , m_id( id )
     , m_folder( true )
@@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ void PlaylistCategory::okRename( int col )
     if( m_id < 0 )  return;
 
     // update the database entry to have the correct name
-    const int parentId = tqparent() ? static_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(tqparent())->id() : 0;
+    const int parentId = parent() ? static_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(parent())->id() : 0;
     CollectionDB::instance()->updatePodcastFolder( m_id, text(0), parentId, isOpen() );
 }
 
@@ -401,8 +401,8 @@ PlaylistCategory::showContextMenu( const TQPoint &position )
 
     TQListViewItem *parentCat = this;
 
-    while( parentCat->tqparent() )
-        parentCat = parentCat->tqparent();
+    while( parentCat->parent() )
+        parentCat = parentCat->parent();
 
     bool isPodcastFolder = false;
 
@@ -553,8 +553,8 @@ PlaylistCategory::paintCell( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg, int column, i
 ///    CLASS PlaylistEntry
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-PlaylistEntry::PlaylistEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &url, int tracks, int length )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+PlaylistEntry::PlaylistEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &url, int tracks, int length )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
     , m_url( url )
     , m_length( length )
     , m_trackCount( tracks )
@@ -583,8 +583,8 @@ PlaylistEntry::PlaylistEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, c
 }
 
 
-PlaylistEntry::PlaylistEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+PlaylistEntry::PlaylistEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
     , m_loading( false )
     , m_loaded( false )
     , m_dynamic( false )
@@ -1053,15 +1053,15 @@ TQDomElement PlaylistEntry::xml() const
 ///    CLASS PlaylistTrackItem
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-PlaylistTrackItem::PlaylistTrackItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, TrackItemInfo *info )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+PlaylistTrackItem::PlaylistTrackItem( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, TrackItemInfo *info )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
     , m_trackInfo( info )
 {
     setDragEnabled( true );
     setRenameEnabled( 0, false );
-    PlaylistEntry *p = dynamic_cast<PlaylistEntry *>(tqparent);
+    PlaylistEntry *p = dynamic_cast<PlaylistEntry *>(parent);
     if(!p)
-        debug() << "tqparent: " << tqparent << " is not a PlaylistEntry" << endl;
+        debug() << "parent: " << parent << " is not a PlaylistEntry" << endl;
     if( p && p->text( 0 ).contains( info->artist() ) )
         setText( 0, info->title() );
     else
@@ -1155,8 +1155,8 @@ TrackItemInfo::TrackItemInfo( const MetaBundle &mb )
 ///    CLASS StreamEntry
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-StreamEntry::StreamEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &u, const TQString &t )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+StreamEntry::StreamEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &u, const TQString &t )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
     , m_title( t )
     , m_url( u )
 {
@@ -1172,8 +1172,8 @@ StreamEntry::StreamEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const
     setText( 0, m_title );
 }
 
-StreamEntry::StreamEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+StreamEntry::StreamEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
 {
     setDragEnabled( true );
     setRenameEnabled( 0, true );
@@ -1354,8 +1354,8 @@ TQDomElement LastFmEntry::xml() const
 ///    CLASS StreamEditor
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-StreamEditor::StreamEditor( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &title, const TQString &url, bool readonly )
-    : KDialogBase( tqparent, "StreamEditor", true, TQString(), Ok|Cancel)
+StreamEditor::StreamEditor( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &title, const TQString &url, bool readonly )
+    : KDialogBase( parent, "StreamEditor", true, TQString(), Ok|Cancel)
 {
     makeGridMainWidget( 2, Qt::Horizontal );
 
@@ -1387,16 +1387,16 @@ StreamEditor::StreamEditor( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &title, const TQS
 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 ///    CLASS DynamicEntry
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-DynamicEntry::DynamicEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &name )
-        : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after, name )
+DynamicEntry::DynamicEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &name )
+        : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after, name )
         , DynamicMode( name )
 {
     setPixmap( 0, SmallIcon( Amarok::icon( "dynamic" ) ) );
     setDragEnabled( true );
 }
 
-DynamicEntry::DynamicEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition )
-        : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+DynamicEntry::DynamicEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition )
+        : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
         , DynamicMode( xmlDefinition.attribute( "name" ) )
 {
     setPixmap( 0, SmallIcon( Amarok::icon( "dynamic" ) ) );
@@ -1511,15 +1511,15 @@ DynamicEntry::showContextMenu( const TQPoint &position )
 ///    CLASS PodcastChannel
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-PodcastChannel::PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &url )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+PodcastChannel::PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &url )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
         , m_polished( true ) // we get the items immediately if url is given
         , m_url( url )
         , m_fetching( false )
         , m_updating( false )
         , m_new( false )
         , m_hasProblem( false )
-        , m_tqparent( static_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(tqparent) )
+        , m_parent( static_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(parent) )
         , m_settingsValid( false )
 {
     setDragEnabled( true );
@@ -1531,16 +1531,16 @@ PodcastChannel::PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after,
     fetch();
 }
 
-PodcastChannel::PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &url,
+PodcastChannel::PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &url,
                                 const TQDomNode &channelSettings )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
     , m_polished( true ) // we get the items immediately if url is given
     , m_url( url )
     , m_fetching( false )
     , m_updating( false )
     , m_new( false )
     , m_hasProblem( false )
-    , m_tqparent( static_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(tqparent) )
+    , m_parent( static_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(parent) )
     , m_settingsValid( true )
 {
     setDragEnabled( true );
@@ -1554,17 +1554,17 @@ PodcastChannel::PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after,
     fetch();
 }
 
-PodcastChannel::PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after,
+PodcastChannel::PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after,
                                 const KURL &url, const TQDomNode &channelSettings,
                                 const TQDomDocument &xmlDefinition )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
     , m_polished( true ) //automatically load the channel
     , m_url( url )
     , m_fetching( false )
     , m_updating( false )
     , m_new( false )
     , m_hasProblem( false )
-    , m_tqparent( static_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(tqparent) )
+    , m_parent( static_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(parent) )
     , m_settingsValid( true )
 {
     TQDomNode type = xmlDefinition.namedItem("rss");
@@ -1581,8 +1581,8 @@ PodcastChannel::PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after,
     setPixmap( 0, SmallIcon( Amarok::icon( "podcast" ) ) );
 }
 
-PodcastChannel::PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const PodcastChannelBundle &pcb )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+PodcastChannel::PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const PodcastChannelBundle &pcb )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
     , m_bundle( pcb )
     , m_polished( false )
     , m_url( pcb.url() )
@@ -1590,7 +1590,7 @@ PodcastChannel::PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after,
     , m_updating( false )
     , m_new( false )
     , m_hasProblem( false )
-    , m_tqparent( static_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(tqparent) )
+    , m_parent( static_cast<PlaylistCategory*>(parent) )
     , m_settingsValid( true )
 {
     setText( 0, title() );
@@ -1964,7 +1964,7 @@ PodcastChannel::setXml( const TQDomNode &xml, const int feedType )
     delete settings;
     m_bundle.setImageURL( KURL::fromPathOrURL( img ) );
 
-    m_bundle.setParentId( m_tqparent->id() );
+    m_bundle.setParentId( m_parent->id() );
     if( !m_updating )
     { // don't reinsert on a refresh
         debug() << "Adding podcast to database" << endl;
@@ -2056,7 +2056,7 @@ PodcastChannel::episodeExists( const TQDomNode &xml, const int feedType )
         TQString guid = xml.namedItem( "guid" ).toElement().text();
         if( !guid.isEmpty() )
         {
-            command = TQString("SELECT id FROM podcastepisodes WHERE tqparent='%1' AND guid='%2';")
+            command = TQString("SELECT id FROM podcastepisodes WHERE parent='%1' AND guid='%2';")
                               .tqarg( CollectionDB::instance()->escapeString( url().url() ),
                                     CollectionDB::instance()->escapeString( guid ) );
             TQStringList values = CollectionDB::instance()->query( command );
@@ -2065,7 +2065,7 @@ PodcastChannel::episodeExists( const TQDomNode &xml, const int feedType )
 
         TQString episodeTitle = xml.namedItem( "title" ).toElement().text();
         KURL episodeURL      = xml.namedItem( "enclosure" ).toElement().attribute( "url" );
-        command = TQString("SELECT id FROM podcastepisodes WHERE tqparent='%1' AND url='%2' AND title='%3';")
+        command = TQString("SELECT id FROM podcastepisodes WHERE parent='%1' AND url='%2' AND title='%3';")
                           .tqarg( CollectionDB::instance()->escapeString( url().url() ),
                                 CollectionDB::instance()->escapeString( episodeURL.url() ),
                                 CollectionDB::instance()->escapeString( episodeTitle ) );
@@ -2079,7 +2079,7 @@ PodcastChannel::episodeExists( const TQDomNode &xml, const int feedType )
         TQString guid = xml.namedItem( "id" ).toElement().text();
         if( !guid.isEmpty() )
         {
-            command = TQString("SELECT id FROM podcastepisodes WHERE tqparent='%1' AND guid='%2';")
+            command = TQString("SELECT id FROM podcastepisodes WHERE parent='%1' AND guid='%2';")
                               .tqarg( CollectionDB::instance()->escapeString( url().url() ),
                                     CollectionDB::instance()->escapeString( guid ) );
             TQStringList values = CollectionDB::instance()->query( command );
@@ -2098,7 +2098,7 @@ PodcastChannel::episodeExists( const TQDomNode &xml, const int feedType )
             }
         }
 
-        command = TQString("SELECT id FROM podcastepisodes WHERE tqparent='%1' AND url='%2' AND title='%3';")
+        command = TQString("SELECT id FROM podcastepisodes WHERE parent='%1' AND url='%2' AND title='%3';")
                           .tqarg( CollectionDB::instance()->escapeString( url().url() ),
                                 CollectionDB::instance()->escapeString( episodeURL ),
                                 CollectionDB::instance()->escapeString( episodeTitle ) );
@@ -2113,15 +2113,15 @@ PodcastChannel::episodeExists( const TQDomNode &xml, const int feedType )
 void
 PodcastChannel::setParent( PlaylistCategory *newParent )
 {
-    if( newParent != m_tqparent )
+    if( newParent != m_parent )
     {
-        m_tqparent->takeItem( this );
+        m_parent->takeItem( this );
         newParent->insertItem( this );
         newParent->sortChildItems( 0, true );
 
-        m_tqparent = newParent;
+        m_parent = newParent;
     }
-    m_bundle.setParentId( m_tqparent->id() );
+    m_bundle.setParentId( m_parent->id() );
 
     CollectionDB::instance()->updatePodcastChannel( m_bundle );
 }
@@ -2355,10 +2355,10 @@ PodcastChannel::showContextMenu( const TQPoint &position )
 ///    @note we fucking hate itunes for taking over podcasts and inserting
 ///          their own attributes.
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-PodcastEpisode::PodcastEpisode( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after,
+PodcastEpisode::PodcastEpisode( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after,
                                 const TQDomElement &xml, const int feedType, const bool &isNew )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
-      , m_tqparent( tqparent )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
+      , m_parent( parent )
       , m_fetching( false )
       , m_onDisk( false )
       , m_localUrl( KURL() )
@@ -2428,7 +2428,7 @@ PodcastEpisode::PodcastEpisode( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after,
     if( title.isEmpty() )
         title = link.fileName();
 
-    KURL parentUrl = static_cast<PodcastChannel*>(tqparent)->url();
+    KURL parentUrl = static_cast<PodcastChannel*>(parent)->url();
     m_bundle.setDBId( -1 );
     m_bundle.setURL( link );
     m_bundle.setParent( parentUrl );
@@ -2452,9 +2452,9 @@ PodcastEpisode::PodcastEpisode( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after,
     setRenameEnabled( 0, false );
 }
 
-PodcastEpisode::PodcastEpisode( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, PodcastEpisodeBundle &bundle )
-    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
-      , m_tqparent( tqparent )
+PodcastEpisode::PodcastEpisode( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, PodcastEpisodeBundle &bundle )
+    : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
+      , m_parent( parent )
       , m_bundle( bundle )
       , m_fetching( false )
       , m_onDisk( false )
@@ -2550,7 +2550,7 @@ PodcastEpisode::downloadMedia()
     connect( &m_animationTimer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()), this, TQT_SLOT(slotAnimation()) );
 
     KURL localDir;
-    PodcastChannel *channel = dynamic_cast<PodcastChannel*>(m_tqparent);
+    PodcastChannel *channel = dynamic_cast<PodcastChannel*>(m_parent);
     if( channel )
         localDir = KURL::fromPathOrURL( channel->saveLocation() );
     else
@@ -2633,7 +2633,7 @@ void PodcastEpisode::downloadResult( KIO::Job * transferJob )
 
         setLocalUrl( m_localUrl );
 
-        PodcastChannel *channel = dynamic_cast<PodcastChannel *>( m_tqparent );
+        PodcastChannel *channel = dynamic_cast<PodcastChannel *>( m_parent );
         if( channel && channel->autotransfer() && MediaBrowser::isAvailable() )
         {
             addToMediaDevice();
@@ -2658,7 +2658,7 @@ void
 PodcastEpisode::addToMediaDevice()
 {
     MetaBundle *bundle = new MetaBundle( localUrl() );
-    PodcastChannel *channel = dynamic_cast<PodcastChannel *>( m_tqparent );
+    PodcastChannel *channel = dynamic_cast<PodcastChannel *>( m_parent );
     if(channel && !channel->title().isEmpty())
         bundle->setAlbum(channel->title());
     if(!title().isEmpty())
@@ -2687,11 +2687,11 @@ PodcastEpisode::setNew( const bool &n )
     updatePixmap();
     CollectionDB::instance()->updatePodcastEpisode( dBId(), m_bundle );
 
-    // if we mark an item as listened, we might need to update the tqparent
+    // if we mark an item as listened, we might need to update the parent
     if( n == true )
-        static_cast<PodcastChannel*>(m_tqparent)->setNew( true );
+        static_cast<PodcastChannel*>(m_parent)->setNew( true );
     else
-        static_cast<PodcastChannel*>(m_tqparent)->checkAndSetNew();
+        static_cast<PodcastChannel*>(m_parent)->checkAndSetNew();
 }
 
 void
@@ -2776,7 +2776,7 @@ PodcastEpisode::paintCell( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg, int column, int
     if( fmName.width( name ) > _width )
     {
         //decapitateString removes the channels title from the epsiodes title
-        name = Amarok::decapitateString( name, static_cast<PodcastChannel *>(m_tqparent)->title() );
+        name = Amarok::decapitateString( name, static_cast<PodcastChannel *>(m_parent)->title() );
         if( fmName.width( name ) > _width )
             name = KStringHandler::rPixelSqueeze( name, pBuf.fontMetrics(), _width );
     }
@@ -2983,8 +2983,8 @@ class AssociatePodcastDialog : public KDialogBase
         vbox->setSpacing( KDialog::spacingHint() );
 
         m_urlRequester = new KURLRequester( vbox );
-        if( dynamic_cast<PodcastChannel *>(item->tqparent()) )
-        m_urlRequester->setURL( static_cast<PodcastChannel *>(item->tqparent())->saveLocation() );
+        if( dynamic_cast<PodcastChannel *>(item->parent()) )
+        m_urlRequester->setURL( static_cast<PodcastChannel *>(item->parent())->saveLocation() );
     }
     KURL url() const { return KURL::fromPathOrURL( m_urlRequester->url() ); }
 };
@@ -3007,8 +3007,8 @@ PodcastEpisode::associateWithLocalFile()
 ///    CLASS SmartPlaylist
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-SmartPlaylist::SmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &name, const TQString &query )
-        : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after, name )
+SmartPlaylist::SmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &name, const TQString &query )
+        : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after, name )
         , m_sqlForTags( query )
         , m_title( name )
         , m_dynamic( false )
@@ -3019,8 +3019,8 @@ SmartPlaylist::SmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, c
     setText( 0, name );
 }
 
-SmartPlaylist::SmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &name, const TQString &urls, const TQString &tags )
-        : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after, name )
+SmartPlaylist::SmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &name, const TQString &urls, const TQString &tags )
+        : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after, name )
         , m_sqlForTags( tags )
         , m_title( name )
         , m_dynamic( false )
@@ -3032,8 +3032,8 @@ SmartPlaylist::SmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, c
 }
 
 
-SmartPlaylist::SmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition )
-        : PlaylistBrowserEntry( tqparent, after )
+SmartPlaylist::SmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition )
+        : PlaylistBrowserEntry( parent, after )
         , m_after( after )
         , m_dynamic( false )
 {
@@ -3454,8 +3454,8 @@ void SmartPlaylist::slotPostRenameItem( const TQString newName )
     xml().setAttribute( "name", newName );
 }
 
-ShoutcastBrowser::ShoutcastBrowser( PlaylistCategory *tqparent )
-    : PlaylistCategory( tqparent, 0, i18n( "Shoutcast Streams" ) )
+ShoutcastBrowser::ShoutcastBrowser( PlaylistCategory *parent )
+    : PlaylistCategory( parent, 0, i18n( "Shoutcast Streams" ) )
     , m_downloading( false )
     , m_cj( 0 )
     , m_loading1( new TQPixmap( locate("data", "amarok/images/loading1.png" ) ) )
diff --git a/amarok/src/playlistbrowseritem.h b/amarok/src/playlistbrowseritem.h
index 62a2ed6b..3f0ae8db 100644
--- a/amarok/src/playlistbrowseritem.h
+++ b/amarok/src/playlistbrowseritem.h
@@ -52,15 +52,15 @@ class PlaylistBrowserEntry :  public TQObject, public KListViewItem
     Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
     public:
-        PlaylistBrowserEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after )
-            : KListViewItem( tqparent, after) { m_kept = true; }
-        PlaylistBrowserEntry( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after )
-            : KListViewItem( tqparent, after) { m_kept = true; }
-        PlaylistBrowserEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &name )
-            : KListViewItem( tqparent, after, name) { m_kept = true; }
+        PlaylistBrowserEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after )
+            : KListViewItem( parent, after) { m_kept = true; }
+        PlaylistBrowserEntry( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after )
+            : KListViewItem( parent, after) { m_kept = true; }
+        PlaylistBrowserEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &name )
+            : KListViewItem( parent, after, name) { m_kept = true; }
 
         virtual TQDomElement xml() const { return TQDomElement(); }
-        TQListViewItem* tqparent() const { return KListViewItem::tqparent(); }
+        TQListViewItem* parent() const { return KListViewItem::parent(); }
 
         bool isKept() const { return m_kept; }  // if kept == true, then it will be saved
         void setKept( bool k );                 // to the cache files. If false, non-renameable
@@ -89,8 +89,8 @@ class DynamicEntry : public PlaylistBrowserEntry, public DynamicMode
     Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
     public:
-        DynamicEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &title );
-        DynamicEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition );
+        DynamicEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &title );
+        DynamicEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition );
         ~DynamicEntry() { };
 
         virtual TQString text( int column ) const;
@@ -110,11 +110,11 @@ class PlaylistCategory : public PlaylistBrowserEntry
     Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
     public:
-        PlaylistCategory( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &, bool isFolder=false );
-        PlaylistCategory( PlaylistCategory *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &, bool isFolder=true );
-        PlaylistCategory( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition, bool isFolder=false);
-        PlaylistCategory( PlaylistCategory *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition );
-        PlaylistCategory( PlaylistCategory *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &t, const int id );
+        PlaylistCategory( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &, bool isFolder=false );
+        PlaylistCategory( PlaylistCategory *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &, bool isFolder=true );
+        PlaylistCategory( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition, bool isFolder=false);
+        PlaylistCategory( PlaylistCategory *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition );
+        PlaylistCategory( PlaylistCategory *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &t, const int id );
 
         ~PlaylistCategory() { };
 
@@ -159,8 +159,8 @@ class PlaylistEntry :  public PlaylistBrowserEntry
     friend class PlaylistCategory;
 
     public:
-        PlaylistEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &, int tracks=0, int length=0 );
-        PlaylistEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition );
+        PlaylistEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &, int tracks=0, int length=0 );
+        PlaylistEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition );
         ~PlaylistEntry();
 
         void sortChildItems ( int /*column*/, bool /*ascending*/ ) { /* Don't sort its tqchildren */ }; //reimplemented
@@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ class PlaylistTrackItem : public PlaylistBrowserEntry
     friend class TrackItemInfo;
 
     public:
-        PlaylistTrackItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, TrackItemInfo *info );
+        PlaylistTrackItem( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, TrackItemInfo *info );
 
         const KURL    &url();
         TrackItemInfo *trackInfo() const { return m_trackInfo; }
@@ -262,13 +262,13 @@ class PodcastEpisode : public PlaylistBrowserEntry
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        PodcastEpisode( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xml,
+        PodcastEpisode( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xml,
                         const int feedType, const bool &isNew=false );
-        PodcastEpisode( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, PodcastEpisodeBundle &bundle );
+        PodcastEpisode( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, PodcastEpisodeBundle &bundle );
 
         void  downloadMedia();
         void setOnDisk( bool d = true );
-        TQListViewItem *itemChannel() { return m_tqparent; }
+        TQListViewItem *itemChannel() { return m_parent; }
 
 
         const bool isNew() const { return m_bundle.isNew(); }
@@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ class PodcastEpisode : public PlaylistBrowserEntry
         void stopAnimation();
         void updatePixmap();
 
-        TQListViewItem *m_tqparent;           //podcast channel it belongs to
+        TQListViewItem *m_parent;           //podcast channel it belongs to
         PodcastEpisodeBundle m_bundle;
         KURL        m_localUrl;
 
@@ -350,12 +350,12 @@ class PodcastChannel : public PlaylistBrowserEntry
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &url,
+        PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &url,
                         const TQDomNode &channelSettings );
-        PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &url );
-        PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &url,
+        PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &url );
+        PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &url,
                         const TQDomNode &channelSettings, const TQDomDocument &xml );
-        PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const PodcastChannelBundle &pcb );
+        PodcastChannel( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const PodcastChannelBundle &pcb );
 
         enum MediaFetch{ STREAM=0, AUTOMATIC=1 };
 
@@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ class PodcastChannel : public PlaylistBrowserEntry
         bool                     m_hasProblem;
 
         KIO::TransferJob        *m_podcastJob;
-        PlaylistCategory        *m_tqparent;        // category it belongs to
+        PlaylistCategory        *m_parent;        // category it belongs to
         TQString                  m_podcastCurrentUrl;
         TQPtrList<PodcastEpisode> m_podcastDownloadQueue;
         bool                     m_settingsValid;
@@ -454,8 +454,8 @@ class StreamEntry : public PlaylistBrowserEntry
     Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
     public:
-        StreamEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &, const TQString &t );
-        StreamEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition );
+        StreamEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &, const TQString &t );
+        StreamEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition );
         ~StreamEntry() { };
 
         void  setURL  ( KURL u )    { m_url = u; }
@@ -488,10 +488,10 @@ class LastFmEntry : public StreamEntry
     Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
     public:
-        LastFmEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &u, const TQString &t )
-            : StreamEntry( tqparent, after, u, t ) { }
-        LastFmEntry( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition )
-            : StreamEntry( tqparent, after, xmlDefinition ) { }
+        LastFmEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const KURL &u, const TQString &t )
+            : StreamEntry( parent, after, u, t ) { }
+        LastFmEntry( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition )
+            : StreamEntry( parent, after, xmlDefinition ) { }
         virtual TQDomElement xml() const;
 
     public slots:
@@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ class LastFmEntry : public StreamEntry
 class StreamEditor : public KDialogBase
 {
     public:
-        StreamEditor( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &title, const TQString &url, bool readonly = false );
+        StreamEditor( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &title, const TQString &url, bool readonly = false );
 
         KURL    url()  const { return KURL( m_urlLineEdit->text() ); }
         TQString name() const { return m_nameLineEdit->text().replace( "\n", " " ); }
@@ -521,10 +521,10 @@ class SmartPlaylist : public PlaylistBrowserEntry
     Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
     public:
-        SmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &name, const TQString &query );
-        SmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &name,
+        SmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &name, const TQString &query );
+        SmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &name,
                          const TQString &urls, const TQString &tags );
-        SmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition );
+        SmartPlaylist( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQDomElement &xmlDefinition );
 
         bool        isDynamic()     const { return m_dynamic; }
         bool        isEditable()    const { return !m_xml.isNull(); }
@@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ class ShoutcastBrowser : public PlaylistCategory
         Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
     public:
-        ShoutcastBrowser( PlaylistCategory* tqparent );
+        ShoutcastBrowser( PlaylistCategory* parent );
         void setOpen( bool open );
 
     public slots:
diff --git a/amarok/src/playlistselection.cpp b/amarok/src/playlistselection.cpp
index e5c69391..881667b0 100644
--- a/amarok/src/playlistselection.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/playlistselection.cpp
@@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
 #include <klistview.h>
 #include <klocale.h>
 
-PlaylistSelection::PlaylistSelection( TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name )
-    : KListView( tqparent, name )
+PlaylistSelection::PlaylistSelection( TQWidget* parent, const char* name )
+    : KListView( parent, name )
 {
     addColumn( i18n("Select Playlists") );
     setRootIsDecorated( true );
@@ -71,9 +71,9 @@ void PlaylistSelection::loadChildren( TQListViewItem* browserParent, TQListViewI
 ////////////////////////////////
 namespace ConfigDynamic
 {
-    KDialogBase* basicDialog( TQWidget* tqparent )
+    KDialogBase* basicDialog( TQWidget* parent )
     {
-        KDialogBase* dialog = new KDialogBase( tqparent, "new dynamic", true,
+        KDialogBase* dialog = new KDialogBase( parent, "new dynamic", true,
                               i18n("Create Dynamic Playlist"),
                               KDialogBase::Ok | KDialogBase::Cancel,
                               KDialogBase::Ok, true );
@@ -87,9 +87,9 @@ namespace ConfigDynamic
         return dialog;
     }
 
-    void dynamicDialog( TQWidget* tqparent )
+    void dynamicDialog( TQWidget* parent )
     {
-        KDialogBase* dialog = basicDialog( tqparent );
+        KDialogBase* dialog = basicDialog( parent );
         NewDynamic*  nd     = static_cast<NewDynamic*>(dialog->mainWidget());
         nd->m_mixLabel->setText( i18n("Add Dynamic Playlist") );
 
@@ -97,9 +97,9 @@ namespace ConfigDynamic
             addDynamic( nd );
     }
 
-    void editDynamicPlaylist( TQWidget* tqparent, DynamicMode* mode )
+    void editDynamicPlaylist( TQWidget* parent, DynamicMode* mode )
     {
-        KDialogBase* dialog = basicDialog( tqparent );
+        KDialogBase* dialog = basicDialog( parent );
         NewDynamic*  nd     = static_cast<NewDynamic*>(dialog->mainWidget());
 
         nd->m_name->setText( mode->title() );
@@ -171,14 +171,14 @@ namespace ConfigDynamic
 
     void addDynamic( NewDynamic* dialog )
     {
-        TQListViewItem *tqparent = PlaylistBrowser::instance()->getDynamicCategory();
-        DynamicEntry    *saveMe = new DynamicEntry( tqparent, 0, dialog->m_name->text().replace( "\n", " " ) );
+        TQListViewItem *parent = PlaylistBrowser::instance()->getDynamicCategory();
+        DynamicEntry    *saveMe = new DynamicEntry( parent, 0, dialog->m_name->text().replace( "\n", " " ) );
         saveMe->setAppendType( DynamicMode::CUSTOM );
 
         loadDynamicMode( saveMe, dialog );
 
-        tqparent->sortChildItems( 0, true );
-        tqparent->setOpen( true );
+        parent->sortChildItems( 0, true );
+        parent->setOpen( true );
 
         PlaylistBrowser::instance()->saveDynamics();
     }
@@ -187,13 +187,13 @@ namespace ConfigDynamic
 ////////////////////////////////
 /// SelectionListItem
 ////////////////////////////////
-SelectionListItem::SelectionListItem( TQCheckListItem * tqparent, const TQString& text, TQListViewItem* browserEquivalent )
-    : TQCheckListItem( tqparent, text, TQCheckListItem::CheckBox )
+SelectionListItem::SelectionListItem( TQCheckListItem * parent, const TQString& text, TQListViewItem* browserEquivalent )
+    : TQCheckListItem( parent, text, TQCheckListItem::CheckBox )
     , m_browserEquivalent( browserEquivalent )
 { }
 
-SelectionListItem::SelectionListItem( TQListViewItem * tqparent, const TQString& text, TQListViewItem* browserEquivalent )
-    : TQCheckListItem( tqparent, text, TQCheckListItem::CheckBox )
+SelectionListItem::SelectionListItem( TQListViewItem * parent, const TQString& text, TQListViewItem* browserEquivalent )
+    : TQCheckListItem( parent, text, TQCheckListItem::CheckBox )
     , m_browserEquivalent( browserEquivalent )
 { }
 
@@ -211,10 +211,10 @@ TQString
 SelectionListItem::name() const
 {
     TQString fullName = text(0).replace('/', "\\/");
-    TQListViewItem *p = tqparent();
+    TQListViewItem *p = parent();
     while ( p ) {
         fullName.prepend( p->text(0).replace('/', "\\/") + "/" );
-        p = p->tqparent();
+        p = p->parent();
     }
     return fullName;
 }
diff --git a/amarok/src/playlistselection.h b/amarok/src/playlistselection.h
index e1d2844b..da65d54d 100644
--- a/amarok/src/playlistselection.h
+++ b/amarok/src/playlistselection.h
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ class PlaylistSelection : public KListView
         Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
     public:
-        PlaylistSelection(TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name);
+        PlaylistSelection(TQWidget* parent, const char* name);
         virtual TQSize tqsizeHint() const
         {
             return tqminimumSizeHint();
@@ -35,18 +35,18 @@ class PlaylistSelection : public KListView
 namespace ConfigDynamic
 {
     void addDynamic( NewDynamic* dialog );
-    void dynamicDialog( TQWidget* tqparent );
-    void editDynamicPlaylist( TQWidget* tqparent, DynamicMode* mode );
+    void dynamicDialog( TQWidget* parent );
+    void editDynamicPlaylist( TQWidget* parent, DynamicMode* mode );
     void loadDynamicMode( DynamicMode* saveMe, NewDynamic* dialog );
 
-    KDialogBase* basicDialog( TQWidget* tqparent );
+    KDialogBase* basicDialog( TQWidget* parent );
 }
 
 class SelectionListItem : public TQCheckListItem
 {
     public:
-        SelectionListItem( TQListViewItem  * tqparent, const TQString& text, TQListViewItem* browserEquivalent );
-        SelectionListItem( TQCheckListItem * tqparent, const TQString& text, TQListViewItem* browserEquivalent );
+        SelectionListItem( TQListViewItem  * parent, const TQString& text, TQListViewItem* browserEquivalent );
+        SelectionListItem( TQCheckListItem * parent, const TQString& text, TQListViewItem* browserEquivalent );
 
         virtual TQString name() const;
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/playlistwindow.cpp b/amarok/src/playlistwindow.cpp
index a44a36af..8a71fdb0 100644
--- a/amarok/src/playlistwindow.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/playlistwindow.cpp
@@ -86,8 +86,8 @@ namespace Amarok
     class ToolBar : public KToolBar
     {
     public:
-        ToolBar( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
-            : KToolBar( tqparent, name )
+        ToolBar( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+            : KToolBar( parent, name )
         {}
 
     protected:
@@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ void PlaylistWindow::createGUI()
 
     //TEXT ON RIGHT HACK
     //KToolBarButtons have independent settings for their appearance.
-    //KToolBarButton::modeChange() causes that button to set its mode to that of its tqparent KToolBar
+    //KToolBarButton::modeChange() causes that button to set its mode to that of its parent KToolBar
     //KToolBar::setIconText() calls modeChange() for tqchildren, unless 2nd param is false
 
     TQStringList list;
@@ -1187,8 +1187,8 @@ PlaylistWindow::mbAvailabilityChanged( bool isAvailable ) //SLOT
 //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 /// DynamicBar
 //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-DynamicBar::DynamicBar(TQWidget* tqparent)
-       : TQHBox( tqparent, "DynamicModeStatusBar" )
+DynamicBar::DynamicBar(TQWidget* parent)
+       : TQHBox( parent, "DynamicModeStatusBar" )
 {
     m_titleWidget = new DynamicTitle(this);
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/playlistwindow.h b/amarok/src/playlistwindow.h
index 3cb5943a..83d4d816 100644
--- a/amarok/src/playlistwindow.h
+++ b/amarok/src/playlistwindow.h
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ class DynamicTitle : public TQWidget
     Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
     public:
-        DynamicTitle( TQWidget* tqparent );
+        DynamicTitle( TQWidget* parent );
         void setTitle( const TQString& newTitle );
 
     protected:
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ class DynamicBar : public TQHBox
     Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
     public:
-        DynamicBar( TQWidget* tqparent );
+        DynamicBar( TQWidget* parent );
         void init();
 
     public slots:
diff --git a/amarok/src/plugin/plugin.h b/amarok/src/plugin/plugin.h
index e29c88e8..b10948c7 100644
--- a/amarok/src/plugin/plugin.h
+++ b/amarok/src/plugin/plugin.h
@@ -27,10 +27,10 @@ namespace Amarok
             virtual ~Plugin();
 
             /**
-             * TODO @param tqparent you must tqparent the widget to tqparent
+             * TODO @param parent you must parent the widget to parent
              * @return the configure widget for your plugin, create it on the heap!
              */
-             //TODO rename configureWidget( TQWidget *tqparent )
+             //TODO rename configureWidget( TQWidget *parent )
             virtual PluginConfig* configure() const { return 0; }
 
             void addPluginProperty( const TQString& key, const TQString& value );
diff --git a/amarok/src/podcastbundle.h b/amarok/src/podcastbundle.h
index 5df89ae0..f1e4fbe1 100644
--- a/amarok/src/podcastbundle.h
+++ b/amarok/src/podcastbundle.h
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ class PodcastChannelBundle
         const KURL    &imageURL()    const;
         const TQString &description() const;
         const TQString &copyright()   const;
-        /// The id which the tqparent folder has in the database
+        /// The id which the parent folder has in the database
         int     parentId()    const;
 
         void    setURL( const KURL &u );
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ class PodcastEpisodeBundle
             , m_isNew( false )
         {
         }
-        PodcastEpisodeBundle( const KURL &url,       const KURL &tqparent,  const TQString &title,
+        PodcastEpisodeBundle( const KURL &url,       const KURL &parent,  const TQString &title,
                               const TQString &author, const TQString &desc, const TQString &date,
                               const TQString &type,   const int duration,  const TQString &guid,
                               const bool isNew  )
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ class PodcastEpisodeBundle
             , m_size( 0 )
         {
             m_url = url;
-            m_tqparent = tqparent;
+            m_parent = parent;
             m_author = author;
             m_title = title;
             m_description = desc;
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ class PodcastEpisodeBundle
         /// The local url of the podcast episode (if it has been downloaded, an invalid url otherwise)
         const KURL    &localUrl()    const;
         /// The url of the podcast channel
-        const KURL    &tqparent()      const;
+        const KURL    &parent()      const;
         const TQString &author()      const;
         const TQString &title()       const;
         const TQString &subtitle()    const;
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ class PodcastEpisodeBundle
         int     m_id;
         KURL    m_url;
         KURL    m_localUrl;
-        KURL    m_tqparent;
+        KURL    m_parent;
         TQString m_author;
         TQString m_title;
         TQString m_subtitle;
@@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ class PodcastEpisodeBundle
 inline int            PodcastEpisodeBundle::dBId()        const { return m_id; }
 inline const KURL    &PodcastEpisodeBundle::url()         const { return m_url; }
 inline const KURL    &PodcastEpisodeBundle::localUrl()    const { return m_localUrl; }
-inline const KURL    &PodcastEpisodeBundle::tqparent()      const { return m_tqparent; }
+inline const KURL    &PodcastEpisodeBundle::parent()      const { return m_parent; }
 inline const TQString &PodcastEpisodeBundle::author()      const { return m_author; }
 inline const TQString &PodcastEpisodeBundle::title()       const { return m_title; }
 inline const TQString &PodcastEpisodeBundle::subtitle()    const { return m_subtitle; }
@@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ inline bool           PodcastEpisodeBundle::isNew()       const { return m_isNew
 inline void    PodcastEpisodeBundle::setDBId( const int i )             { m_id = i; }
 inline void    PodcastEpisodeBundle::setURL( const KURL &u )            { m_url = u; }
 inline void    PodcastEpisodeBundle::setLocalURL( const KURL &u )       { m_localUrl = u; }
-inline void    PodcastEpisodeBundle::setParent( const KURL &u )         { m_tqparent = u; }
+inline void    PodcastEpisodeBundle::setParent( const KURL &u )         { m_parent = u; }
 inline void    PodcastEpisodeBundle::setAuthor( const TQString &a )      { m_author = a; }
 inline void    PodcastEpisodeBundle::setTitle( const TQString &t )       { m_title = t; }
 inline void    PodcastEpisodeBundle::setSubtitle( const TQString &t )    { m_subtitle = t; }
diff --git a/amarok/src/podcastsettings.cpp b/amarok/src/podcastsettings.cpp
index 9a3168f9..2d68b0e6 100644
--- a/amarok/src/podcastsettings.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/podcastsettings.cpp
@@ -62,8 +62,8 @@ PodcastSettings::PodcastSettings( const TQString &title, const TQString &save, c
     m_purgeCount = purgecount;
 }
 
-PodcastSettingsDialog::PodcastSettingsDialog( PodcastSettings *settings, TQWidget* tqparent )
-                            : KDialogBase(  tqparent, 0, true, i18n("change options", "Configure %1").tqarg( settings->m_title )
+PodcastSettingsDialog::PodcastSettingsDialog( PodcastSettings *settings, TQWidget* parent )
+                            : KDialogBase(  parent, 0, true, i18n("change options", "Configure %1").tqarg( settings->m_title )
                             , KDialogBase::User1|KDialogBase::Ok|KDialogBase::Cancel
                             , KDialogBase::Ok, true
                             , KGuiItem(i18n("Reset"), "reset" ) )
@@ -73,8 +73,8 @@ PodcastSettingsDialog::PodcastSettingsDialog( PodcastSettings *settings, TQWidge
     setSettings( settings );
 }
 
-PodcastSettingsDialog::PodcastSettingsDialog( const TQPtrList<PodcastSettings> &list, const TQString &caption, TQWidget* tqparent )
-    : KDialogBase(  tqparent, 0, true, i18n("change options", "Configure %1").tqarg( caption )
+PodcastSettingsDialog::PodcastSettingsDialog( const TQPtrList<PodcastSettings> &list, const TQString &caption, TQWidget* parent )
+    : KDialogBase(  parent, 0, true, i18n("change options", "Configure %1").tqarg( caption )
             , KDialogBase::User1|KDialogBase::Ok|KDialogBase::Cancel
                     , KDialogBase::Ok, true
                     , KGuiItem(i18n("Reset"), "reset" ) )
diff --git a/amarok/src/podcastsettings.h b/amarok/src/podcastsettings.h
index 8ad7beb1..f99a8aca 100644
--- a/amarok/src/podcastsettings.h
+++ b/amarok/src/podcastsettings.h
@@ -51,8 +51,8 @@ class PodcastSettingsDialog : public KDialogBase
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        PodcastSettingsDialog( PodcastSettings *list, TQWidget* tqparent=0 );
-        PodcastSettingsDialog( const TQPtrList<PodcastSettings> &list, const TQString &caption, TQWidget* tqparent=0 );
+        PodcastSettingsDialog( PodcastSettings *list, TQWidget* parent=0 );
+        PodcastSettingsDialog( const TQPtrList<PodcastSettings> &list, const TQString &caption, TQWidget* parent=0 );
 
         bool    configure();
         PodcastSettings *getSettings() { return m_settings; }
diff --git a/amarok/src/prettypopupmenu.cpp b/amarok/src/prettypopupmenu.cpp
index 6962cfbb..5fe1bbe4 100644
--- a/amarok/src/prettypopupmenu.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/prettypopupmenu.cpp
@@ -37,8 +37,8 @@ TQColor PrettyPopupMenu::s_sidePixmapColor;
 // public
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-PrettyPopupMenu::PrettyPopupMenu( TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name )
-    : KPopupMenu( tqparent, name )
+PrettyPopupMenu::PrettyPopupMenu( TQWidget* parent, const char* name )
+    : KPopupMenu( parent, name )
 {
     // Must be initialized so that we know the size on first invocation
     if ( s_sidePixmap.isNull() )
diff --git a/amarok/src/prettypopupmenu.h b/amarok/src/prettypopupmenu.h
index 06bdbd66..53444a1d 100644
--- a/amarok/src/prettypopupmenu.h
+++ b/amarok/src/prettypopupmenu.h
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ class PrettyPopupMenu : public KPopupMenu
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        PrettyPopupMenu( TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+        PrettyPopupMenu( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
 
         int sidePixmapWidth() const { return s_sidePixmap.width(); }
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/queuemanager.cpp b/amarok/src/queuemanager.cpp
index d99596fa..cb656662 100644
--- a/amarok/src/queuemanager.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/queuemanager.cpp
@@ -64,8 +64,8 @@ QueueItem::paintCell( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg, int column, int widt
 /// CLASS QueueList
 //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-QueueList::QueueList( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
-            : KListView( tqparent, name )
+QueueList::QueueList( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+            : KListView( parent, name )
 {
     addColumn( i18n("Name") );
     setResizeMode( TQListView::LastColumn );
@@ -262,10 +262,10 @@ QueueList::contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e )
     }
     else
     {
-        TQListViewItem *tqparent = 0;
+        TQListViewItem *parent = 0;
         TQListViewItem *after;
 
-        findDrop( e->pos(), tqparent, after );
+        findDrop( e->pos(), parent, after );
 
         QueueManager::instance()->addItems( after );
     }
@@ -278,8 +278,8 @@ QueueList::contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e )
 
 QueueManager *QueueManager::s_instance = 0;
 
-QueueManager::QueueManager( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
-    : KDialogBase( KDialogBase::Swallow, 0, tqparent, name, false, 0, Ok|Apply|Cancel )
+QueueManager::QueueManager( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : KDialogBase( KDialogBase::Swallow, 0, parent, name, false, 0, Ok|Apply|Cancel )
 {
     s_instance = this;
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/queuemanager.h b/amarok/src/queuemanager.h
index 478bc247..10df80ba 100644
--- a/amarok/src/queuemanager.h
+++ b/amarok/src/queuemanager.h
@@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ class KPushButton;
 class QueueItem : public KListViewItem
 {
     public:
-        QueueItem( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, TQString t )
-            : KListViewItem( tqparent, after, t )
+        QueueItem( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after, TQString t )
+            : KListViewItem( parent, after, t )
         { };
 
         void paintCell( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg, int column, int width, int align );
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ class QueueList : public KListView
     friend class QueueManager;
 
     public:
-        QueueList( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name = 0 );
+        QueueList( TQWidget *parent, const char *name = 0 );
         ~QueueList() {};
 
         bool    hasSelection();
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ class QueueManager : public KDialogBase
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        QueueManager( TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+        QueueManager( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
         ~QueueManager();
 
         TQPtrList<PlaylistItem> newQueue();
diff --git a/amarok/src/scancontroller.cpp b/amarok/src/scancontroller.cpp
index c147333a..cb68dc58 100644
--- a/amarok/src/scancontroller.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/scancontroller.cpp
@@ -55,8 +55,8 @@ void ScanController::setInstance( ScanController* curr )
     currController = curr;
 }
 
-ScanController::ScanController( CollectionDB* tqparent, bool incremental, const TQStringList& folders )
-    : DependentJob( tqparent, "CollectionScanner" )
+ScanController::ScanController( CollectionDB* parent, bool incremental, const TQStringList& folders )
+    : DependentJob( parent, "CollectionScanner" )
     , TQXmlDefaultHandler()
     , m_scanner( new Amarok::ProcIO() )
     , m_folders( TQDeepCopy<TQStringList>( folders ) )
diff --git a/amarok/src/scancontroller.h b/amarok/src/scancontroller.h
index 780b65c6..05de2373 100644
--- a/amarok/src/scancontroller.h
+++ b/amarok/src/scancontroller.h
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ class ScanController : public ThreadManager::DependentJob, public TQXmlDefaultHa
         };
 
     public:
-        ScanController( CollectionDB* tqparent, bool incremental, const TQStringList& folders = TQStringList() );
+        ScanController( CollectionDB* parent, bool incremental, const TQStringList& folders = TQStringList() );
         ~ScanController();
         static ScanController* instance();
         
diff --git a/amarok/src/scriptmanager.cpp b/amarok/src/scriptmanager.cpp
index a173a843..8cf3c91e 100644
--- a/amarok/src/scriptmanager.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/scriptmanager.cpp
@@ -134,8 +134,8 @@ class AmarokScriptNewStuff : public KNewStuff
 ScriptManager* ScriptManager::s_instance = 0;
 
 
-ScriptManager::ScriptManager( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
-        : KDialogBase( tqparent, name, false, TQString(), Close, Close, true )
+ScriptManager::ScriptManager( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+        : KDialogBase( parent, name, false, TQString(), Close, Close, true )
         , EngineObserver( EngineController::instance() )
         , m_gui( new ScriptManagerBase( this ) )
 {
diff --git a/amarok/src/scriptmanager.h b/amarok/src/scriptmanager.h
index a3707248..c07f994e 100644
--- a/amarok/src/scriptmanager.h
+++ b/amarok/src/scriptmanager.h
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ class ScriptManager : public KDialogBase, public EngineObserver
     friend class AmarokScriptNewStuff;
 
     public:
-        ScriptManager( TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+        ScriptManager( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
         virtual ~ScriptManager();
 
         static ScriptManager* instance() { return s_instance ? s_instance : new ScriptManager( PlaylistWindow::self() ); }
diff --git a/amarok/src/scripts/common/Zeroconf.py b/amarok/src/scripts/common/Zeroconf.py
index 14f4668f..fa508393 100644
--- a/amarok/src/scripts/common/Zeroconf.py
+++ b/amarok/src/scripts/common/Zeroconf.py
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ _DNS_TTL = 60 * 60; # one hour default TTL
 _MAX_MSG_TYPICAL = 1460 # unused
 _MAX_MSG_ABSOLUTE = 8972
 
-_FLAGS_QR_MASK = 0x8000 # query response tqmask
+_FLAGS_QR_MASK = 0x8000 # query response mask
 _FLAGS_QR_QUERY = 0x0000 # query
 _FLAGS_QR_RESPONSE = 0x8000 # response
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/scripts/databasescripts/TODO b/amarok/src/scripts/databasescripts/TODO
index cfebb831..76457207 100644
--- a/amarok/src/scripts/databasescripts/TODO
+++ b/amarok/src/scripts/databasescripts/TODO
@@ -6,5 +6,5 @@ Script Ideas:
 
 General:
 * Properly use the ui file, to make it easier to maintain later
-* Maybe pass error messages back to the tqparent dialog to abstract scripts away from amarok?
+* Maybe pass error messages back to the parent dialog to abstract scripts away from amarok?
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/scripts/databasescripts/databaseScripts.rb b/amarok/src/scripts/databasescripts/databaseScripts.rb
index d42086fc..d2b5d162 100644
--- a/amarok/src/scripts/databasescripts/databaseScripts.rb
+++ b/amarok/src/scripts/databasescripts/databaseScripts.rb
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ class DatabaseScriptChooser < Qt::Dialog
 
     Q_SLOTS 'optionChanged(int)', 'textChanged(const QString &)', 'accept()', 'cancel()'
 
-    def initialize(tqparent = nil, name = nil, modal = false, fl = 0)
+    def initialize(parent = nil, name = nil, modal = false, fl = 0)
         super
 
         if name.nil?
diff --git a/amarok/src/scripts/graphequalizer/equalizercanvasview.cpp b/amarok/src/scripts/graphequalizer/equalizercanvasview.cpp
index 2ff6d27c..a377b88e 100644
--- a/amarok/src/scripts/graphequalizer/equalizercanvasview.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/scripts/graphequalizer/equalizercanvasview.cpp
@@ -16,8 +16,8 @@
 #include <klocale.h>
 #include <kmessagebox.h>
 
-EqualizerCanvasView::EqualizerCanvasView(TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0)
-    : TQCanvasView(tqparent, name)
+EqualizerCanvasView::EqualizerCanvasView(TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0)
+    : TQCanvasView(parent, name)
 {
     m_pen.setWidth(5);
     m_circleList = new TQPtrList<EqualizerCircle>();
diff --git a/amarok/src/scripts/graphequalizer/equalizercanvasview.h b/amarok/src/scripts/graphequalizer/equalizercanvasview.h
index f34dc8d9..045aff16 100644
--- a/amarok/src/scripts/graphequalizer/equalizercanvasview.h
+++ b/amarok/src/scripts/graphequalizer/equalizercanvasview.h
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ class EqualizerCanvasView : public TQCanvasView
     Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
 public:
-    EqualizerCanvasView(TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name);
+    EqualizerCanvasView(TQWidget *parent, const char *name);
     void init();
     void contentsMousePressEvent(TQMouseEvent *event);
     void contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent(TQMouseEvent *event);
@@ -67,9 +67,9 @@ class CallAmarok : public TQObject
     Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
 public:
-    CallAmarok(TQObject* tqparent, const char *name,
+    CallAmarok(TQObject* parent, const char *name,
         EqualizerCanvasView* canvasView, TQSlider* preampSlider) 
-    : TQObject(tqparent, name) 
+    : TQObject(parent, name) 
     {
         m_canvasView = canvasView;
         m_preampSlider = preampSlider;
diff --git a/amarok/src/scripts/graphequalizer/stdinreader.h b/amarok/src/scripts/graphequalizer/stdinreader.h
index b4b8acbd..95a0adc1 100644
--- a/amarok/src/scripts/graphequalizer/stdinreader.h
+++ b/amarok/src/scripts/graphequalizer/stdinreader.h
@@ -15,8 +15,8 @@ class StdinReader : public TQObject
     TQ_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    StdinReader(TQObject * tqparent = 0, const char * name = 0)
-    :TQObject(tqparent,name)
+    StdinReader(TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0)
+    :TQObject(parent,name)
     {
         TQSocketNotifier* streamListener = new TQSocketNotifier(0, TQSocketNotifier::Read, this, "stdinWatcher");
         connect(streamListener, TQT_SIGNAL(activated(int)), this, TQT_SLOT(dataRecieved()) );
diff --git a/amarok/src/sliderwidget.cpp b/amarok/src/sliderwidget.cpp
index 4e2c1d81..15998af7 100644
--- a/amarok/src/sliderwidget.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/sliderwidget.cpp
@@ -41,8 +41,8 @@
 #include <kpopupmenu.h>
 #include <kstandarddirs.h>
 
-Amarok::Slider::Slider( Qt::Orientation orientation, TQWidget *tqparent, uint max )
-        : TQSlider( orientation, tqparent )
+Amarok::Slider::Slider( Qt::Orientation orientation, TQWidget *parent, uint max )
+        : TQSlider( orientation, parent )
         , m_sliding( false )
         , m_outside( false )
         , m_prevValue( 0 )
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ void
 Amarok::Slider::wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent *e )
 {
     if( orientation() == Qt::Vertical ) {
-        // Will be handled by the tqparent widget
+        // Will be handled by the parent widget
         e->ignore();
         return;
     }
@@ -141,8 +141,8 @@ Amarok::Slider::setValue( int newValue )
 #define MARGIN 3
 
 Amarok::PrettySlider::PrettySlider( Qt::Orientation orientation, SliderMode mode,
-                                    TQWidget *tqparent, uint max )
-    : Amarok::Slider( orientation, tqparent, max )
+                                    TQWidget *parent, uint max )
+    : Amarok::Slider( orientation, parent, max )
     , m_mode( mode )
     , m_showingMoodbar( false )
 {
@@ -350,8 +350,8 @@ Amarok::PrettySlider::tqsizeHint() const
 /// CLASS VolumeSlider
 //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-Amarok::VolumeSlider::VolumeSlider( TQWidget *tqparent, uint max )
-    : Amarok::Slider( Qt::Horizontal, tqparent, max )
+Amarok::VolumeSlider::VolumeSlider( TQWidget *parent, uint max )
+    : Amarok::Slider( Qt::Horizontal, parent, max )
     , m_animCount( 0 )
     , m_animTimer( new TQTimer( this ) )
     , m_pixmapInset( TQPixmap( locate( "data","amarok/images/volumeslider-inset.png" ) ) )
@@ -389,12 +389,12 @@ Amarok::VolumeSlider::generateGradient()
     //KIconEffect::colorize( temp, tqcolorGroup().highlight(), 1.0 );
 
     const TQPixmap temp( locate( "data","amarok/images/volumeslider-gradient.png" ) );
-    const TQBitmap tqmask( temp.createHeuristicMask() );
+    const TQBitmap mask( temp.createHeuristicMask() );
 
     m_pixmapGradient = TQPixmap( m_pixmapInset.size() );
     KPixmapEffect::gradient( m_pixmapGradient, tqcolorGroup().background(), tqcolorGroup().highlight(),
                              KPixmapEffect::HorizontalGradient );
-    m_pixmapGradient.setMask( tqmask );
+    m_pixmapGradient.setMask( mask );
 }
 
 void
diff --git a/amarok/src/sliderwidget.h b/amarok/src/sliderwidget.h
index 2bf4d7aa..9d90f4eb 100644
--- a/amarok/src/sliderwidget.h
+++ b/amarok/src/sliderwidget.h
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ namespace Amarok
             } SliderMode;
 
             PrettySlider( Qt::Orientation orientation, SliderMode mode,
-                          TQWidget *tqparent, uint max = 0 );
+                          TQWidget *parent, uint max = 0 );
 
             virtual void newBundle( const MetaBundle &bundle );
 
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ namespace Amarok
   TQ_OBJECT
 
         public:
-            VolumeSlider( TQWidget *tqparent, uint max = 0 );
+            VolumeSlider( TQWidget *parent, uint max = 0 );
 
         protected:
             virtual void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent* );
diff --git a/amarok/src/smartplaylisteditor.cpp b/amarok/src/smartplaylisteditor.cpp
index d81e3e12..5ca0242f 100644
--- a/amarok/src/smartplaylisteditor.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/smartplaylisteditor.cpp
@@ -64,8 +64,8 @@ TQStringList m_expandableDbFields;
 
 
 
-SmartPlaylistEditor::SmartPlaylistEditor( TQString defaultName, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
-    : KDialogBase( tqparent, name, true, i18n("Create Smart Playlist"),
+SmartPlaylistEditor::SmartPlaylistEditor( TQString defaultName, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : KDialogBase( parent, name, true, i18n("Create Smart Playlist"),
       Ok|Cancel, Ok, true )
 {
     init(defaultName);
@@ -74,8 +74,8 @@ SmartPlaylistEditor::SmartPlaylistEditor( TQString defaultName, TQWidget *tqpare
 }
 
 
-SmartPlaylistEditor::SmartPlaylistEditor( TQWidget *tqparent, TQDomElement xml, const char *name)
-    : KDialogBase( tqparent, name, true, i18n("Edit Smart Playlist"),
+SmartPlaylistEditor::SmartPlaylistEditor( TQWidget *parent, TQDomElement xml, const char *name)
+    : KDialogBase( parent, name, true, i18n("Edit Smart Playlist"),
       Ok|Cancel, Ok, true )
 {
     init( xml.attribute( "name" ) );
@@ -403,8 +403,8 @@ TQDomElement SmartPlaylistEditor::result()
 //    CLASS CriteriaEditor
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-CriteriaEditor::CriteriaEditor( SmartPlaylistEditor *editor, TQWidget *tqparent, int criteriaType, TQDomElement criteria )
-    : TQHBox( tqparent )
+CriteriaEditor::CriteriaEditor( SmartPlaylistEditor *editor, TQWidget *parent, int criteriaType, TQDomElement criteria )
+    : TQHBox( parent )
     , m_playlistEditor( editor )
     , m_currentValueType( -1 )
 {
diff --git a/amarok/src/smartplaylisteditor.h b/amarok/src/smartplaylisteditor.h
index 03021851..145648bb 100644
--- a/amarok/src/smartplaylisteditor.h
+++ b/amarok/src/smartplaylisteditor.h
@@ -30,8 +30,8 @@ Q_OBJECT
     friend class CriteriaEditor;
 
     public:
-        SmartPlaylistEditor( TQString playlist_name, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name=0 );
-        SmartPlaylistEditor( TQWidget *tqparent, TQDomElement xml, const char *name=0 );
+        SmartPlaylistEditor( TQString playlist_name, TQWidget *parent, const char *name=0 );
+        SmartPlaylistEditor( TQWidget *parent, TQDomElement xml, const char *name=0 );
 
         TQDomElement result();
 
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ class CriteriaEditor : public TQHBox
 Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
     public:
-        CriteriaEditor( SmartPlaylistEditor *editor, TQWidget *tqparent, int criteriaType, TQDomElement criteria = TQDomElement() );
+        CriteriaEditor( SmartPlaylistEditor *editor, TQWidget *parent, int criteriaType, TQDomElement criteria = TQDomElement() );
         ~CriteriaEditor();
         TQString getSearchCriteria();
         void setSearchCriteria( const TQString &str );
diff --git a/amarok/src/socketserver.cpp b/amarok/src/socketserver.cpp
index 813e412d..8559bbeb 100644
--- a/amarok/src/socketserver.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/socketserver.cpp
@@ -38,8 +38,8 @@
 
 /// @class Amarok::SocketServer
 
-Amarok::SocketServer::SocketServer( const TQString &socketName, TQObject *tqparent )
-        : TQServerSocket( tqparent )
+Amarok::SocketServer::SocketServer( const TQString &socketName, TQObject *parent )
+        : TQServerSocket( parent )
 {
     m_sockfd = ::socket( AF_UNIX, SOCK_STREAM, 0 );
 
@@ -85,8 +85,8 @@ Amarok::SocketServer::~SocketServer()
 
 /// @class Vis::SocketServer
 
-Vis::SocketServer::SocketServer( TQObject *tqparent )
-        : Amarok::SocketServer( "amarok.visualization_socket", tqparent )
+Vis::SocketServer::SocketServer( TQObject *parent )
+        : Amarok::SocketServer( "amarok.visualization_socket", parent )
 {}
 
 void
@@ -145,16 +145,16 @@ Vis::SocketNotifier::request( int sockfd ) //slot
 Vis::Selector*
 Vis::Selector::instance()
 {
-    TQWidget *tqparent = reinterpret_cast<TQWidget*>( pApp->playlistWindow() );
-    TQObject *o = tqparent->child( "Vis::Selector::instance" );
+    TQWidget *parent = reinterpret_cast<TQWidget*>( pApp->playlistWindow() );
+    TQObject *o = parent->child( "Vis::Selector::instance" );
 
     debug() << bool(o == 0) << endl;
 
-    return o ? static_cast<Selector*>( TQT_TQWIDGET(o) ) : new Selector( tqparent );
+    return o ? static_cast<Selector*>( TQT_TQWIDGET(o) ) : new Selector( parent );
 }
 
-Vis::Selector::Selector( TQWidget *tqparent )
-        : TQListView( tqparent, "Vis::Selector::instance", TQt::WType_Dialog )
+Vis::Selector::Selector( TQWidget *parent )
+        : TQListView( parent, "Vis::Selector::instance", TQt::WType_Dialog )
         , m_server( new SocketServer( TQT_TQOBJECT(this) ) )
 {
     Amarok::OverrideCursor waitcursor;
diff --git a/amarok/src/socketserver.h b/amarok/src/socketserver.h
index 35fa7bc3..03768047 100644
--- a/amarok/src/socketserver.h
+++ b/amarok/src/socketserver.h
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ namespace Amarok
     class SocketServer : public TQServerSocket
     {
     public:
-        SocketServer( const TQString &socketName, TQObject *tqparent );
+        SocketServer( const TQString &socketName, TQObject *parent );
        ~SocketServer();
 
     protected:
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ namespace Vis
     {
         Q_OBJECT
   TQ_OBJECT
-        Selector( TQWidget *tqparent=0 );
+        Selector( TQWidget *parent=0 );
         SocketServer *m_server;
 
         virtual void viewportPaintEvent( TQPaintEvent* );
@@ -79,8 +79,8 @@ namespace Vis
         class Item : public TQCheckListItem
         {
         public:
-            Item( TQListView *tqparent, const char *command, const TQString &text, const TQString &s2 )
-                    : TQCheckListItem( tqparent, text, TQCheckListItem::CheckBox )
+            Item( TQListView *parent, const char *command, const TQString &text, const TQString &s2 )
+                    : TQCheckListItem( parent, text, TQCheckListItem::CheckBox )
                     , m_proc( 0 )
                     , m_sockfd( -1 )
                     , m_command( command ) { setText( 1, s2 ); }
diff --git a/amarok/src/sqlite/sqlite3.c b/amarok/src/sqlite/sqlite3.c
index 1742e80e..1c596d16 100644
--- a/amarok/src/sqlite/sqlite3.c
+++ b/amarok/src/sqlite/sqlite3.c
@@ -2910,7 +2910,7 @@ int sqlite3_blob_write(sqlite3_blob *, const void *z, int n, int iOffset);
 ** The maximum number of attached databases.  This must be at least 2
 ** in order to support the main database file (0) and the file used to
 ** hold temporary tables (1).  And it must be less than 32 because
-** we use a bittqmask of databases with a u32 in places (for example
+** we use a bitmask of databases with a u32 in places (for example
 ** the Parse.cookieMask field).
 */
 #ifndef STQLITE_MAX_ATTACHED
@@ -3688,7 +3688,7 @@ typedef struct VdbeOpList VdbeOpList;
 #define OP_NotUsed_137                        137
 
 /* Opcodes that are guaranteed to never push a value onto the stack
-** contain a 1 their corresponding position of the following tqmask
+** contain a 1 their corresponding position of the following mask
 ** set.  See the opcodeNoPush() function in vdbeaux.c  */
 #define NOPUSH_MASK_0 0xeeb4
 #define NOPUSH_MASK_1 0xf96b
@@ -5459,13 +5459,13 @@ struct IdList {
 };
 
 /*
-** The bittqmask datatype defined below is used for various optimizations.
+** The bitmask datatype defined below is used for various optimizations.
 **
 ** Changing this from a 64-bit to a 32-bit type limits the number of
 ** tables in a join to 32 instead of 64.  But it also reduces the size
 ** of the library by 738 bytes on ix86.
 */
-typedef u64 Bittqmask;
+typedef u64 Bitmask;
 
 /*
 ** The following structure describes the FROM clause of a SELECT statement.
@@ -5497,7 +5497,7 @@ struct SrcList {
     int iCursor;      /* The VDBE cursor number used to access this table */
     Expr *pOn;        /* The ON clause of a join */
     IdList *pUsing;   /* The USING clause of a join */
-    Bittqmask colUsed;  /* Bit N (1<<N) set if column N or pTab is used */
+    Bitmask colUsed;  /* Bit N (1<<N) set if column N or pTab is used */
   } a[1];             /* One entry for each identifier on the list */
 };
 
@@ -5594,7 +5594,7 @@ struct WhereInfo {
 ** the context containing the match is incremented. 
 **
 ** Each subquery gets a new NameContext.  The pNext field points to the
-** NameContext in the tqparent query.  Thus the process of scanning the
+** NameContext in the parent query.  Thus the process of scanning the
 ** NameContext list corresponds to searching through successively outer
 ** subqueries looking for a match.
 */
@@ -5704,7 +5704,7 @@ struct Parse {
   int nSet;            /* Number of sets used so far */
   int ckOffset;        /* Stack offset to data used by CHECK constraints */
   u32 writeMask;       /* Start a write transaction on these databases */
-  u32 cookieMask;      /* Bittqmask of schema verified databases */
+  u32 cookieMask;      /* Bitmask of schema verified databases */
   int cookieGoto;      /* Address of OP_Goto to cookie verifier subroutine */
   int cookieValue[STQLITE_MAX_ATTACHED+2];  /* Values of cookies to verify */
 #ifndef STQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE
@@ -5874,9 +5874,9 @@ struct TriggerStep {
  *
  * struct TriggerStack has a "pNext" member, to allow linked lists to be
  * constructed. When coding nested triggers (triggers fired by other triggers)
- * each nested trigger stores its tqparent trigger's TriggerStack as the "pNext" 
+ * each nested trigger stores its parent trigger's TriggerStack as the "pNext" 
  * pointer. Once the nested trigger has been coded, the pNext value is restored
- * to the pTriggerStack member of the Parse stucture and coding of the tqparent
+ * to the pTriggerStack member of the Parse stucture and coding of the parent
  * trigger continues.
  *
  * Before a nested trigger is coded, the linked list pointed to by the 
@@ -22605,9 +22605,9 @@ typedef struct BtLock BtLock;
 ** structure is appended and initialized to zero.  This structure stores
 ** information about the page that is decoded from the raw file page.
 **
-** The pParent field points back to the tqparent page.  This allows us to
+** The pParent field points back to the parent page.  This allows us to
 ** walk up the BTree from any leaf to the root.  Care must be taken to
-** unref() the tqparent page pointer when this page is no longer referenced.
+** unref() the parent page pointer when this page is no longer referenced.
 ** The pageDestructor() routine handles that chore.
 */
 struct MemPage {
@@ -22624,7 +22624,7 @@ struct MemPage {
   u16 maxLocal;        /* Copy of Btree.maxLocal or Btree.maxLeaf */
   u16 minLocal;        /* Copy of Btree.minLocal or Btree.minLeaf */
   u16 cellOffset;      /* Index in aData of first cell pointer */
-  u16 idxParent;       /* Index in tqparent of this node */
+  u16 idxParent;       /* Index in parent of this node */
   u16 nFree;           /* Number of free bytes on the page */
   u16 nCell;           /* Number of cells on this page, local and ovfl */
   struct _OvflCell {   /* Cells that will not fit on aData[] */
@@ -22635,7 +22635,7 @@ struct MemPage {
   u8 *aData;           /* Pointer back to the start of the page */
   DbPage *pDbPage;     /* Pager page handle */
   Pgno pgno;           /* Page number for this page */
-  MemPage *pParent;    /* The tqparent of this page.  NULL for root */
+  MemPage *pParent;    /* The parent of this page.  NULL for root */
 };
 
 /*
@@ -22835,18 +22835,18 @@ struct BtLock {
 #define PTRMAP_ISPAGE(pBt, pgno) (PTRMAP_PAGENO((pBt),(pgno))==(pgno))
 
 /*
-** The pointer map is a lookup table that identifies the tqparent page for
-** each child page in the database file.  The tqparent page is the page that
+** The pointer map is a lookup table that identifies the parent page for
+** each child page in the database file.  The parent page is the page that
 ** contains a pointer to the child.  Every page in the database contains
-** 0 or 1 tqparent pages.  (In this context 'database page' refers
+** 0 or 1 parent pages.  (In this context 'database page' refers
 ** to any page that is not part of the pointer map itself.)  Each pointer map
-** entry consists of a single byte 'type' and a 4 byte tqparent page number.
+** entry consists of a single byte 'type' and a 4 byte parent page number.
 ** The PTRMAP_XXX identifiers below are the valid types.
 **
 ** The purpose of the pointer map is to facility moving pages from one
 ** position in the file to another as part of autovacuum.  When a page
-** is moved, the pointer in its tqparent must be updated to point to the
-** new location.  The pointer map is used to locate the tqparent page quickly.
+** is moved, the pointer in its parent must be updated to point to the
+** new location.  The pointer map is used to locate the parent page quickly.
 **
 ** PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE: The database page is a root-page. The page-number is not
 **                  used in this case.
@@ -22863,7 +22863,7 @@ struct BtLock {
 **                   page in the overflow page list.
 **
 ** PTRMAP_BTREE: The database page is a non-root btree page. The page number
-**               identifies the tqparent page in the btree.
+**               identifies the parent page in the btree.
 */
 #define PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE 1
 #define PTRMAP_FREEPAGE 2
@@ -23259,10 +23259,10 @@ static Pgno ptrmapPageno(BtShared *pBt, Pgno pgno){
 ** Write an entry into the pointer map.
 **
 ** This routine updates the pointer map entry for page number 'key'
-** so that it maps to type 'eType' and tqparent page number 'pgno'.
+** so that it maps to type 'eType' and parent page number 'pgno'.
 ** An error code is returned if something goes wrong, otherwise STQLITE_OK.
 */
-static int ptrmapPut(BtShared *pBt, Pgno key, u8 eType, Pgno tqparent){
+static int ptrmapPut(BtShared *pBt, Pgno key, u8 eType, Pgno parent){
   DbPage *pDbPage;  /* The pointer map page */
   u8 *pPtrmap;      /* The pointer map data */
   Pgno iPtrmap;     /* The pointer map page number */
@@ -23284,12 +23284,12 @@ static int ptrmapPut(BtShared *pBt, Pgno key, u8 eType, Pgno tqparent){
   offset = PTRMAP_PTROFFSET(pBt, key);
   pPtrmap = (u8 *)sqlite3PagerGetData(pDbPage);
 
-  if( eType!=pPtrmap[offset] || get4byte(&pPtrmap[offset+1])!=tqparent ){
-    TRACE(("PTRMAP_UPDATE: %d->(%d,%d)\n", key, eType, tqparent));
+  if( eType!=pPtrmap[offset] || get4byte(&pPtrmap[offset+1])!=parent ){
+    TRACE(("PTRMAP_UPDATE: %d->(%d,%d)\n", key, eType, parent));
     rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pDbPage);
     if( rc==STQLITE_OK ){
       pPtrmap[offset] = eType;
-      put4byte(&pPtrmap[offset+1], tqparent);
+      put4byte(&pPtrmap[offset+1], parent);
     }
   }
 
@@ -23301,7 +23301,7 @@ static int ptrmapPut(BtShared *pBt, Pgno key, u8 eType, Pgno tqparent){
 ** Read an entry from the pointer map.
 **
 ** This routine retrieves the pointer map entry for page 'key', writing
-** the type and tqparent page number to *pEType and *pPgno respectively.
+** the type and parent page number to *pEType and *pPgno respectively.
 ** An error code is returned if something goes wrong, otherwise STQLITE_OK.
 */
 static int ptrmapGet(BtShared *pBt, Pgno key, u8 *pEType, Pgno *pPgno){
@@ -23719,8 +23719,8 @@ static void decodeFlags(MemPage *pPage, int flagByte){
 ** Initialize the auxiliary information for a disk block.
 **
 ** The pParent parameter must be a pointer to the MemPage which
-** is the tqparent of the page being initialized.  The root of a
-** BTree has no tqparent and so for that page, pParent==NULL.
+** is the parent of the page being initialized.  The root of a
+** BTree has no parent and so for that page, pParent==NULL.
 **
 ** Return STQLITE_OK on success.  If we see that the page does
 ** not contain a well-formed database page, then return 
@@ -23730,7 +23730,7 @@ static void decodeFlags(MemPage *pPage, int flagByte){
 */
 STQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeInitPage(
   MemPage *pPage,        /* The page to be initialized */
-  MemPage *pParent       /* The tqparent.  Might be NULL */
+  MemPage *pParent       /* The parent.  Might be NULL */
 ){
   int pc;            /* Address of a freeblock within pPage->aData[] */
   int hdr;           /* Offset to beginning of page header */
@@ -23747,7 +23747,7 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeInitPage(
   assert( pPage->pgno==sqlite3PagerPagenumber(pPage->pDbPage) );
   assert( pPage->aData == &((unsigned char*)pPage)[-pBt->pageSize] );
   if( pPage->pParent!=pParent && (pPage->pParent!=0 || pPage->isInit) ){
-    /* The tqparent page should never change unless the file is corrupt */
+    /* The parent page should never change unless the file is corrupt */
     return STQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
   }
   if( pPage->isInit ) return STQLITE_OK;
@@ -25917,7 +25917,7 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeIsRootPage(MemPage *pPage){
 }
 
 /*
-** Move the cursor up to the tqparent page.
+** Move the cursor up to the parent page.
 **
 ** pCur->idx is set to the cell index that contains the pointer
 ** to the page we are coming from.  If we are coming from the
@@ -26892,7 +26892,7 @@ static int reparentPage(BtShared *pBt, Pgno pgno, MemPage *pNewParent, int idx){
 ** to pPage.
 **
 ** In other words, for every child of pPage, invoke reparentPage()
-** to make sure that each child knows that pPage is its tqparent.
+** to make sure that each child knows that pPage is its parent.
 **
 ** This routine gets called after you memcpy() one page into
 ** another.
@@ -27122,7 +27122,7 @@ static int balance(MemPage*, int);
 ** fill up.  On average.
 **
 ** pPage is the leaf page which is the right-most page in the tree.
-** pParent is its tqparent.  pPage must have a single overflow entry
+** pParent is its parent.  pPage must have a single overflow entry
 ** which is also the right-most entry on the page.
 */
 static int balance_quick(MemPage *pPage, MemPage *pParent){
@@ -27150,7 +27150,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pPage, MemPage *pParent){
   assemblePage(pNew, 1, &pCell, &szCell);
   pPage->nOverflow = 0;
 
-  /* Set the tqparent of the newly allocated page to pParent. */
+  /* Set the parent of the newly allocated page to pParent. */
   pNew->pParent = pParent;
   sqlite3PagerRef(pParent->pDbPage);
 
@@ -27190,7 +27190,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pPage, MemPage *pParent){
   }
 #endif
 
-  /* Release the reference to the new page and balance the tqparent page,
+  /* Release the reference to the new page and balance the parent page,
   ** in case the divider cell inserted caused it to become overfull.
   */
   releasePage(pNew);
@@ -27203,7 +27203,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pPage, MemPage *pParent){
 ** of pPage so that all pages have about the same amount of free space.
 ** Usually NN siblings on either side of pPage is used in the balancing,
 ** though more siblings might come from one side if pPage is the first
-** or last child of its tqparent.  If pPage has fewer than 2*NN siblings
+** or last child of its parent.  If pPage has fewer than 2*NN siblings
 ** (something which can only happen if pPage is the root page or a 
 ** child of root) then all available siblings participate in the balancing.
 **
@@ -27219,16 +27219,16 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pPage, MemPage *pParent){
 ** if the page is overfull.  Part of the job of this routine is to
 ** make sure all Cells for pPage once again fit in pPage->aData[].
 **
-** In the course of balancing the siblings of pPage, the tqparent of pPage
+** In the course of balancing the siblings of pPage, the parent of pPage
 ** might become overfull or underfull.  If that happens, then this routine
-** is called recursively on the tqparent.
+** is called recursively on the parent.
 **
 ** If this routine fails for any reason, it might leave the database
 ** in a corrupted state.  So if this routine fails, the database should
 ** be rolled back.
 */
 static int balance_nonroot(MemPage *pPage){
-  MemPage *pParent;            /* The tqparent of pPage */
+  MemPage *pParent;            /* The parent of pPage */
   BtShared *pBt;               /* The whole database */
   int nCell = 0;               /* Number of cells in apCell[] */
   int nMaxCells = 0;           /* Allocated size of apCell, szCell, aFrom. */
@@ -27262,7 +27262,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(MemPage *pPage){
 #endif
 
   /* 
-  ** Find the tqparent page.
+  ** Find the parent page.
   */
   assert( pPage->isInit );
   assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pPage->pDbPage) );
@@ -27300,7 +27300,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(MemPage *pPage){
 #endif
 
   /*
-  ** Find the cell in the tqparent page whose left child points back
+  ** Find the cell in the parent page whose left child points back
   ** to pPage.  The "idx" variable is the index of that cell.  If pPage
   ** is the rightmost child of pParent then set idx to pParent->nCell 
   */
@@ -27675,7 +27675,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(MemPage *pPage){
     j = cntNew[i];
 
     /* If the sibling page assembled above was not the right-most sibling,
-    ** insert a divider cell into the tqparent page.
+    ** insert a divider cell into the parent page.
     */
     if( i<nNew-1 && j<nCell ){
       u8 *pCell;
@@ -27758,7 +27758,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(MemPage *pPage){
   }
 
   /*
-  ** Retqparent tqchildren of all cells.
+  ** Reparent tqchildren of all cells.
   */
   for(i=0; i<nNew; i++){
     rc = reparentChildPages(apNew[i]);
@@ -27768,9 +27768,9 @@ static int balance_nonroot(MemPage *pPage){
   if( rc!=STQLITE_OK ) goto balance_cleanup;
 
   /*
-  ** Balance the tqparent page.  Note that the current page (pPage) might
+  ** Balance the parent page.  Note that the current page (pPage) might
   ** have been added to the freelist so it might no longer be initialized.
-  ** But the tqparent page will always be initialized.
+  ** But the parent page will always be initialized.
   */
   assert( pParent->isInit );
   rc = balance(pParent, 0);
@@ -27848,7 +27848,7 @@ static int balance_shallower(MemPage *pPage){
           szCell[i] = cellSizePtr(pChild, apCell[i]);
         }
         assemblePage(pPage, pChild->nCell, apCell, szCell);
-        /* Copy the right-pointer of the child to the tqparent. */
+        /* Copy the right-pointer of the child to the parent. */
         put4byte(&pPage->aData[pPage->hdrOffset+8], 
             get4byte(&pChild->aData[pChild->hdrOffset+8]));
         freePage(pChild);
@@ -27905,10 +27905,10 @@ static int balance_deeper(MemPage *pPage){
   Pgno pgnoChild;     /* Page number of the new child page */
   BtShared *pBt;         /* The BTree */
   int usableSize;     /* Total usable size of a page */
-  u8 *data;           /* Content of the tqparent page */
+  u8 *data;           /* Content of the parent page */
   u8 *cdata;          /* Content of the child page */
-  int hdr;            /* Offset to page header in tqparent */
-  int brk;            /* Offset to content of first cell in tqparent */
+  int hdr;            /* Offset to page header in parent */
+  int brk;            /* Offset to content of first cell in parent */
 
   assert( pPage->pParent==0 );
   assert( pPage->nOverflow>0 );
@@ -28705,7 +28705,7 @@ static void checkPtrmap(
   IntegrityCk *pCheck,   /* Integrity check context */
   Pgno iChild,           /* Child page number */
   u8 eType,              /* Expected pointer map type */
-  Pgno iParent,          /* Expected pointer map tqparent page number */
+  Pgno iParent,          /* Expected pointer map parent page number */
   char *zContext         /* Context description (used for error msg) */
 ){
   int rc;
@@ -30617,7 +30617,7 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(Vdbe *p, int x){
 */
 static int opcodeNoPush(u8 op){
   /* The 10 NOPUSH_MASK_n constants are defined in the automatically
-  ** generated header file opcodes.h. Each is a 16-bit bittqmask, one
+  ** generated header file opcodes.h. Each is a 16-bit bitmask, one
   ** bit corresponding to each opcode implemented by the virtual
   ** machine in vdbe.c. The bit is true if the word "no-push" appears
   ** in a comment on the same line as the "case OP_XXX:" in 
@@ -32015,15 +32015,15 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeFinalize(Vdbe *p){
 
 /*
 ** Call the destructor for each auxdata entry in pVdbeFunc for which
-** the corresponding bit in tqmask is clear.  Auxdata entries beyond 31
+** the corresponding bit in mask is clear.  Auxdata entries beyond 31
 ** are always destroyed.  To destroy all auxdata entries, call this
-** routine with tqmask==0.
+** routine with mask==0.
 */
-STQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeDeleteAuxData(VdbeFunc *pVdbeFunc, int tqmask){
+STQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeDeleteAuxData(VdbeFunc *pVdbeFunc, int mask){
   int i;
   for(i=0; i<pVdbeFunc->nAux; i++){
     struct AuxData *pAux = &pVdbeFunc->apAux[i];
-    if( (i>31 || !(tqmask&(1<<i))) && pAux->pAux ){
+    if( (i>31 || !(mask&(1<<i))) && pAux->pAux ){
       if( pAux->xDelete ){
         pAux->xDelete(pAux->pAux);
       }
@@ -34760,7 +34760,7 @@ case OP_CollSeq: {             /* no-push */
 ** defines the function) with P2 arguments taken from the stack.  Pop all
 ** arguments from the stack and push back the result.
 **
-** P1 is a 32-bit bittqmask indicating whether or not each argument to the 
+** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the 
 ** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first
 ** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine
 ** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the
@@ -35104,7 +35104,7 @@ case OP_ToReal: {                  /* same as TK_TO_REAL, no-push */
 ** whereas it would normally be NULL.  Similarly,  NULL==123 is false when
 ** 0x200 is set but is NULL when the 0x200 bit of P1 is clear.
 **
-** The least significant byte of P1 (tqmask 0xff) must be an affinity character -
+** The least significant byte of P1 (mask 0xff) must be an affinity character -
 ** STQLITE_AFF_TEXT, STQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made 
 ** to coerce both values
 ** according to the affinity before the comparison is made. If the byte is
@@ -36268,8 +36268,8 @@ case OP_OpenWrite: {       /* no-push */
     case STQLITE_OK: {
       int flags = sqlite3BtreeFlags(pCur->pCursor);
       /* Sanity checking.  Only the lower four bits of the flags byte should
-      ** be used.  Bit 3 (tqmask 0x08) is unpreditable.  The lower 3 bits
-      ** (tqmask 0x07) should be either 5 (intkey+leafdata for tables) or
+      ** be used.  Bit 3 (mask 0x08) is unpreditable.  The lower 3 bits
+      ** (mask 0x07) should be either 5 (intkey+leafdata for tables) or
       ** 2 (zerodata for indices).  If these conditions are not met it can
       ** only mean that we are dealing with a corrupt database file
       */
@@ -40260,18 +40260,18 @@ static int lookupName(
   }
 
   /* If a column from a table in pSrcList is referenced, then record
-  ** this fact in the pSrcList.a[].colUsed bittqmask.  Column 0 causes
+  ** this fact in the pSrcList.a[].colUsed bitmask.  Column 0 causes
   ** bit 0 to be set.  Column 1 sets bit 1.  And so forth.  If the
-  ** column number is greater than the number of bits in the bittqmask
-  ** then set the high-order bit of the bittqmask.
+  ** column number is greater than the number of bits in the bitmask
+  ** then set the high-order bit of the bitmask.
   */
   if( pExpr->iColumn>=0 && pMatch!=0 ){
     int n = pExpr->iColumn;
-    if( n>=sizeof(Bittqmask)*8 ){
-      n = sizeof(Bittqmask)*8-1;
+    if( n>=sizeof(Bitmask)*8 ){
+      n = sizeof(Bitmask)*8-1;
     }
     assert( pMatch->iCursor==pExpr->iTable );
-    pMatch->colUsed |= ((Bittqmask)1)<<n;
+    pMatch->colUsed |= ((Bitmask)1)<<n;
   }
 
 lookupname_end:
@@ -43561,19 +43561,19 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FinishCoding(Parse *pParse){
   if( v ){
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp(v, OP_Halt, 0, 0);
 
-    /* The cookie tqmask contains one bit for each database file open.
+    /* The cookie mask contains one bit for each database file open.
     ** (Bit 0 is for main, bit 1 is for temp, and so forth.)  Bits are
     ** set for each database that is used.  Generate code to start a
     ** transaction on each used database and to verify the schema cookie
     ** on each used database.
     */
     if( pParse->cookieGoto>0 ){
-      u32 tqmask;
+      u32 mask;
       int iDb;
       sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, pParse->cookieGoto-1);
-      for(iDb=0, tqmask=1; iDb<db->nDb; tqmask<<=1, iDb++){
-        if( (tqmask & pParse->cookieMask)==0 ) continue;
-        sqlite3VdbeAddOp(v, OP_Transaction, iDb, (tqmask & pParse->writeMask)!=0);
+      for(iDb=0, mask=1; iDb<db->nDb; mask<<=1, iDb++){
+        if( (mask & pParse->cookieMask)==0 ) continue;
+        sqlite3VdbeAddOp(v, OP_Transaction, iDb, (mask & pParse->writeMask)!=0);
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp(v, OP_VerifyCookie, iDb, pParse->cookieValue[iDb]);
       }
 #ifndef STQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
@@ -46558,7 +46558,7 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(Parse *pParse){
 STQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(Parse *pParse, int iDb){
   sqlite3 *db;
   Vdbe *v;
-  int tqmask;
+  int mask;
 
   v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
   if( v==0 ) return;  /* This only happens if there was a prior error */
@@ -46570,9 +46570,9 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(Parse *pParse, int iDb){
     assert( iDb<db->nDb );
     assert( db->aDb[iDb].pBt!=0 || iDb==1 );
     assert( iDb<STQLITE_MAX_ATTACHED+2 );
-    tqmask = 1<<iDb;
-    if( (pParse->cookieMask & tqmask)==0 ){
-      pParse->cookieMask |= tqmask;
+    mask = 1<<iDb;
+    if( (pParse->cookieMask & mask)==0 ){
+      pParse->cookieMask |= mask;
       pParse->cookieValue[iDb] = db->aDb[iDb].pSchema->schema_cookie;
       if( !OMIT_TEMPDB && iDb==1 ){
         sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(pParse);
@@ -47922,20 +47922,20 @@ static void minmaxFunc(
   sqlite3_value **argv
 ){
   int i;
-  int tqmask;    /* 0 for min() or 0xffffffff for max() */
+  int mask;    /* 0 for min() or 0xffffffff for max() */
   int iBest;
   CollSeq *pColl;
 
   if( argc==0 ) return;
-  tqmask = sqlite3_user_data(context)==0 ? 0 : -1;
+  mask = sqlite3_user_data(context)==0 ? 0 : -1;
   pColl = sqlite3GetFuncCollSeq(context);
   assert( pColl );
-  assert( tqmask==-1 || tqmask==0 );
+  assert( mask==-1 || mask==0 );
   iBest = 0;
   if( sqlite3_value_type(argv[0])==STQLITE_NULL ) return;
   for(i=1; i<argc; i++){
     if( sqlite3_value_type(argv[i])==STQLITE_NULL ) return;
-    if( (sqlite3MemCompare(argv[iBest], argv[i], pColl)^tqmask)>=0 ){
+    if( (sqlite3MemCompare(argv[iBest], argv[i], pColl)^mask)>=0 ){
       iBest = i;
     }
   }
@@ -52019,7 +52019,7 @@ static void returnSingleInt(Parse *pParse, const char *zLabel, int value){
 static int flagPragma(Parse *pParse, const char *zLeft, const char *zRight){
   static const struct sPragmaType {
     const char *zName;  /* Name of the pragma */
-    int tqmask;           /* Mask for the db->flags value */
+    int mask;           /* Mask for the db->flags value */
   } aPragma[] = {
     { "full_column_names",        STQLITE_FullColNames  },
     { "short_column_names",       STQLITE_ShortColNames },
@@ -52052,12 +52052,12 @@ static int flagPragma(Parse *pParse, const char *zLeft, const char *zRight){
       v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
       if( v ){
         if( zRight==0 ){
-          returnSingleInt(pParse, p->zName, (db->flags & p->tqmask)!=0 );
+          returnSingleInt(pParse, p->zName, (db->flags & p->mask)!=0 );
         }else{
           if( getBoolean(zRight) ){
-            db->flags |= p->tqmask;
+            db->flags |= p->mask;
           }else{
-            db->flags &= ~p->tqmask;
+            db->flags &= ~p->mask;
           }
         }
       }
@@ -55920,7 +55920,7 @@ static void substSelect(Select *p, int iTable, ExprList *pEList){
 ** the subquery before this routine runs.
 */
 static int flattenSubquery(
-  Select *p,           /* The tqparent or outer SELECT statement */
+  Select *p,           /* The parent or outer SELECT statement */
   int iFrom,           /* Index in p->pSrc->a[] of the inner subquery */
   int isAgg,           /* True if outer SELECT uses aggregate functions */
   int subqueryIsAgg    /* True if the subquery uses aggregate functions */
@@ -56322,7 +56322,7 @@ static int processOrderGroupBy(
 ** This routine resolves any names used in the result set of the
 ** supplied SELECT statement. If the SELECT statement being resolved
 ** is a sub-select, then pOuterNC is a pointer to the NameContext 
-** of the tqparent SELECT.
+** of the parent SELECT.
 */
 STQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3SelectResolve(
   Parse *pParse,         /* The parser context */
@@ -56580,8 +56580,8 @@ static void updateAccumulator(Parse *pParse, AggInfo *pAggInfo){
 **
 ** The pParent, parentTab, and *pParentAgg fields are filled in if this
 ** SELECT is a subquery.  This routine may try to combine this SELECT
-** with its tqparent to form a single flat query.  In so doing, it might
-** change the tqparent query from a non-aggregate to an aggregate query.
+** with its parent to form a single flat query.  In so doing, it might
+** change the parent query from a non-aggregate to an aggregate query.
 ** For that reason, the pParentAgg flag is passed as a pointer, so it
 ** can be changed.
 **
@@ -56715,7 +56715,7 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
     }
 #if STQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH>0
     /* Increment Parse.nHeight by the height of the largest expression
-    ** tree refered to by this, the tqparent select. The child select
+    ** tree refered to by this, the parent select. The child select
     ** may contain expression trees of at most
     ** (STQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH-Parse.nHeight) height. This is a bit
     ** more conservative than necessary, but much easier than enforcing
@@ -56750,7 +56750,7 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
     goto select_end;
   }
 
-  /* Check to see if this is a subquery that can be "flattened" into its tqparent.
+  /* Check to see if this is a subquery that can be "flattened" into its parent.
   ** If flattening is a possiblity, do so and return immediately.  
   */
 #ifndef STQLITE_OMIT_VIEW
@@ -58043,16 +58043,16 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3TriggersExist(
   ExprList *pChanges      /* Columns that change in an UPDATE statement */
 ){
   Trigger *pTrigger;
-  int tqmask = 0;
+  int mask = 0;
 
   pTrigger = IsVirtual(pTab) ? 0 : pTab->pTrigger;
   while( pTrigger ){
     if( pTrigger->op==op && checkColumnOverLap(pTrigger->pColumns, pChanges) ){
-      tqmask |= pTrigger->tr_tm;
+      mask |= pTrigger->tr_tm;
     }
     pTrigger = pTrigger->pNext;
   }
-  return tqmask;
+  return mask;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -59959,9 +59959,9 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE FuncDef *sqlite3VtabOverloadFunction(
 */
 
 /*
-** The number of bits in a Bittqmask.  "BMS" means "BitMask Size".
+** The number of bits in a Bitmask.  "BMS" means "BitMask Size".
 */
-#define BMS  (sizeof(Bittqmask)*8)
+#define BMS  (sizeof(Bitmask)*8)
 
 /*
 ** Trace output macros
@@ -59995,20 +59995,20 @@ typedef struct ExprMaskSet ExprMaskSet;
 ** where X is a column name and <op> is one of certain operators,
 ** then WhereTerm.leftCursor and WhereTerm.leftColumn record the
 ** cursor number and column number for X.  WhereTerm.operator records
-** the <op> using a bittqmask encoding defined by WO_xxx below.  The
-** use of a bittqmask encoding for the operator allows us to search
+** the <op> using a bitmask encoding defined by WO_xxx below.  The
+** use of a bitmask encoding for the operator allows us to search
 ** quickly for terms that match any of several different operators.
 **
 ** prereqRight and prereqAll record sets of cursor numbers,
 ** but they do so indirectly.  A single ExprMaskSet structure translates
 ** cursor number into bits and the translated bit is stored in the prereq
 ** fields.  The translation is used in order to maximize the number of
-** bits that will fit in a Bittqmask.  The VDBE cursor numbers might be
+** bits that will fit in a Bitmask.  The VDBE cursor numbers might be
 ** spread out over the non-negative integers.  For example, the cursor
 ** numbers might be 3, 8, 9, 10, 20, 23, 41, and 45.  The ExprMaskSet
 ** translates these sparse cursor numbers into consecutive integers
 ** beginning with 0 in order to make the best possible use of the available
-** bits in the Bittqmask.  So, in the example above, the cursor numbers
+** bits in the Bitmask.  So, in the example above, the cursor numbers
 ** would be mapped into integers 0 through 7.
 */
 typedef struct WhereTerm WhereTerm;
@@ -60021,8 +60021,8 @@ struct WhereTerm {
   u8 flags;               /* Bit flags.  See below */
   u8 nChild;              /* Number of tqchildren that must disable us */
   WhereClause *pWC;       /* The clause this term is part of */
-  Bittqmask prereqRight;    /* Bittqmask of tables used by pRight */
-  Bittqmask prereqAll;      /* Bittqmask of tables referenced by p */
+  Bitmask prereqRight;    /* Bitmask of tables used by pRight */
+  Bitmask prereqAll;      /* Bitmask of tables referenced by p */
 };
 
 /*
@@ -60059,8 +60059,8 @@ struct WhereClause {
 ** from the sparse cursor numbers into consecutive integers beginning
 ** with 0.
 **
-** If ExprMaskSet.ix[A]==B it means that The A-th bit of a Bittqmask
-** corresponds VDBE cursor number B.  The A-th bit of a bittqmask is 1<<A.
+** If ExprMaskSet.ix[A]==B it means that The A-th bit of a Bitmask
+** corresponds VDBE cursor number B.  The A-th bit of a bitmask is 1<<A.
 **
 ** For example, if the WHERE clause expression used these VDBE
 ** cursors:  4, 5, 8, 29, 57, 73.  Then the  ExprMaskSet structure
@@ -60075,7 +60075,7 @@ struct WhereClause {
 */
 struct ExprMaskSet {
   int n;                        /* Number of assigned cursor values */
-  int ix[sizeof(Bittqmask)*8];    /* Cursor assigned to each bit */
+  int ix[sizeof(Bitmask)*8];    /* Cursor assigned to each bit */
 };
 
 
@@ -60096,7 +60096,7 @@ struct ExprMaskSet {
 /*
 ** Value for flags returned by bestIndex().  
 **
-** The least significant byte is reserved as a tqmask for WO_ values above.
+** The least significant byte is reserved as a mask for WO_ values above.
 ** The WhereLevel.flags field is usually set to WO_IN|WO_EQ|WO_ISNULL.
 ** But if the table is the right table of a left join, WhereLevel.flags
 ** is set to WO_IN|WO_EQ.  The WhereLevel.flags field can then be used as
@@ -60216,26 +60216,26 @@ static void whereSplit(WhereClause *pWC, Expr *pExpr, int op){
 }
 
 /*
-** Initialize an expression tqmask set
+** Initialize an expression mask set
 */
 #define initMaskSet(P)  memset(P, 0, sizeof(*P))
 
 /*
-** Return the bittqmask for the given cursor number.  Return 0 if
+** Return the bitmask for the given cursor number.  Return 0 if
 ** iCursor is not in the set.
 */
-static Bittqmask getMask(ExprMaskSet *pMaskSet, int iCursor){
+static Bitmask getMask(ExprMaskSet *pMaskSet, int iCursor){
   int i;
   for(i=0; i<pMaskSet->n; i++){
     if( pMaskSet->ix[i]==iCursor ){
-      return ((Bittqmask)1)<<i;
+      return ((Bitmask)1)<<i;
     }
   }
   return 0;
 }
 
 /*
-** Create a new tqmask for cursor iCursor.
+** Create a new mask for cursor iCursor.
 **
 ** There is one cursor per table in the FROM clause.  The number of
 ** tables in the FROM clause is limited by a test early in the
@@ -60249,7 +60249,7 @@ static void createMask(ExprMaskSet *pMaskSet, int iCursor){
 
 /*
 ** This routine walks (recursively) an expression tree and generates
-** a bittqmask indicating which tables are used in that expression
+** a bitmask indicating which tables are used in that expression
 ** tree.
 **
 ** In order for this routine to work, the calling function must have
@@ -60258,46 +60258,46 @@ static void createMask(ExprMaskSet *pMaskSet, int iCursor){
 ** The sqlite3ExprResolveNames() routines looks for column names and
 ** sets their opcodes to TK_COLUMN and their Expr.iTable fields to
 ** the VDBE cursor number of the table.  This routine just has to
-** translate the cursor numbers into bittqmask values and OR all
+** translate the cursor numbers into bitmask values and OR all
 ** the bitmasks together.
 */
-static Bittqmask exprListTableUsage(ExprMaskSet*, ExprList*);
-static Bittqmask exprSelectTableUsage(ExprMaskSet*, Select*);
-static Bittqmask exprTableUsage(ExprMaskSet *pMaskSet, Expr *p){
-  Bittqmask tqmask = 0;
+static Bitmask exprListTableUsage(ExprMaskSet*, ExprList*);
+static Bitmask exprSelectTableUsage(ExprMaskSet*, Select*);
+static Bitmask exprTableUsage(ExprMaskSet *pMaskSet, Expr *p){
+  Bitmask mask = 0;
   if( p==0 ) return 0;
   if( p->op==TK_COLUMN ){
-    tqmask = getMask(pMaskSet, p->iTable);
-    return tqmask;
+    mask = getMask(pMaskSet, p->iTable);
+    return mask;
   }
-  tqmask = exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, p->pRight);
-  tqmask |= exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, p->pLeft);
-  tqmask |= exprListTableUsage(pMaskSet, p->pList);
-  tqmask |= exprSelectTableUsage(pMaskSet, p->pSelect);
-  return tqmask;
+  mask = exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, p->pRight);
+  mask |= exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, p->pLeft);
+  mask |= exprListTableUsage(pMaskSet, p->pList);
+  mask |= exprSelectTableUsage(pMaskSet, p->pSelect);
+  return mask;
 }
-static Bittqmask exprListTableUsage(ExprMaskSet *pMaskSet, ExprList *pList){
+static Bitmask exprListTableUsage(ExprMaskSet *pMaskSet, ExprList *pList){
   int i;
-  Bittqmask tqmask = 0;
+  Bitmask mask = 0;
   if( pList ){
     for(i=0; i<pList->nExpr; i++){
-      tqmask |= exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, pList->a[i].pExpr);
+      mask |= exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, pList->a[i].pExpr);
     }
   }
-  return tqmask;
+  return mask;
 }
-static Bittqmask exprSelectTableUsage(ExprMaskSet *pMaskSet, Select *pS){
-  Bittqmask tqmask;
+static Bitmask exprSelectTableUsage(ExprMaskSet *pMaskSet, Select *pS){
+  Bitmask mask;
   if( pS==0 ){
-    tqmask = 0;
+    mask = 0;
   }else{
-    tqmask = exprListTableUsage(pMaskSet, pS->pEList);
-    tqmask |= exprListTableUsage(pMaskSet, pS->pGroupBy);
-    tqmask |= exprListTableUsage(pMaskSet, pS->pOrderBy);
-    tqmask |= exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, pS->pWhere);
-    tqmask |= exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, pS->pHaving);
+    mask = exprListTableUsage(pMaskSet, pS->pEList);
+    mask |= exprListTableUsage(pMaskSet, pS->pGroupBy);
+    mask |= exprListTableUsage(pMaskSet, pS->pOrderBy);
+    mask |= exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, pS->pWhere);
+    mask |= exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, pS->pHaving);
   }
-  return tqmask;
+  return mask;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -60337,7 +60337,7 @@ static void exprCommute(Expr *pExpr){
 }
 
 /*
-** Translate from TK_xx operator to WO_xx bittqmask.
+** Translate from TK_xx operator to WO_xx bitmask.
 */
 static int operatorMask(int op){
   int c;
@@ -60369,7 +60369,7 @@ static WhereTerm *findTerm(
   WhereClause *pWC,     /* The WHERE clause to be searched */
   int iCur,             /* Cursor number of LHS */
   int iColumn,          /* Column number of LHS */
-  Bittqmask notReady,     /* RHS must not overlap with this tqmask */
+  Bitmask notReady,     /* RHS must not overlap with this mask */
   u16 op,               /* Mask of WO_xx values describing operator */
   Index *pIdx           /* Must be compatible with this index, if not NULL */
 ){
@@ -60636,8 +60636,8 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
   WhereTerm *pTerm = &pWC->a[idxTerm];
   ExprMaskSet *pMaskSet = pWC->pMaskSet;
   Expr *pExpr = pTerm->pExpr;
-  Bittqmask prereqLeft;
-  Bittqmask prereqAll;
+  Bitmask prereqLeft;
+  Bitmask prereqAll;
   int nPattern;
   int isComplete;
   int op;
@@ -60849,7 +60849,7 @@ or_not_possible:
     int idxNew;
     Expr *pRight, *pLeft;
     WhereTerm *pNewTerm;
-    Bittqmask prereqColumn, prereqExpr;
+    Bitmask prereqColumn, prereqExpr;
 
     pRight = pExpr->pList->a[0].pExpr;
     pLeft = pExpr->pList->a[1].pExpr;
@@ -60884,7 +60884,7 @@ static int referencesOtherTables(
   int iFirst,               /* Be searching with the iFirst-th expression */
   int iBase                 /* Ignore references to this table */
 ){
-  Bittqmask allowed = ~getMask(pMaskSet, iBase);
+  Bitmask allowed = ~getMask(pMaskSet, iBase);
   while( iFirst<pList->nExpr ){
     if( (exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, pList->a[iFirst++].pExpr)&allowed)!=0 ){
       return 1;
@@ -61133,7 +61133,7 @@ static double bestVirtualIndex(
   Parse *pParse,                 /* The parsing context */
   WhereClause *pWC,              /* The WHERE clause */
   struct SrcList_item *pSrc,     /* The FROM clause term to search */
-  Bittqmask notReady,              /* Mask of cursors that are not available */
+  Bitmask notReady,              /* Mask of cursors that are not available */
   ExprList *pOrderBy,            /* The order by clause */
   int orderByUsable,             /* True if we can potential sort */
   sqlite3_index_info **ppIdxInfo /* Index information passed to xBestIndex */
@@ -61337,7 +61337,7 @@ static double bestIndex(
   Parse *pParse,              /* The parsing context */
   WhereClause *pWC,           /* The WHERE clause */
   struct SrcList_item *pSrc,  /* The FROM clause term to search */
-  Bittqmask notReady,           /* Mask of cursors that are not available */
+  Bitmask notReady,           /* Mask of cursors that are not available */
   ExprList *pOrderBy,         /* The order by clause */
   Index **ppIndex,            /* Make *ppIndex point to the best index */
   int *pFlags,                /* Put flags describing this choice in *pFlags */
@@ -61532,13 +61532,13 @@ static double bestIndex(
     ** ever reading the table.  If that is the case, then halve the
     ** cost of this index.
     */
-    if( flags && pSrc->colUsed < (((Bittqmask)1)<<(BMS-1)) ){
-      Bittqmask m = pSrc->colUsed;
+    if( flags && pSrc->colUsed < (((Bitmask)1)<<(BMS-1)) ){
+      Bitmask m = pSrc->colUsed;
       int j;
       for(j=0; j<pProbe->nColumn; j++){
         int x = pProbe->aiColumn[j];
         if( x<BMS-1 ){
-          m &= ~(((Bittqmask)1)<<x);
+          m &= ~(((Bitmask)1)<<x);
         }
       }
       if( m==0 ){
@@ -61705,7 +61705,7 @@ static void codeAllEqualityTerms(
   Parse *pParse,        /* Parsing context */
   WhereLevel *pLevel,   /* Which nested loop of the FROM we are coding */
   WhereClause *pWC,     /* The WHERE clause */
-  Bittqmask notReady      /* Which parts of FROM have not yet been coded */
+  Bitmask notReady      /* Which parts of FROM have not yet been coded */
 ){
   int nEq = pLevel->nEq;        /* The number of == or IN constraints to code */
   int termsInMem = 0;           /* If true, store value in mem[] cells */
@@ -61887,9 +61887,9 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
   WhereInfo *pWInfo;         /* Will become the return value of this function */
   Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe;   /* The virtual database engine */
   int brk, cont = 0;         /* Addresses used during code generation */
-  Bittqmask notReady;          /* Cursors that are not yet positioned */
+  Bitmask notReady;          /* Cursors that are not yet positioned */
   WhereTerm *pTerm;          /* A single term in the WHERE clause */
-  ExprMaskSet maskSet;       /* The expression tqmask set */
+  ExprMaskSet maskSet;       /* The expression mask set */
   WhereClause wc;            /* The WHERE clause is divided into these terms */
   struct SrcList_item *pTabItem;  /* A single entry from pTabList */
   WhereLevel *pLevel;             /* A single level in the pWInfo list */
@@ -61897,7 +61897,7 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
   int andFlags;              /* AND-ed combination of all wc.a[].flags */
 
   /* The number of tables in the FROM clause is limited by the number of
-  ** bits in a Bittqmask 
+  ** bits in a Bitmask 
   */
   if( pTabList->nSrc>BMS ){
     sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "at most %d tables in a join", BMS);
@@ -61958,7 +61958,7 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
   ** This loop also figures out the nesting order of tables in the FROM
   ** clause.
   */
-  notReady = ~(Bittqmask)0;
+  notReady = ~(Bitmask)0;
   pTabItem = pTabList->a;
   pLevel = pWInfo->a;
   andFlags = ~0;
@@ -61974,7 +61974,7 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
     int bestNEq = 0;            /* nEq associated with pBest */
     double lowestCost;          /* Cost of the pBest */
     int bestJ = 0;              /* The value of j */
-    Bittqmask m;                  /* Bittqmask value for j or bestJ */
+    Bitmask m;                  /* Bitmask value for j or bestJ */
     int once = 0;               /* True when first table is seen */
     sqlite3_index_info *pIndex; /* Current virtual index */
 
@@ -62106,8 +62106,8 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
 #endif
     if( (pLevel->flags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)==0 ){
       sqlite3OpenTable(pParse, pTabItem->iCursor, iDb, pTab, OP_OpenRead);
-      if( pTab->nCol<(sizeof(Bittqmask)*8) ){
-        Bittqmask b = pTabItem->colUsed;
+      if( pTab->nCol<(sizeof(Bitmask)*8) ){
+        Bitmask b = pTabItem->colUsed;
         int n = 0;
         for(; b; b=b>>1, n++){}
         sqlite3VdbeChangeP2(v, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)-1, n);
@@ -62138,7 +62138,7 @@ STQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
   ** loop below generates code for a single nested loop of the VM
   ** program.
   */
-  notReady = ~(Bittqmask)0;
+  notReady = ~(Bitmask)0;
   for(i=0, pLevel=pWInfo->a; i<pTabList->nSrc; i++, pLevel++){
     int j;
     int iCur = pTabItem->iCursor;  /* The VDBE cursor for the table */
@@ -62803,7 +62803,7 @@ typedef union {
   struct TrigEvent yy370;
   SrcList* yy373;
   Expr * yy386;
-  struct {int value; int tqmask;} yy405;
+  struct {int value; int mask;} yy405;
   Token yy410;
   IdList* yy432;
   int yy495;
@@ -64787,19 +64787,19 @@ static void yy_reduce(
 { yygotominor.yy46 = OE_Restrict * 0x010101; }
         break;
       case 66:
-{ yygotominor.yy46 = (yymsp[-1].minor.yy46 & yymsp[0].minor.yy405.tqmask) | yymsp[0].minor.yy405.value; }
+{ yygotominor.yy46 = (yymsp[-1].minor.yy46 & yymsp[0].minor.yy405.mask) | yymsp[0].minor.yy405.value; }
         break;
       case 67:
-{ yygotominor.yy405.value = 0;     yygotominor.yy405.tqmask = 0x000000; }
+{ yygotominor.yy405.value = 0;     yygotominor.yy405.mask = 0x000000; }
         break;
       case 68:
-{ yygotominor.yy405.value = yymsp[0].minor.yy46;     yygotominor.yy405.tqmask = 0x0000ff; }
+{ yygotominor.yy405.value = yymsp[0].minor.yy46;     yygotominor.yy405.mask = 0x0000ff; }
         break;
       case 69:
-{ yygotominor.yy405.value = yymsp[0].minor.yy46<<8;  yygotominor.yy405.tqmask = 0x00ff00; }
+{ yygotominor.yy405.value = yymsp[0].minor.yy46<<8;  yygotominor.yy405.mask = 0x00ff00; }
         break;
       case 70:
-{ yygotominor.yy405.value = yymsp[0].minor.yy46<<16; yygotominor.yy405.tqmask = 0xff0000; }
+{ yygotominor.yy405.value = yymsp[0].minor.yy46<<16; yygotominor.yy405.mask = 0xff0000; }
         break;
       case 71:
 { yygotominor.yy46 = OE_SetNull; }
diff --git a/amarok/src/statistics.cpp b/amarok/src/statistics.cpp
index 33b64113..1e1774ca 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statistics.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/statistics.cpp
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@
 
 Statistics *Statistics::s_instance = 0;
 
-Statistics::Statistics( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
-    : KDialogBase( KDialogBase::Swallow, 0, tqparent, name, false, 0, Close )
+Statistics::Statistics( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : KDialogBase( KDialogBase::Swallow, 0, parent, name, false, 0, Close )
     , m_timer( new TQTimer( this ) )
 {
     s_instance = this;
@@ -119,8 +119,8 @@ Statistics::slotSetFilter() //SLOT
 /// CLASS StatisticsList
 //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-StatisticsList::StatisticsList( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
-    : KListView( tqparent, name )
+StatisticsList::StatisticsList( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : KListView( parent, name )
     , m_currentItem( 0 )
     , m_expanded( false )
 {
@@ -681,8 +681,8 @@ StatisticsList::showContextMenu( TQListViewItem *item, const TQPoint &p, int )
 /// CLASS StatisticsItem
 //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-StatisticsItem::StatisticsItem( TQString text, StatisticsList *tqparent, KListViewItem *after, const char *name )
-    : KListViewItem( static_cast<KListView*>(tqparent), after, name )
+StatisticsItem::StatisticsItem( TQString text, StatisticsList *parent, KListViewItem *after, const char *name )
+    : KListViewItem( static_cast<KListView*>(parent), after, name )
     , m_animTimer( new TQTimer( this ) )
     , m_animCount( 0 )
     , m_isActive( false )
@@ -857,9 +857,9 @@ StatisticsItem::blendColors( const TQColor& color1, const TQColor& color2, int p
 /// CLASS StatisticsDetailedItem
 //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-StatisticsDetailedItem::StatisticsDetailedItem( const TQString &text, const TQString &subtext, StatisticsItem *tqparent,
+StatisticsDetailedItem::StatisticsDetailedItem( const TQString &text, const TQString &subtext, StatisticsItem *parent,
                                                 StatisticsDetailedItem *after, const char *name )
-    : KListViewItem( tqparent, after, name )
+    : KListViewItem( parent, after, name )
     , m_type( NONE )
     , m_subText( subtext )
 {
diff --git a/amarok/src/statistics.h b/amarok/src/statistics.h
index 446556e2..4c043bec 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statistics.h
+++ b/amarok/src/statistics.h
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ class Statistics : public KDialogBase
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        Statistics( TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+        Statistics( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
         ~Statistics();
 
         static Statistics *instance() { return s_instance; }
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ class StatisticsList : public KListView
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        StatisticsList( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name=0 );
+        StatisticsList( TQWidget *parent, const char *name=0 );
         ~StatisticsList() {};
 
         TQString filter()                           { return m_filter; }
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ class StatisticsItem : public TQObject, public KListViewItem
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        StatisticsItem( TQString text, StatisticsList *tqparent, KListViewItem *after=0, const char *name=0 );
+        StatisticsItem( TQString text, StatisticsList *parent, KListViewItem *after=0, const char *name=0 );
         ~StatisticsItem() {};
 
         void    paintCell( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg, int column, int width, int align );
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ class StatisticsItem : public TQObject, public KListViewItem
 class StatisticsDetailedItem : public KListViewItem
 {
     public:
-        StatisticsDetailedItem( const TQString &text, const TQString &subtext, StatisticsItem *tqparent,
+        StatisticsDetailedItem( const TQString &text, const TQString &subtext, StatisticsItem *parent,
                                 StatisticsDetailedItem *after=0, const char *name=0 );
         ~StatisticsDetailedItem() {};
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/overlayWidget.cpp b/amarok/src/statusbar/overlayWidget.cpp
index 05fcf2c0..3298056f 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/overlayWidget.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/overlayWidget.cpp
@@ -26,12 +26,12 @@
 namespace KDE {
 
 
-OverlayWidget::OverlayWidget( TQWidget *tqparent, TQWidget *anchor, const char* name )
-        : TQFrame( tqparent->parentWidget(), name )
+OverlayWidget::OverlayWidget( TQWidget *parent, TQWidget *anchor, const char* name )
+        : TQFrame( parent->parentWidget(), name )
         , m_anchor( anchor )
-        , m_tqparent( tqparent )
+        , m_parent( parent )
 {
-    tqparent->installEventFilter( this );
+    parent->installEventFilter( this );
 
     hide();
 }
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/overlayWidget.h b/amarok/src/statusbar/overlayWidget.h
index 673099c5..bb1d8f4c 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/overlayWidget.h
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/overlayWidget.h
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ namespace KDE
          * The widget is parented to the toplevelwidget of alignWidget,
          * this could be an issue if that widget has an autoAdd Layout
          */
-        OverlayWidget( TQWidget *tqparent, TQWidget *anchor, const char *name = 0 );
+        OverlayWidget( TQWidget *parent, TQWidget *anchor, const char *name = 0 );
         virtual void reposition();
 
     protected:
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ namespace KDE
 
     private:
         TQWidget *m_anchor;
-        TQWidget *m_tqparent;
+        TQWidget *m_parent;
     };
 }
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/popupMessage.cpp b/amarok/src/statusbar/popupMessage.cpp
index 136e01b9..58855c14 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/popupMessage.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/popupMessage.cpp
@@ -38,10 +38,10 @@
 namespace KDE
 {
 
-PopupMessage::PopupMessage( TQWidget *tqparent, TQWidget *anchor, int timeout, const char *name )
-                : OverlayWidget( tqparent, anchor, name )
+PopupMessage::PopupMessage( TQWidget *parent, TQWidget *anchor, int timeout, const char *name )
+                : OverlayWidget( parent, anchor, name )
                 , m_anchor( anchor )
-                , m_tqparent( tqparent )
+                , m_parent( parent )
                 , m_maskEffect( Slide )
                 , m_dissolveSize( 0 )
                 , m_dissolveDelta( -1 )
@@ -145,9 +145,9 @@ void PopupMessage::display() //SLOT
 
     if( m_maskEffect == Dissolve )
     {
-        // necessary to create the tqmask
-        m_tqmask.resize( width(), height() );
-        // make the tqmask empty and hence will not show widget with show() called below
+        // necessary to create the mask
+        m_mask.resize( width(), height() );
+        // make the mask empty and hence will not show widget with show() called below
         dissolveMask();
         m_timerId = startTimer( 1000 / 30 );
     }
@@ -214,13 +214,13 @@ void PopupMessage::dissolveMask()
     if( m_stage == 1 )
     {
         tqrepaint( false );
-        TQPainter maskPainter(&m_tqmask);
+        TQPainter maskPainter(&m_mask);
 
-        m_tqmask.fill(TQt::black);
+        m_mask.fill(TQt::black);
 
         maskPainter.setBrush(TQt::white);
         maskPainter.setPen(TQt::white);
-        maskPainter.drawRect( m_tqmask.rect() );
+        maskPainter.drawRect( m_mask.rect() );
 
         m_dissolveSize += m_dissolveDelta;
 
@@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ void PopupMessage::dissolveMask()
             }
         }
 
-        setMask(m_tqmask);
+        setMask(m_mask);
     }
     else if ( m_stage == 2 )
     {
@@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ void PopupMessage::slideMask()
     switch( m_stage )
     {
         case 1: //raise
-            move( 0, m_tqparent->y() - m_offset );
+            move( 0, m_parent->y() - m_offset );
 
             m_offset++;
             if( m_offset > height() )
@@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ void PopupMessage::slideMask()
 
         case 3: //lower
             m_offset--;
-            move( 0, m_tqparent->y() - m_offset );
+            move( 0, m_parent->y() - m_offset );
 
             if( m_offset < 0 )
                 deleteLater();
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/popupMessage.h b/amarok/src/statusbar/popupMessage.h
index dfad9080..e23b7a39 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/popupMessage.h
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/popupMessage.h
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ namespace KDE
          * @param timeout : how long to wait before auto closing. A value of 0 means close
          *                  only on pressing the closeButton or close() is called.
          */
-        PopupMessage( TQWidget *tqparent, TQWidget *anchor, int timeout = 5000 /*milliseconds*/, const char* name = 0 );
+        PopupMessage( TQWidget *parent, TQWidget *anchor, int timeout = 5000 /*milliseconds*/, const char* name = 0 );
 
         enum MaskEffect { Plain, Slide, Dissolve };
 
@@ -88,8 +88,8 @@ namespace KDE
         TQVBoxLayout *m_tqlayout;
         TQFrame      *m_countdownFrame;
         TQWidget     *m_anchor;
-        TQWidget     *m_tqparent;
-        TQBitmap      m_tqmask;
+        TQWidget     *m_parent;
+        TQBitmap      m_mask;
         MaskEffect   m_maskEffect;
 
         int      m_dissolveSize;
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/progressBar.cpp b/amarok/src/statusbar/progressBar.cpp
index 6b426f0d..2e69bf19 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/progressBar.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/progressBar.cpp
@@ -31,15 +31,15 @@
 namespace KDE {
 
 
-ProgressBar::ProgressBar( TQWidget *tqparent, TQLabel *label )
-        : TQProgressBar( tqparent )
+ProgressBar::ProgressBar( TQWidget *parent, TQLabel *label )
+        : TQProgressBar( parent )
         , m_label( label )
         , m_done( false )
 {
     DEBUG_FUNC_INFO
 
     m_label->tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Minimum );
-    m_abort = new KPushButton( KStdGuiItem::cancel(), tqparent );
+    m_abort = new KPushButton( KStdGuiItem::cancel(), parent );
     m_abort->hide();
     m_abort->setText( i18n("Abort") );
     m_label->show();
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/progressBar.h b/amarok/src/statusbar/progressBar.h
index 6e7972fe..a3f5f1b7 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/progressBar.h
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/progressBar.h
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ namespace KDE
         TQString description() const { return m_description; }
 
     protected:
-        ProgressBar( TQWidget *tqparent, TQLabel *label );
+        ProgressBar( TQWidget *parent, TQLabel *label );
        ~ProgressBar();
 
         virtual void hide();
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/queueLabel.cpp b/amarok/src/statusbar/queueLabel.cpp
index 1309da98..d78869a0 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/queueLabel.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/queueLabel.cpp
@@ -39,8 +39,8 @@
 
 static const uint MAX_TO_SHOW = 20;
 
-QueueLabel::QueueLabel( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
-    : TQLabel( tqparent, name )
+QueueLabel::QueueLabel( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : TQLabel( parent, name )
     , m_timer( this )
     , m_tooltip( 0 )
     , m_tooltipShowing( false )
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/queueLabel.h b/amarok/src/statusbar/queueLabel.h
index cc7b0873..7ded871f 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/queueLabel.h
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/queueLabel.h
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ class QueueLabel: public TQLabel //homonym, heh heh
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        QueueLabel( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name = 0 );
+        QueueLabel( TQWidget *parent, const char *name = 0 );
 
     signals:
         void queueChanged( const PLItemList &, const PLItemList & );
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/selectLabel.h b/amarok/src/statusbar/selectLabel.h
index f9d3fb3a..596834a4 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/selectLabel.h
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/selectLabel.h
@@ -46,8 +46,8 @@ class SelectLabel : public TQLabel
         void activated( int );
 
     public:
-        SelectLabel( Amarok::SelectAction const*const action, TQWidget *tqparent )
-                : TQLabel( tqparent )
+        SelectLabel( Amarok::SelectAction const*const action, TQWidget *parent )
+                : TQLabel( parent )
                 , m_action( action )
                 , m_tooltip( 0 )
                 , m_tooltipShowing( false )
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/squeezedtextlabel.cpp b/amarok/src/statusbar/squeezedtextlabel.cpp
index 8f000def..caca939a 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/squeezedtextlabel.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/squeezedtextlabel.cpp
@@ -26,15 +26,15 @@
 
 namespace KDE {
 
-SqueezedTextLabel::SqueezedTextLabel( const TQString &text , TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
- : TQLabel ( tqparent, name ) {
+SqueezedTextLabel::SqueezedTextLabel( const TQString &text , TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+ : TQLabel ( parent, name ) {
   tqsetSizePolicy(TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Expanding, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ));
   fullText = text;
   squeezeTextToLabel();
 }
 
-SqueezedTextLabel::SqueezedTextLabel( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
- : TQLabel ( tqparent, name ) {
+SqueezedTextLabel::SqueezedTextLabel( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+ : TQLabel ( parent, name ) {
   tqsetSizePolicy(TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Expanding, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ));
 }
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/squeezedtextlabel.h b/amarok/src/statusbar/squeezedtextlabel.h
index 11e9bf08..a5cdbb0c 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/squeezedtextlabel.h
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/squeezedtextlabel.h
@@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ class SqueezedTextLabel : public TQLabel {
   TQ_OBJECT
 
 public:
-  SqueezedTextLabel( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name = 0 );
-  SqueezedTextLabel( const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name = 0 );
+  SqueezedTextLabel( TQWidget *parent, const char *name = 0 );
+  SqueezedTextLabel( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char *name = 0 );
 
   virtual TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
   virtual TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/statusBarBase.cpp b/amarok/src/statusbar/statusBarBase.cpp
index 645a9f19..e2373936 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/statusBarBase.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/statusBarBase.cpp
@@ -70,9 +70,9 @@ namespace SingleShotPool
         timer->start( timeout, true );
     }
 
-    static inline bool isActive( TQObject *tqparent, const char *slot )
+    static inline bool isActive( TQObject *parent, const char *slot )
     {
-        TQTimer *timer = static_cast<TQTimer*>( tqparent->child( slot ) );
+        TQTimer *timer = static_cast<TQTimer*>( parent->child( slot ) );
 
         return timer && timer->isA( TQTIMER_OBJECT_NAME_STRING ) && timer->isActive();
     }
@@ -82,8 +82,8 @@ namespace SingleShotPool
 //TODO allow for uncertain progress periods
 
 
-StatusBar::StatusBar( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
-        : TQWidget( tqparent, name )
+StatusBar::StatusBar( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+        : TQWidget( parent, name )
         , m_logCounter( -1 )
 {
     TQBoxLayout *maintqlayout = new TQHBoxLayout( this, 2, /*spacing*/5 );
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/statusBarBase.h b/amarok/src/statusbar/statusBarBase.h
index 56e7dc5c..e71f5071 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/statusBarBase.h
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/statusBarBase.h
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ class TQTimer;
 namespace KIO { class Job; }
 
 //TODO
-// * concept of a temporary message that is removed when a qobject tqparent is deleted
+// * concept of a temporary message that is removed when a qobject parent is deleted
 
 namespace KDE
 {
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ namespace KDE
   TQ_OBJECT
 
     public:
-        StatusBar( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name = "mainStatusBar" );
+        StatusBar( TQWidget *parent, const char *name = "mainStatusBar" );
 
         enum MessageType { Information, Question, Sorry, Warning, Error, ShowAgainCheckBox, None };
 
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ namespace KDE
         virtual bool event( TQEvent* );
 
         /**
-         * You must tqparent the widget to the statusbar, we won't do that
+         * You must parent the widget to the statusbar, we won't do that
          * for you! The widget will be added to the right of the tqlayout.
          * Currently you must add widgets before the statusbar gets shown
          * for the first time, because we are not currently very flexible.
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/statusbar.cpp b/amarok/src/statusbar/statusbar.cpp
index 8b210a84..6d2c1e37 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/statusbar.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/statusbar.cpp
@@ -55,8 +55,8 @@ KAction *action( const char *name ) { return Amarok::actionCollection()->action(
 StatusBar* StatusBar::s_instance = 0;
 
 
-StatusBar::StatusBar( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name )
-        : KDE::StatusBar( tqparent, name )
+StatusBar::StatusBar( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+        : KDE::StatusBar( parent, name )
         , EngineObserver( EngineController::instance() )
         , m_timeLength( 9 )
         , m_pauseTimer( new TQTimer( this ) )
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/statusbar.h b/amarok/src/statusbar/statusbar.h
index d42cfca4..383b84cd 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/statusbar.h
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/statusbar.h
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ namespace Amarok
         LIBAMAROK_EXPORT static StatusBar* s_instance;
 
     public:
-        StatusBar( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name = 0 );
+        StatusBar( TQWidget *parent, const char *name = 0 );
 
         static StatusBar* instance() { return s_instance; }
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/timeLabel.h b/amarok/src/statusbar/timeLabel.h
index e3b7d975..1acd0d3b 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/timeLabel.h
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/timeLabel.h
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
 class TimeLabel : public TQLabel
 {
 public:
-    TimeLabel( TQWidget *tqparent ) : TQLabel( " 0:00:00 ", tqparent )
+    TimeLabel( TQWidget *parent ) : TQLabel( " 0:00:00 ", parent )
     {
         setFont( KGlobalSettings::fixedFont() );
         tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Maximum, TQSizePolicy::Fixed );
diff --git a/amarok/src/statusbar/toggleLabel.h b/amarok/src/statusbar/toggleLabel.h
index 267550bb..f1ba257a 100644
--- a/amarok/src/statusbar/toggleLabel.h
+++ b/amarok/src/statusbar/toggleLabel.h
@@ -46,8 +46,8 @@ class ToggleLabel : public TQLabel
         void toggled( bool );
 
     public:
-        ToggleLabel( KToggleAction const*const action, TQWidget *tqparent )
-                : TQLabel( tqparent )
+        ToggleLabel( KToggleAction const*const action, TQWidget *parent )
+                : TQLabel( parent )
                 , m_action( action )
                 , m_tooltip( 0 )
                 , m_tooltipShowing( false )
diff --git a/amarok/src/tagdialog.cpp b/amarok/src/tagdialog.cpp
index 4f0a36a1..0f66a715 100644
--- a/amarok/src/tagdialog.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/tagdialog.cpp
@@ -61,8 +61,8 @@ private:
     TQStringList m_failedURLs;
 };
 
-TagDialog::TagDialog( const KURL& url, TQWidget* tqparent )
-    : TagDialogBase( tqparent )
+TagDialog::TagDialog( const KURL& url, TQWidget* parent )
+    : TagDialogBase( parent )
     , m_bundle( url, true )
     , m_playlistItem( 0 )
     , m_currentCover( 0 )
@@ -71,8 +71,8 @@ TagDialog::TagDialog( const KURL& url, TQWidget* tqparent )
 }
 
 
-TagDialog::TagDialog( const KURL::List list, TQWidget* tqparent )
-    : TagDialogBase( tqparent )
+TagDialog::TagDialog( const KURL::List list, TQWidget* parent )
+    : TagDialogBase( parent )
     , m_bundle()
     , m_playlistItem( 0 )
     , m_urlList( list )
@@ -82,8 +82,8 @@ TagDialog::TagDialog( const KURL::List list, TQWidget* tqparent )
 }
 
 
-TagDialog::TagDialog( const MetaBundle& mb, PlaylistItem* item, TQWidget* tqparent )
-    : TagDialogBase( tqparent )
+TagDialog::TagDialog( const MetaBundle& mb, PlaylistItem* item, TQWidget* parent )
+    : TagDialogBase( parent )
     , m_bundle( mb )
     , m_playlistItem( item )
     , m_currentCover( 0 )
diff --git a/amarok/src/tagdialog.h b/amarok/src/tagdialog.h
index ecb7af1f..cfab2deb 100644
--- a/amarok/src/tagdialog.h
+++ b/amarok/src/tagdialog.h
@@ -40,9 +40,9 @@ class TagDialog : public TagDialogBase
         enum Changes { NOCHANGE=0, SCORECHANGED=1, TAGSCHANGED=2, LYRICSCHANGED=4, RATINGCHANGED=8, LABELSCHANGED=16 };
         enum Tabs { SUMMARYTAB, TAGSTAB, LYRICSTAB, STATSTAB, LABELSTAB };
 
-        TagDialog( const KURL& url, TQWidget* tqparent = 0 );
-        TagDialog( const KURL::List list, TQWidget* tqparent = 0 );
-        TagDialog( const MetaBundle& mb, PlaylistItem* item, TQWidget* tqparent = 0 );
+        TagDialog( const KURL& url, TQWidget* parent = 0 );
+        TagDialog( const KURL::List list, TQWidget* parent = 0 );
+        TagDialog( const MetaBundle& mb, PlaylistItem* item, TQWidget* parent = 0 );
         ~TagDialog();
 
         void setTab( int id );
diff --git a/amarok/src/threadmanager.h b/amarok/src/threadmanager.h
index 60c4bf6e..63c3d72d 100644
--- a/amarok/src/threadmanager.h
+++ b/amarok/src/threadmanager.h
@@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ public:
      * It is only safe to have one dependent, if you depend on multiple objects
      * that might get deleted while you are running you should instead try to
      * make the multiple objects tqchildren of one TQObject and depend on the
-     * top-most tqparent or best of all would be to make copies of the data you
+     * top-most parent or best of all would be to make copies of the data you
      * need instead of being dependent.
      */
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/tooltip.cpp b/amarok/src/tooltip.cpp
index 76421182..c9bb2283 100644
--- a/amarok/src/tooltip.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/tooltip.cpp
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
 class Amarok::ToolTip::Manager: public TQObject
 {
 public:
-    Manager( TQObject *tqparent ): TQObject( tqparent ) { tqApp->installEventFilter( this ); }
+    Manager( TQObject *parent ): TQObject( parent ) { tqApp->installEventFilter( this ); }
     virtual ~Manager()
     {
         for( int n = Amarok::ToolTip::s_tooltips.count() - 1; n >= 0; --n )
@@ -69,11 +69,11 @@ TQString Amarok::ToolTip::s_text;
 TQValueList<Amarok::ToolTip*> Amarok::ToolTip::s_tooltips;
 int Amarok::ToolTip::s_hack = 0;
 
-void Amarok::ToolTip::add( ToolTipClient *client, TQWidget *tqparent ) //static
+void Amarok::ToolTip::add( ToolTipClient *client, TQWidget *parent ) //static
 {
     if( !s_manager )
         s_manager = new Amarok::ToolTip::Manager( TQT_TQOBJECT(tqApp) );
-    new ToolTip( client, tqparent );
+    new ToolTip( client, parent );
 }
 
 void Amarok::ToolTip::remove( TQWidget *widget ) //static
@@ -116,9 +116,9 @@ void Amarok::ToolTip::updateTip() //static
         }
 }
 
-Amarok::ToolTip::ToolTip( ToolTipClient *client, TQWidget *tqparent )
+Amarok::ToolTip::ToolTip( ToolTipClient *client, TQWidget *parent )
     : TQFrame( 0, 0, WStyle_Customize | WStyle_NoBorder | WStyle_Tool | WStyle_StaysOnTop | WX11BypassWM | WNoAutoErase ),
-      TQToolTip( tqparent ),
+      TQToolTip( parent ),
       m_client( client )
 {
     s_tooltips.append( this );
diff --git a/amarok/src/tooltip.h b/amarok/src/tooltip.h
index 49968a64..0ca9b92d 100644
--- a/amarok/src/tooltip.h
+++ b/amarok/src/tooltip.h
@@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ class ToolTip: public TQFrame, public TQToolTip
   TQ_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    static void add( ToolTipClient *client, TQWidget *tqparent );
-    static void remove( TQWidget *tqparent );
+    static void add( ToolTipClient *client, TQWidget *parent );
+    static void remove( TQWidget *parent );
     static void hideTips();
     static TQString textFor( TQWidget *widget, const TQPoint &pos = TQPoint() );
     static void updateTip();
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ private slots:
     void hideTip();
 
 private:
-    ToolTip( ToolTipClient *client, TQWidget *tqparent );
+    ToolTip( ToolTipClient *client, TQWidget *parent );
     virtual ~ToolTip();
     void position();
     ToolTipClient *m_client;
diff --git a/amarok/src/trackpickerdialog.cpp b/amarok/src/trackpickerdialog.cpp
index 6de609e9..aa3c8eda 100644
--- a/amarok/src/trackpickerdialog.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/trackpickerdialog.cpp
@@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
 class TrackPickerItem : public KListViewItem
 {
 public:
-    TrackPickerItem(KListView *tqparent, const KTRMResult &result) :
-        KListViewItem(tqparent, tqparent->lastChild(),
+    TrackPickerItem(KListView *parent, const KTRMResult &result) :
+        KListViewItem(parent, parent->lastChild(),
                       result.title(), result.artist(), result.album(),
                       NUMBER(result.track()), NUMBER(result.year())),
                       m_result(result) {
@@ -51,8 +51,8 @@ private:
 // public methods
 ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 
-TrackPickerDialog::TrackPickerDialog(const TQString &name, const KTRMResultList &results, TQWidget *tqparent)
-        : KDialogBase(tqparent, name.latin1(), true, TQString(), Ok | Cancel, Ok, true)
+TrackPickerDialog::TrackPickerDialog(const TQString &name, const KTRMResultList &results, TQWidget *parent)
+        : KDialogBase(parent, name.latin1(), true, TQString(), Ok | Cancel, Ok, true)
 {
     kapp->setTopWidget( this );
     setCaption( kapp->makeStdCaption( i18n("MusicBrainz Results") ) );
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ TrackPickerDialog::TrackPickerDialog(const TQString &name, const KTRMResultList
     m_base->trackList->setSelected(m_base->trackList->firstChild(), true);
   //  m_base->trackList->triggerUpdate();
     setMinimumWidth(kMax(300, width()));
-    connect(this, TQT_SIGNAL( sigSelectionMade( KTRMResult ) ), tqparent, TQT_SLOT( fillSelected( KTRMResult ) ) );
+    connect(this, TQT_SIGNAL( sigSelectionMade( KTRMResult ) ), parent, TQT_SLOT( fillSelected( KTRMResult ) ) );
 
 }
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/trackpickerdialog.h b/amarok/src/trackpickerdialog.h
index 889ca86c..2558638a 100644
--- a/amarok/src/trackpickerdialog.h
+++ b/amarok/src/trackpickerdialog.h
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ signals:
     void sigSelectionMade( KTRMResult );
 
 public:
-    TrackPickerDialog(const TQString &name, const KTRMResultList &results, TQWidget *tqparent = 0);
+    TrackPickerDialog(const TQString &name, const KTRMResultList &results, TQWidget *parent = 0);
 
     KTRMResult result() const;
 
diff --git a/amarok/src/tracktooltip.cpp b/amarok/src/tracktooltip.cpp
index 54e3f039..c345e22e 100644
--- a/amarok/src/tracktooltip.cpp
+++ b/amarok/src/tracktooltip.cpp
@@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ void TrackToolTip::slotImageChanged( const TQString &remoteURL )
     if( CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastEpisodeBundle( m_tags.url().url(), &peb ) )
     {
         PodcastChannelBundle pcb;
-        if( CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastChannelBundle( peb.tqparent().url(), &pcb ) )
+        if( CollectionDB::instance()->getPodcastChannelBundle( peb.parent().url(), &pcb ) )
         {
             if( pcb.imageURL().url() == remoteURL )
             {